103132 2 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Users Manual CFW 09_V3_7X_E11_0899_5306 User

User Manual: Pump 103132 2 Weg Variable Frequency Drive Users Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 361

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

FREQUENCY
INVERTER
MANUAL

Series: CFW-09
Software Version: 3.7X
Manual Number/Revision:
0899.5306 E/11

07/2006

ATTENTION!
It is very important to check if the
inverter software version is the same
as indicated above.

Summary of Revisions

The table below describes all revisions made to this manual.
Revision
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
7

8

8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
10

11

Description
Section
First Edition.
Inclusion of the functions Fieldbus and Serial Communication.
See 8.12 and 8.13
Inclusion of the Spare Part List.
See 7.5
Dimension Changing.
See 3.1.2 and 9.4
Inclusion of the PID Regulator.
See item 6
Inclusion of the German Language - Ride-through and Flying-start functions
See item 6
Inclusion of DBW-01; KIT KME; DC Link Inductor
See item 8
Inclusion of item 3.3 - CE Installation
See item 3
Inclusion of new functions such as Ride-Through for Vector Control, Motor Phase Loss .
See item 6
New I/O Expansion Boards EBB.04 and EBB.05.
See item 8
General Revision.
Inclusion of the models from 2.9 to 32A / 500-600V.
See 2.4; 3.1; 3.2.1; 3.3;
4.2; 6.2; 6.3; 7.1; 7.2;
7.4; 7.5; 8.7.1; 8.10.1;
9.1 and 9.1.3
Inclusion of new functions:
See item 6
Control Type of the Speed Regulator, Speed Regulator Differential Gain,
Stop Mode Selection, Access to the parameters with different content than default,
Hysteresis for Nx/Ny, kWh Counter, Load User 1 and 2 the factory Hours Hx, via DIx,
Parameter Setting Disable via DIx, Help Message for E24, “P406=2 in Vector Control”,
Automatic SensorLess Set of P525, Last 10 errors indication, Motor Torque indication
via AOx.
New optional boards: EBC and PLC1.
See item 8
New model CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X/IP56.
See item 8
New models for voltages, currents and powers: Models 500-600V.
See itens 1 to 9
Inclusion of the itens 8.14 Modbus-RTU, 8.17 CFW-09 Supplied by the DC Link See item 8
Line HD, 8.18 CFW-09 RB Regenerative Converter.
Updating of the Spare Part List.
7
Inclusion of new functions:
Overcurrent Protection, Default factory reset 50Hz, Timer Relay, Ramp Holding
New lines of the Current and supply power;
PID Regulator to “Academic” Changing.
General revision and update of thesoftware version (2.6X to 3.1X):
Change on the maximum value of P156 and P401 for some models; Change on the
maximum value of P331; Change on the factory default value of P404.
New functions;
Incorporation of the Mechanical Brake Logic for cranes, Load Detection Logic and
See I, 6, 7 and 8
addition of option “Indication of Torque Current Polarity” at the DOx and RLx
outputs; VVW Control; DC Braking for VVW and Sensorless; Flying Start function for
the Sensorless Control; support for Ethernet/IP communication board; read/write
function for the PLC board parameters through Modbus; Indication of the Analog
Outputs values in read only parameters P027 to P030;Simultaneous indication
of the speed and current in parameter P070; P313 = 4 (Changes to LOCAL mode
keeping the commands);Regulation of the maximum torque current through options
AI1+AI2 and AI2+AI3; function F > Fx; function ready 2

Summary

Quick Parameter Reference, Fault and Status Messages
I. Parameters ........................................................................................ 09
II. Fault messages ..................................................................................... 33
III. Other messages .................................................................................. 33

CHAPTER

1

Safety Notices
1.1 Safety notices in the manual .............................................................. 34
1.2 Safety notices on the product ............................................................. 34
1.3 Preliminary recommendations ............................................................ 34

CHAPTER

2

General Information
2.1 About this manual ............................................................................... 36
2.2 Software version ................................................................................. 36
2.3 About the CFW-09 .............................................................................. 36
2.4 CFW-09 identification Label and Code Number .................................. 38
2.5 Receiving and Storage ........................................................................ 40

CHAPTER

3

Installation
3.1 Mechanical installation ....................................................................... 41
3.1.1 Environment conditions ................................................................ 41
3.1.2 Dimensional of CFW-09 ................................................................ 41
3.1.3 Mounting specifications ................................................................ 42
3.1.3.1 Mounting Inside a Panel ..................................................... 43
3.1.3.2 Mounting on Surface ........................................................... 44
3.1.3.3 Mounting with the heatsink through a surface ..................... 45
3.1.4 Keypad (HMI) and cover removal .................................................. 47
3.2 Electrical installation .......................................................................... 48
3.2.1 Power/grounding terminals ........................................................... 48
3.2.2 Location of the power/grounding/control connections ................... 50
3.2.3 Rated voltage selection ................................................................ 52
3.2.4 Power/Grounding Wiring and Fuses ............................................. 53
3.2.5 Power Connections ...................................................................... 56
3.2.5.1 AC Input Connection ............................................................ 56
3.2.5.2 Output Connections ............................................................. 57
3.2.5.3 Grounding connections ........................................................ 57
3.2.5.4 IT Networks .......................................................................... 58
3.2.6 Control Wiring .............................................................................. 60
3.2.7 Typical Terminal Connections ....................................................... 63
3.3 European EMC Directive - requirements for conforming installations .. 66
3.3.1 Installation .................................................................................... 66
3.3.2 Epcos filters ................................................................................. 67
3.3.3 Schaffner filters definitions ............................................................ 70
3.3.4 EMC filter characteristics ............................................................. 73

Summary

CHAPTER

4

Keypad (HMI) Operation
4.1 Discription of the Keypad .................................................................... 87
4.2 Use of the Keypad (HMI) .................................................................... 89
4.2.1 Keypad Operation ........................................................................ 89
4.2.2 "Read-Only" Variables and Status ................................................ 90
4.2.3 Parameter Viewing and Programming .......................................... 91

CHAPTER

5

Start-up
5.1 Pre-Power Checks ............................................................................ 94
5.2 Initial Power-up .................................................................................. 94
5.3 Start-up .............................................................................................. 99
5.3.1 Type of Control: V/F 60Hz - Operation via Keypad (HMI) ............ 100
5.3.2 Type of Control: Sensorless or Vector with Encoder
(Operation Via Keypad (HMI)) .................................................... 103
5.3.3 Type of Control: VVW - Keypad Operation ................................. 110

CHAPTER

6

Detailed Parameter Description
6.1 Access and Read Only Parameters - P000 to P099 ......................... 119
6.2 Regulation Parameters - P100 to P199 ............................................ 125
6.3 Configuration Parameters - P200 to P399 ........................................ 148
6.3.1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master/Slave
Function - P351 to P368 ........................................................... 207
6.4 Motor Parameters - P400 to P499 .................................................... 213
6.5 Special Functions Parameters - P500 to P699 ................................. 219
6.5.1 PID Regulator ............................................................................. 219
6.5.2 Description ................................................................................. 219

CHAPTER

7

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
7.1 Faults and Possible Causes ............................................................. 227
7.2 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 232
7.3 Contacting WEG .............................................................................. 234
7.4 Preventive Maintenance .................................................................... 234
7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions .................................................................. 235
7.5 Spare Part List .................................................................................. 236

CHAPTER

8

CFW-09 Options and Accessories
8.1 I/O Expansion Boards ...................................................................... 247
8.1.1 EBA (I/O Expansion Board A) ..................................................... 247

Summary

8.1.2 EBB (I/O Expansion Board B) .................................................... 250
8.1.3 EBE ............................................................................................ 253
8.2 Incremental Encoder ......................................................................... 253
8.2.1 EBA/EBB Boards ....................................................................... 253
8.2.2 EBC Board ................................................................................. 255
8.3 Keypad with Led's Only .................................................................... 257
8.4 Remote Keypad and Cables ............................................................. 257
8.5 Blank Covers .................................................................................... 261
8.6 RS-232 PC Communication Kit ........................................................ 261
8.7 Line Reactor/DC Bus Choke ............................................................. 262
8.7.1 Application Criteria ...................................................................... 263
8.7.2 DC link Inductor Built in .............................................................. 265
8.8 Load Reactor .................................................................................... 266
8.9 RFI Filter ........................................................................................... 266
8.10 Dynamic Braking ............................................................................ 267
8.10.1 DB Resistor Sizing .................................................................. 267
8.10.2 Installation ............................................................................... 269
8.10.3 Dynamic Braking Module-DBW-01 and DBW-02 .................... 270
8.10.3.1 DBW-01 and DBW-02 Identification Label ................... 271
8.10.3.2 Mechanical Installation ................................................ 271
8.10.3.3 Installation/Connection ................................................ 274
8.11 Through Surface Mounting Kit ......................................................... 276
8.12 Fieldbus ........................................................................................... 276
8.12.1 Installation of the Fielbus Kit ................................................... 277
8.12.2 Profibus-DP ............................................................................. 280
8.12.3 Device-Net ............................................................................... 282
8.12.4 Ethernet/IP .............................................................................. 285
8.12.5 Use to the Fieldbus/Related Parameters of the CFW-09. ....... 292
8.12.5.1 Variables Read from the Inverter .................................. 292
8.12.5.2 Variables Written in the Inverter ................................... 294
8.12.5.3 Fault Indications .......................................................... 296
8.12.5.4 Addressing of the CFW-09 variables in the Fieldbus ... 297
8.13 Serial Communiaction ..................................................................... 298
8.13.1 Introduction ............................................................................. 298
8.13.2 Interfaces Description ............................................................. 299
8.13.2.1 RS-485 ......................................................................... 299
8.13.2.2 RS-232 ......................................................................... 300
8.13.3 Protocol Definitions ................................................................. 300
8.13.3.1 Used Terms .................................................................. 300
8.13.3.2 Parameters/Variables Resolution ................................. 301
8.13.3.3 Characters Format ....................................................... 301
8.13.3.4 Protocol ........................................................................ 301
8.13.3.5 Exection and Telegram Test ......................................... 303
8.13.3.6 Telegram Sequence ...................................................... 304
8.13.3.7 Variable Code ............................................................... 304
8.13.4 Telegram Examples ................................................................ 304
8.13.5 Variables and Errors of the Serial Communication .................. 305
8.13.5.1 Basic Variables ............................................................ 305
8.13.5.2 Examples of Telegrams with Basic Variables ............... 308
8.13.5.3 Parameters Related to the Serial Communication ........ 309
8.13.5.4 Errors Related to the Serial Communication ................ 310
8.13.6 Times for Read/Write of Telegrams ......................................... 310
8.13.7 Physical Connection of the RS-232 and RS-485 Interface ....... 311
8.14 Modbus-RTU ................................................................................... 312
8.14.1 Introduction in the Modbus-RTU Protocol ................................ 312
8.14.1.1 Transmission Modes .................................................... 312

Summary

8.14.1.2 Message Structure in RTU Mode .................................. 312
8.14.2 Operation of the CFW-09 in the Modbus-RTU Network ........... 314
8.14.2.1 Interface RS-232 and RS-485 Description .................... 314
8.14.2.2 Inverter Configuration in the Modbus-RTU Network ...... 315
8.14.2.3 Access to the Inverter Data .......................................... 315
8.14.3 Detailed Function Description ................................................... 318
8.14.3.1 Function 01 - Read Coils .............................................. 319
8.14.3.2 Function 03 - Read Holding Register ............................ 319
8.14.3.3 Function 05 - Write Single Coil ..................................... 320
8.14.3.4 Function 06 - Write Single Register ............................. 321
8.14.3.5 Function 15 - Write Multiple Coils ................................ 322
8.14.3.6 Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers ......................... 323
8.14.3.7 Function 43 - Read Device Identification ....................... 324
8.14.4 Communication Errors ............................................................ 325
8.14.4.1 Error Messages ............................................................ 325
8.15 KIT KME (for Extractable Mounting) ............................................... 327
8.16 CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X ............................................................. 328
8.16.1 Enclosure Specifications ......................................................... 328
8.16.2 Mechanical Installation ............................................................ 328
8.16.3 Electrical Installation ............................................................... 330
8.16.4 Closing the Drive ..................................................................... 330
8.16.5 How to Specify ........................................................................ 331
8.17 CFW-09 Supplied by the DC link - line HD ..................................... 331
8.18 CFW-09 RB Regenerative Converter ............................................... 331
8.19 PLC Board ...................................................................................... 333

CHAPTER 9

Technical Specification
9.1 Power Data ...................................................................................... 334
9.1.1 Power supply specifications ....................................................... 334
9.1.2 220-230V Power Supply ............................................................. 335
9.1.3 380-480V Power Supply ............................................................. 335
9.1.4 500-600V Power Supply ............................................................. 336
9.1.5 660-690V Power Supply ............................................................. 338
9.2 Electronics/General Data .................................................................. 341
9.2.1 Applicable standards .................................................................. 342
9.3 Optional Devices ............................................................................... 343
9.3.1 I/O Expansion Board EBA .......................................................... 343
9.3.2 I/O Expansion Board EBB .......................................................... 343
9.4 Mechanical Data ............................................................................... 344

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE, FAULT AND STATUS MESSAGES
Software: V3.7X
Application:
CFW-09 Model:
Serial Number:
Responsible:
Date:
/

/

.

I. Parameters
Parameters

Function

Factory

Adjustable Range

P000

Parameter Access
READ ONLY PARAMETERS

0 to 999
P001 to P099

P001

Speed Reference

P002

Motor Speed

P003

0

Unit

User's

Page

-

119

0 to P134

rpm

119

0 to P134

rpm

119

Motor Current

0 to 2600

A (rms)

119

P004

DC Link Voltage

0 to 1235

V

120

P005

Motor Frequency

0 to 1020

Hz

120

P006

Inverter Status

rdy

-

120

run
Sub
EXY
P007

Motor Voltage

0 to 800

V

120

P009

Motor Torque

0 to 150.0

%

120

P010

Output Power

0.0 to 1200

kW

120

P012

Digital Inputs DI1 ... DI8 Status

0 = Inactive (Open)

-

120

-

121

1 = Active (Closed)
P013

Digital and Relay Outputs DO1, DO2,

0 = Inactive (Dropped-out)

RL1, RL2, and RL3 Status

1 = Active (Picked-up)

P014

Last Fault

0 to 70

-

122

P015

Second Previous Fault

0 to 70

-

122

P016

Third Previous Fault

0 to 70

-

122

P017

Fourth Previous Fault

0 to 70

-

122

P018

Analog Input AI1’ Value

-100 to +100

%

122

P019

Analog Input AI2’ Value

-100 to +100

%

122

P020

Analog Input AI3’ Value

-100 to +100

%

122

P021

Analog Input AI4’ Value

-100 to +100

%

122

P022

WEG Use

0 to 100

%

122

P023

Software Version

X.XX

-

122

P024

A/D Conversion Value of AI4

-32768 to +32767

-

122

P025

A/D Conversion Value of Iv

0 to 1023

-

122

P026

A/D Conversion Value of Iw

0 to 1023

-

122

P027

AO1 Value

0 to 100

%

123

P028

AO2 Value

0 to 100

%

123

P029

AO3 Value

-100 to +100

%

123

P030

AO4 Value

-100 to +100

%

123

P040

PID Process Variable

0.0 to 100

%

123

P042

Powered Time

0 to 65530

h

123

P043

Enabled Time

0 to 6553

h

123

P044

kWh Counter

0 to 65535

kWh

124

9

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

P060

Fifth Error

0 to 70

-

124

P061

Sixth Error

0 to 70

-

124

P062

Seventh Error

0 to 70

-

124

P063

Eighth Error

0 to 70

-

124

P064

Ninth Error

0 to 70

-

124

P065

Tenth Error

0 to 70

-

124

P070

Motor Speed and Motor Current

0 to P134

rpm

124

0 to 2600

A (rms)

P071

Command Word

0 a 65535

-

124

P072

Fieldbus Speed Reference

0 a 65535

-

124

REGULATION PARAMETERS

P100 to P199

Ramps
P100

Acceleration Time

0.0 to 999

20.0

s

125

P101

Deceleration Time

0.0 to 999

20.0

s

125

P102

Acceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999

20.0

s

125

P103

Deceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999

20.0

s

125

P104

S Ramp

0=Inactive (Linear)

0=Inactive

%

125

1=Active

-

125

1=50
2=100
Speed References
P120

Speed Reference Backup

0=Inactive
1=Active

P121

Keypad Speed Reference

P133 to P134

90

rpm

126

rpm

126

rpm

126

rpm

127

JOG or JOG+ Speed Reference

00 to P134

150 (125)

(11)

P123 (2) (11)

JOG- Speed Reference

00 to P134

150 (125)

(11)

P124 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 1

P133 to P134

90 (75) (11)

P125 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 2

P133 to P134

300 (250)

(11)

rpm

127

rpm

127

rpm

127

P122

(2) (11)

(2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 3

P133 to P134

600 (500)

(11)

P127 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 4

P133 to P134

900 (750)

(11)

P128 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 5

P133 to P134

1200 (1000)

(11)

rpm

127

P129 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 6

P133 to P134

1500 (1250)

(11)

rpm

127

(11)

rpm

127

rpm

127

%

128

rpm

128

rpm

128

rpm

129

-

129

P126

(2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 7

P133 to P134

1800 (1500)

P131 (2) (11)

Multispeed Reference 8

P133 to P134

1650 (1375) (11)

(0 to 99) x P134

10

P130

Speed Limits
P132

(1)

Maximum Overspeed Level

100=Disabled
P133 (2) (11)
P134

(2) (11)

Minimum Speed Reference

0 to (P134-1)

90 (75) (11)

Maximum Speed Reference

(P133+1) to (3.4xP402)

1800 (1500)

(11)

I/F Control
P135 (2)

Speed transition to I/F Control

0 to 90

18

P136 (*)

Current Reference (I*)

0= Imr

1=1.11x Imr

for I/F Control

1=1.11x Imr
2=1.22x Imr
3=1.33x Imr
4=1.44x Imr
5=1.55x Imr
6= 1.66x Imr
7=1.77x Imr
8=1.88x Imr
9=2.00x Imr

(*)P136 Has different functions for V/F and Vector control

10

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

V/F Control
P136 (*)

Manual Boost Torque

0 to 9

1

-

130

P137

Autommatic Torque Boost

0.00 to 1.00

0.00

-

131

P138

Slip Compensation

-10.0 to +10.0

0.0

%

131

P139

Output Current Filter

0.00 to 16.00

1.00

s

132

P140

Dwell Time at Start

0.0 to 10.0

0.0

s

132

P141

Dwell Speed at Start

0 to 300

90

rpm

132

Adjustable V/F
P142 (1)

Maximum Output Voltage

0.0 to 100.0

100.0

%

133

P143 (1)

Intermediate Output Voltage

0.0 to 100.0

50.0

%

133

P144 (1)

Output Voltage at 3Hz

0.0 to 100.0

8.0

%

133

Field Weakening Speed

P133 (>90) to P134

1800

rpm

133

Intermediate Speed

90 to P145

900

rpm

133

0=With Losses

1=Without Losses

-

134

339 to 400 (P296=0)

400

V

134

(V/F control / Vector control

585 to 800 (P296=1)

800

with optimal braking)

616 to 800 (P296=2)

800

678 to 800 (P296=3)

800

739 to 800 (P296=4)

800

809 to 1000 (P296=5)

1000

885 to 1000 (P296=6)

1000

924 to 1000 (P296=7)

1000

1063 to 1200 (P296=8)

1200

P145

(1)

P146 (1)

DC Link Voltage Regulation
P150 (1)

DC Link Voltage Regulation Mode

1=Without Losses
2=Enable/Disable
via DI3...DI8
P151 (6) (*)

DC Link Voltage Regulation Level

P152

Proportional Gain

0.00 to 9.99

0.00

-

138

P153 (6)

Dynamic Braking Level

339 to 400 (P296=0)

375

V

138

585 to 800 (P296=1)

618

616 to 800 (P296=2)

675

678 to 800 (P296=3)

748

739 to 800 (P296=4)

780

809 to 1000 (P296=5)

893

885 to 1000 (P296=6)

972

924 to 1000 (P296=7)

972

1063 to 1200 (P296=8)

1174

P154

Dynamic Braking Resistor

0.0 to 500

0.0

Ω

139

P155

DB Resistor Power Rating

0.02 to 650

2.60

kW

139

Overload Current 100% Speed

P157 to 1.3xP295 (12)

1.1xP401

A

140

Overload Current 50% Speed

P158 to P156

0.9xP401

A

140

Overload Current 5% Speed

(0.2xP295) to P157

0.5xP401

A

140

0=Speed

-

141

Overload Currents
P156 (2) (7) (12)
P157

(2) (7)

P158 (2) (7)

Speed Regulator
P160 (1)
P161 (3)
P162

(3)

Optimization of the

0=Speed

Speed Regulator

1=Torque

Proportional Gain

0.0 to 63.9

7.4

-

142

Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.023

-

142

P163

Local Speed Reference Offset

-999 to +999

0

-

144

P164

Remote Speed Reference Offset

-999 to +999

0

-

144

(*) P151 has different function for V/F or Vector control.

11

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

P165

Speed Filter

0.012 to 1.000

0.012

s

144

P166

Speed Regulator Differential Gain

0.00 to 7.99

0.00 (without

-

144

144

differential action)
Current Regulator
P167 (4)

Proportional Gain

0.00 to 1.99

0.5

-

P168 (4)

Integral Gain

0.000 to 1.999

0.010

-

144

P169 (*) (7)

Maximum Output Current (V/F Control) (0.2xP295) to (1.8xP295)

1.5xP295

A

145

P169 (*) (7)

Maximum Forward Torque Current

0 to 180

125

%

145

0 to 180

125

%

145

0 to 180

125

%

146

0 to 180

125

%

146

0=Ramp

0=Ramp

-

146

-

147

(Vector Control)
P170

Maximum Reverse Torque Current
(Vector Control)

P171

Maximum Forward Torque Current at
Maximum Speed (P134)

P172

Maximum Reverse Torque Current at
Maximum Speed (P134)

P173

Curve Type of the Max. Torque

1=Step
Flux Regulator
P175 (5)
P176

(5)

Proportional Gain

0.0 to 31.9

2.0

Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.020

-

147

P177

Minimum Flux

0 to 120

0

%

147

P178

Nominal Flux

0 to 120

100

%

147

P179

Maximum Flux

0 to 120

120

%

147

P180

Field Weakenig Start Point

0 to 120

95

%

147

P181 (1)

Magnetization Mode

0=General Enable

0=General Enable

-

147

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

P200 to P399
1=On

-

148

0, 1, 2, 3 (11)

-

148

0 (1) (11)

-

148

0=None

-

148

0=Not Used

-

149

1=Start/Stop
Generic Parameters
P200

Password

0=Off
1=On

P201 (11)

Language Selection

0=Portuguese
1=English
2=Spanish
3=German

P202 (1) (2) (11)

Type of Control

0=V/F 60Hz
1=V/F 50Hz
2=V/F Adjustable
3=Sensorless Vector
4=Vector with Encoder
5=VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)

P203 (1)

Special Function Selection

0=None
1=PID Regulator

P204 (1) (10)

Load/Save Parameters

0=Not Used
1=Not Used
2=Not Used
3=Reset P043
4=Reset P044
5=Loads Factory Default-60Hz
6=Loads Factory Default-50Hz

(*) P169 has different function for V/F or Vector control.

12

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

7=Loads User Default 1
8=Loads User Default 2
9=Not Used
10=Save User Default 1
11=Save User Default 2
P205

Display Default Selection

0=P005 (Motor Frequency)

2=P002

-

150

1=P003 (Motor Current)
2=P002 (Motor Speed)
3=P007 (Motor Voltage)
4=P006 (Inverter Status)
5=P009 (Motor Torque)
6=P070
7=P040
P206

Auto-Reset Time

0 to 255

0

s

151

P207

Reference Engineering Unit 1

32 to 127 (ASCII)

114=r

-

151

-

151

A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
P208 (2) (11)
P209

(1)

(11)

Reference Scale Factor

1 to 18000

1800 (1500)

Motor Phase Loss Detection

0=Off

0=Off

-

152

1=On
P210

Decimal Point of the Speed Indication 0, 1, 2 or 3

0

-

152

P211(1)

Zero Speed Disable

0=Off

-

152

P212

Condition to Leave Zero

0=N* or N>P291

0=N* or N>P291

-

153

Speed Disable

1=N*>P291

Time Delay for Zero Speed Disable

0 to 999

0

s

153

Line Phase Loss Detection

0=Off

1=On

-

153

0=Off

-

153

112=p

-

155

109=m

-

155

0 to 150

127

-

155

0=Always Local

2=Keypad

-

155

1=Always Remote

(Default Local)

0=Off
1=On

P213
P214

(1) (9)

1=On
P215 (1)

P216

Keypad Copy Function

Reference Engineering Unit 2

0=Off
1=Inverter

→

Keypad

2=Keypad

→

Inverter

32 to 127 (ASCII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...

P217

Reference Engineering Unit 3

32 to 127 (ACSII)
A, B, ... , Y, Z
0, 1, ... , 9
#, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...

P218

LCD Display Contrast
Adjustment
Local/Remote Definition

P220

(1)

Local/Remote Selection Source

2=Keypad (Default Local)
3=Keypad (Default Remote)
4=DI2 to DI8
5=Serial (L)

13

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

6=Serial (R)
7=Fieldbus (L)
8=Fieldbus (R)
9=PLC (L)
10=PLC (R)
P221(1)

Local Speed Reference Selection

0=keypad

0=Keypad

-

156

1=AI1

-

156

0=Always Forward

2=Keypad

-

157

1=Always Reverse

(Default FWD)

0=[I] and [O] Keys

-

157

1=Keypad

-

157

1=AI1
2=AI2
3=AI3
4=AI4
5=Add AI > 0
6=Add AI
7=EP
8=Multispeed
9=Serial
10=Fieldbus
11=PLC
P222(1)

Remote Speed Reference

0=keypad

Selection

1=AI1
2=AI2
3=AI3
4=AI4
5=Add AI > 0
6=Add AI
7= EP
8=Multispeed
9=Serial
10=Fieldbus
11=PLC

P223 (1) (8)

Local FWD/REV Selection

2=Keypad (Default FWD)
3=Keypad (Default REV)
4=DI2
5=Serial (Default FWD)
6=Serial (Default REV)
7=Fieldbus (Default FWD)
8=Fieldbus (Default REV)
9=Polarity AI4
10=PLC (FWD)
11=PLC (REV)
P224 (1)

Local Start/Stop Selection

0=[I] and [O] Keys
1=DIx
2=Serial
3=Fieldbus
4=PLC

P225 (1) (8)

Local JOG Selection

0=Disable
1=Keypad
2=DI3 to DI8
3=Serial

14

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

4=Fieldbus
5=PLC
P226

(1) (8)

Remote FWD/REV Selection

0=Always Forward

4=DI2

-

158

1=DIx

-

158

2=DI3 to DI8

-

158

0=Ramp to Stop

-

164

0=Off

-

164

1=Always Reverse
2=Keypad (Default FWD)
3=Keypad (Default REV)
4=DI2
5=Serial (Default FWD)
6=Serial (Default REV)
7=Fieldbus (Default FWD)
8=Fieldbus (Default REV)
9=Polarity AI4
10=PLC (FWD)
11=PLC (REV)
P227

(1)

Remote Start/Stop Selection

0=[I] and [O] Keys
1=DIx
2=Serial
3=Fieldbus
4=PLC

P228 (1) (8)

Remote JOG Selection

0=Disable
1=Keypad
2=DI3 to DI8
3=Serial
4=Fieldbus
5=PLC

Stop Model Definition
P232 (1)

Stop Mode Selection

0=Ramp to Stop
1=Coast to Stop
2=Fast Stop

Analog Inputs
P233

Analog Inputs Dead Zone

0=Off
1=On

P234

Analog Input AI1 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

165

P235 (1)

Analog Input AI1 Signal

0=(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20)mA

0=(0 to 10)V /

-

166

1=(4 to 20)mA

(0 to 20)mA

2=(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0)mA
3=(20 to 4)mA
P236
P237

(1) (8)

Analog Input AI1 Offset

-100 to +100

0.0

%

166

Analog Input AI2 Function

0=P221/P222

0=P221/P222

-

166

1=N* without ramp
2=Maximum Torque Current
3=PID Process Variable
P238

Analog Input AI2 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

167

P239 (1)

Analog Input AI2 Signal

0=(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20)mA

0=(0 to 10)V /

-

167

1=(4 to 20)mA

(0 to 20)mA

2=(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0)mA
3=(20 to 4)mA

15

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

P240

Analog Input AI2 Offset

-100 to +100

0.0

%

168

P241 (1)

Analog Input AI3 Function

0=P221/P222

0=P221/P222

-

168

(Requires Optional I/O Expansion

1=Without ramp

Board EBB)

2=Maximum Torque Current
3=PID Process Variable

P242

Analog Input AI3 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

169

P243 (1)

Analog Input AI3 Signal

0=(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20)mA

0=(0 to 10)V /

-

169

1=(4 to 20)mA

(0 to 20)mA

2=(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0)mA
3=(20 to 4)mA
P244

Analog Input AI3 Offset

-100 to +100

0.0

%

169

P245

Analog Input AI4 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

169

P246 (1)

Analog Input AI4 Signal

0=(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20)mA

0=(0 to 10)V /

-

169

(Requires Optional I/O Expansion

1=(4 to 20)mA

(0 to 20)mA

Board EBA)

2=(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0)mA
3=(20 to 4)mA
4=(-10 to +10)V

P247

Analog Input AI4 Offset

-100 to +100

0.0

%

170

P248

Input Filter AI2

00 to 16.0

0.0

s

170

Analog Output AO1 Function

0=Speed Reference

2=Real Speed

-

170

(CC9 or EBB board)

1=Total Reference

Analog Outputs
P251

2=Real Speed
3=Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4=Torque Current (Vector)
5=Output Current
6=PID Process Variable
7=Active Current (V/F)
8=Power (kW)
9=PID Setpoint
10=Positive Torque Current
11=Motor Torque
12=PLC
13= Dead Zone for
Speed Indication
P252

Analog Output AO1 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

170

P253

Analog Output AO2 Function

0=Speed Reference

5=Output Current

-

170

(CC9 or EBB board)

1=Total Reference
2=Real Speed
3=Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4=Torque Current (Vector)
5=Output Current
6=PID Process Variable
7=Active Current (V/F)
8=Power (kW)
9=PID Setpoint
10=Positive Torque Current

16

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

11=Motor Torque
12=PLC
13=Dead Zone for
Speed Indication
P254

Analog Output AO2 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

170

P255

Analog Output AO3 Function

0=Speed Reference

2=Real Speed

-

170

(Requires Optional I/O Expansion

1=Total Reference

Board EBA)

2=Real Speed
3=Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4=Torque Current (Vector)
5=Output Current
6=PID Process Variable
7=Active Current(V/F)
8=Power (kW)
9=PID Setpoint
10= Positive Torque Current
11=Motor Torque
12=PLC
13=Not Used
49 signals for exclusive
use of WEG

P256

Analog Output AO3 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

171

P257

Analog Output AO4 Function

0=Speed Reference

5=Output Current

-

171

(Requires optional I/O Expansion

1=Total Reference

Board EBA)

2=Real Speed
3=Torque Current
Reference (Vector)
4=Torque Current (Vector)
5=Output Current
6=PID Process Variable
7=Active Current (V/F)
8=Power (kW)
9=PID Setpoint
10= Positive Torque Current
11=Motor Torque
12=PLC
13=Not Used
49 signals for exclusive
use of WEG

P258

Analog Output AO4 Gain

0.000 to 9.999

1.000

-

171

P259

AO1 Value

0 to P134

1000

rpm

172

0=Not Used

1=Start/Stop

-

173

0=FWD/REV

-

173

Digital Inputs
P263 (1)

Digital Input DI1 Function

1=Start/Stop
2=General Enable
3=Fast Stop
P264 (1)

Digital Input DI2 Function

0=FWD/REV
1=Local/Remote

17

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

2=Not Used
3=Not Used
4=Not Used
5=Not Used
6=Not Used
7=Not Used
8=Reverse Run
P265 (1) (8)

Digital Input DI3 Function

0=Not Used

0=Not Used

-

173

0=Not Used

-

173

1=Local/ Remote
2=General Enable
3=JOG
4=No External Fault
5=Increase E.P.
6=Ramp 2
7=Not Used
8=Forward Run
9=Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Start (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Not used
17=Disables Flying Start
18=DC Voltage Regulator
19=Parameter Setting
Disable
20=Load user
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
P266 (1)

Digital Input DI4 Function

0=Not used
1=Local/ Remote
2=General Enable
3=JOG
4=No external Fault
5=Decrease E.P.
6=Ramp 2
7=Multispeed (MS0)
8=Reverse Run
9= Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Stop (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Not used
17=Disables Flying Start

18

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

18=DC voltage regulator
19=Parameter Setting
Disable
20=Load User
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
P267

(1)

Digital Input DI5 Function

0=Not Used

3=JOG

-

173

6=Ramp 2

-

174

1=Local/ Remote
2=General Enable
3=JOG
4=No External Fault
5=Increase EP
6=Ramp 2
7=Multispeed (MS1)
8=Fast Stop
9= Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Start (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Not Used
17=Disables Flying Start
18=DC Voltage Regulator
19=Parameter Setting
Disable
20=Load User
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
P268

(1)

Digital Input DI6 Function

0=Not Used
1=Local/ Remote
2=General Enable
3=JOG
4=No External Fault
5=Decrease EP
6=Ramp 2
7=Multispeed (MS2)
8=Fast Stop
9= Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Stop (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Not Used
17=Disables flying start
18=DC voltage regulator

19

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

19=Parameter setting
disable
20=Load user
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
P269 (1)

Digital Input DI7 Function

0=Not Used

(Requires optional I/O

1=Local/ Remote

expansion board EBA or EBB)

2=General Enable

0=Not used

-

174

0=Not used

-

174

3=JOG
4=No External Fault
5=Not Used
6=Ramp 2
7=Not Used
8=Fast Stop
9= Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Start (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Not Used
17=Disables Flying Start
18=DC Voltage Regulator
19=Parameter Setting
Disable
20=Load User
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
P270 (1)

Digital Input DI8 Function

0=Not used

(Requires optional I/O

1=Local/Remote

expansion board EBA or EBB)

2=General Enable
3=JOG
4=No External Fault
5=Not Used
6=Ramp 2
7=Not Used
8=Fast Stop
9= Speed/Torque
10=JOG+
11=JOG12=Reset
13=Fieldbus
14=Stop (3 wire)
15=Man/Auto
16=Motor Thermistor
17=Disables Flying Start
18=DC Voltage Regulator
19=Parameter Setting

20

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

Disable
20=Not Used
21=Timer (RL2)
22=Timer (RL3)
Digital Outputs
P275 (1)

Digital Ouput DO1 Function

0=Not used

(requires optional I/O

1=N* > Nx

expansion board EBA or EBB)

2=N > Nx

0=Not Used

-

181

3=N < Ny
4=N =N*
5=Zero Speed
6=Is > Ix
7=Is < Ix
8=Torque > Tx
9=Torque < Tx
10=Remote
11=Run
12=Ready
13=No Fault
14=No E00
15=No E01+E02+E03
16=No E04
17=No E05
18=(4 to 20)mA OK
19=Fieldbus
20=FWD
21=Proc.Var. > VPx
22=Proc. Var. < VPy
23=Ride-Through
24=Pre-charge OK
25=Fault
26=Enabled Hours > Hx
27=Not Used
28=Not Used
29=N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30=Brake (Actual Speed)
31=Brake (Total Reference)
32=Overweight
33=Slack Cable
34=Torque Polarity +/35=Torque Polarity -/+
36=F > Fx _ 1
37=F > Fx _ 2
38=Set Point = Process
Variable
39=No E32
40=Ready 2

21

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters
P276 (1)

Function

Adjustable Range

Digital Output DO2 Function

0=Not Used

(Requires optional I/O

1=N* > Nx

expansion board EBA or EBB)

2=N > Nx

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

0=Not used

-

181

13=No Fault

-

181

3=N < Ny
4=N =N*
5=Zero Speed
6=Is > Ix
7=Is < Ix
8=Torque > Tx
9=Torque < Tx
10=Remote
11=Run
12=Ready
13=No Fault
14=No E00
15=No E01+E02+E03
16=No E04
17=No E05
18=(4 to 20)mA OK
19=Fieldbus
20=FWD
21=Proc.Var. > VPx
22=Proc. Var. < VPy
23=Ride-Through
24=Pre-charge OK
25=Fault
26=Enabled Hours > Hx
27=Not Used
28=Not Used
29=N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30=Brake (Actual Speed)
31=Brake (Total Reference)
32=Overweight
33=Slack Cable
34=Torque Polarity +/35=Torque Polarity -/+
36=F > Fx _ 1
37=F > Fx _ 2
38=Set Point = Process
Variable
39=No E32
40=Ready 2
P277

(1)

Relay Output RL1 Function

0=Not Used
1=N* > Nx
2=N > Nx
3=N < Ny
4=N =N*
5=Zero Speed
6=Is > Ix

22

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

7=Is < Ix
8=Torque > Tx
9=Torque < Tx
10=Remote
11=Run
12=Ready
13=No Fault
14=No E00
15=No E01+E02+E03
16=No E04
17=No E05
18=(4 to 20)mA OK
19=Fieldbus
20=FWD
21=Proc.Var. > VPx
22=Proc. Var. < VPy
23=Ride-Through
24=Pre-charge OK
25=Fault
26=Enabled Hours > Hx
27=PLC
28=Not Used
29=N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30=Brake (Actual Speed)
31=Brake (Total Reference)
32=Overweight
33=Slack Cable
34=Torque Polarity +/35=Torque Polarity -/+
36=F > Fx _ 1
37=F > Fx _ 2
38=Set Point = Process
Variable
39=No E32
40=Ready 2
P279 (1)

Relay Output RL2 Function

0=Not used

2= N > Nx

-

181

1=N* > Nx
2=N > Nx
3=N < Ny
4=N =N*
5=Zero Speed
6=Is > Ix
7=Is < Ix
8=Torque > Tx
9=Torque < Tx
10=Remote
11=Run
12=Ready
13=No Fault

23

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

14=No E00
15=No E01+E02+E03
16=No E04
17=No E05
18=(4 to 20)mA OK
19=Fieldbus
20=FWD
21=Proc.Var. > VPx
22=Proc. Var. < VPy
23=Ride-Through
24=Pre-charge OK
25=Fault
26=Enabled Hours > Hx
27=PLC
28=Timer
29=N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30=Brake (Actual Speed)
31=Brake (Total Reference)
32=Overweight
33=Slack Cable
34=Torque Polarity +/35=Torque Polarity -/+
36=F > Fx _ 1
37=F > Fx _ 2
38=Set Point = Process
Variable
39=No E32
40=Ready 2
P280 (1)

Relay Output RL3 Function

0=Not used
1=N* > Nx
2=N > Nx
3=N < Ny
4=N =N*
5=Zero Speed
6=Is > Ix
7=Is < Ix
8=Torque > Tx
9=Torque < Tx
10=Remote
11=Run
12=Ready
13=No Fault
14=No E00
15=No E01+E02+E03
16=No E04
17=No E05
18=(4 to 20)mA OK
19=Fieldbus
20=FWD
21=Proc.Var. > VPx

24

1= N*>Nx

-

181

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

22=Proc. Var. < VPy
23=Ride-Through
24=Pre-charge OK
25=Fault
26=Enabled Hours > Hx
27=PLC
28=Timer
29=N > Nx and Nt > Nx
30=Brake (Actual Speed)
31=Brake (Total Reference)
32=Overweight
33=Slack Cable
34=Torque Polarity +/35=Torque Polarity -/+
36=F > Fx _ 1
37=F > Fx _ 2
38=Set Point = Process
Variable
39=No E32
40=Ready 2
P283

Time for RL2 ON

0.0 to 300

0.0

s

187

P284

Time for RL2 OFF

0.0 to 300

0.0

s

187

P285

Time for RL3 ON

0.0 to 300

0.0

s

187

P286

Time for RL3 OFF

0.0 to 300

0.0

s

187

%

194

rpm

194

Nx, Ny, Ix, Zero Speed Zone, N=N* and Tx
P287

Hysterese for Nx/Ny

0.0 to 5.0

1.0

(2) (11)

Nx Speed

0 to P134

120 (100)

P289 (2) (11)

Ny Speed

0 to P134

1800 (1500)

P290 (7)

Ix Current

(0 to 2.0)xP295

P291

Zero Speed Zone

1 to 100

P288

(11)
(11)

rpm

194

1.0xP295

A

194

1

%

194

P292

N=N* Band

1 to 100

1

%

194

P293

Tx Torque

0 to 200

100

%

194

Hours Hx

0 to 6553

4320

h

194

According to

-

195

P294

Inverter Data
P295 (1)

Inverter Rated Current

220-230V Models
3=6A

10=28.0A

4=7.0A

13=45.0A

6=10.0A

14=54.0A

7=13.0A

16=70.0A

8=16.0A

17=86.0A

9=24.0A

18=105.0A

Inverter Model

19=130.0A

25

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Adjustable Range
380-480V Models
0=3.6A

20=142.0A

1=4.0A

21=180.0A

2=5.5A

55=211.0A

5=9.0A

22=240.0A

7=13.0A

67=312.0A

8=16.0A

23=361A

9=24.0A

24=450.0A

11=30.0A

69=515.0A

12=38.0A

25=600.0A

13=45.0A

33=686A

15=60.0A

34=855A

16=70.0A

35=1140.0A

17=86.0A

36=1283 A

18=105.0A 37=1710 A
500-600V Models
39=2.9A
47=53.0A
40=4.2A

48=63.0A

4=7A

49=79.0A

6=10A

25=600A

41=12A

72=652A

42=14A

73=794A

43=22A

76=897A

44=27A

78=978A

45=32.0A

79=1191A

46=44.0A

81=1345A

500-690V Models
51=107A 60=315A
53=147A 62=343A
55=211A 63=418A
57=247A 65=472A

Models 500-690V
50=107A 68=492A
52=147A

70=580A

54=211A

71=646A

56=247A

74=813A

58=259A

75=869A

59=305A

77=969A

61=340A

80=1220A

64=428A
Special Models
38=2A

29=400A

66=33A

30=570A

26=200A

31=700A

27=230A

32=900A

28=320A

26

Factory
Setting

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters
P296 (1) (11)

P297 (1) (2)

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

-

Attention!

196

Inverter Rated Voltage

0=220-230V

0=for models

(Rated Input Voltage)

1=380V

220-230V

2=400-415V

3= for models

section

3=440-460V

380-480V

3.2.3 to

4=480V

6=for models

do the

5=500-525V

500-600V and

voltage

6=550-575V

500-690V

7=600V

8= for models

8=660-690V

660-690V

0=1.25

2=5.0

Switching Frequency

See

selection
(11)

kHz

196

1=2.5
2=5.0
3=10.0
DC Braking
P300

DC Braking Time

0.0 to 15.0

0.0

s

197

P301

DC Braking Start Speed

0 to 450

30

rpm

199

P302

DC Braking Voltage

0.0 to 10.0

2.0

%

199

Skip Speed
P303

Skip Speed 1

P133 to P134

600

rpm

199

P304

Skip Speed 2

P133 to P134

900

rpm

199

P305

Skip Speed 3

P133 to P134

1200

rpm

199

P306

Skip Band

0 to 750

0

rpm

199

Serial Communication
P308 (1)

Inverter Address

1 to 30

1

-

199

P309 (1)

Fieldbus

0=Disable

0=Disable

-

200

1=ProDP 2 I/O
2=ProDP 4 I/O
3=ProDP 6 I/O
4=DvNET 2 I/O
5=DvNET 4 I/O
6=DvNET 6 I/O
P310
P312 (1)

STOP Detection in a Profibus

0=Off

Network

1=On

Type of Serial Protocol

0=WBUS Protocol

0=Off
0=WEG Protocol

200
-

200

1=Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps,
no parity
2=Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps,
odd parity
3= Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps,
even parity
4=Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps,
no parity
5=Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps,
odd parity
6=Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps,
even parity
7=Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps,
no parity

27

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Unit

0=Disable by Start/Stop

-

201

0.0=Disabled

s

201

Adjustable Range

User's
Setting

Page

8=Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps,
odd parity
9=Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps,
even parity
P313 (1)

Type of disabling by E28/E29/E30

0=Disable by Start/Stop
1=Disable by General
Enable
2=Not Used
3=Changes to LOCAL 1
4=Changes to LOCAL 2

P314

(1)

P318

Time for Serial Watchdog

0.0=Disabled

Action

0.1 to 999.0

Watchdog detection for the

0=Off

PLC board

1=On

1=On

201

Flying Start/Ride-Through
P320 (1)

Flying Start/Ride-Through

0=Inactive

0=Inactive

-

202

178 to 282 (P296=0)

252

V

202

307 to 487 (P296=1)

436

324 to 513 (P296=2)

459

356 to 564 (P296=3)

505

388 to 616 (P296=4)

550

425 to 674 (P296=5)

602

466 to 737 (P296=6)

660

486 to 770 (P296=7)

689

559 to 885 (P296=8)

792

178 to 282 (P296=0)

245

V

203

307 to 487 (P296=1)

423

324 to 513 (P296=2)

446

356 to 564 (P296=3)

490

388 to 616 (P296=4)

535

425 to 674 (P296=5)

588

466 to 737 (P296=6)

644

486 to 770 (P296=7)

672

559 to 885 (P296=8)

773

178 to 282 (P296=0)

267

V

203

307 to 487 (P296=1)

461

324 to 513 (P296=2)

486

356 to 564 (P296=3)

534

388 to 616 (P296=4)

583

425 to 674 (P296=5)

638

466 to 737 (P296=6)

699

486 to 770 (P296=7)

729

559 to 885 (P296=8)

838
204

1=Flying Start
2=Flying Start/Ride-Through
3=Ride-Through
P321 (6)

P322 (6)

P323 (6)

Ud Line Loss Level

Ud Ride-Through

Ud Line Recover Level

P325

Ride-Through Proportional Gain

0.0 to 63.9

22.8

-

P326

Ride-Through Integral Gain

0.000 to 9.999

0.128

-

204

P331

Voltage Ramp

0.2 to 60.0

2.0

s

205

P332

Dead Time

0.1 to 10.0

1.0

s

205

28

CFW-09 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameters

Function

Factory
Setting

Adjustable Range

Unit

User's
Setting

Page

PARAMETERS FOR CRANE APPLICATIONS AND FOR MASTER/SLAVE FUNCTION - P351 to P368
Logic for the Mechanical Braking Operation
P351 (1)

Delay for E33

0.0 to 99.9

99.9

s

207

P352 (1)

Delay for E34

0 to 999

999

s

207

P353 (1)

Delay for N P288 (N>Nx)

24

RL1 C

Relay Output - No Fault

25

RL2 C

Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N>Nx)

26

RL2 NC

27

RL3 NO

Relay Output - Speed Reference >

28

RL3 C

P288 (N*>Nx)

Relay Output - No Fault

Contact capacity:
1A
240Vac

Note: NC = normally closed contact, NO = normally open contact, C = common
Figure 3.12 a) - XC1/XC1A Control Terminals Description (CC9 board) Active High Digital Inputs

60

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

The following diagram shows the control wiring with the digital inputs as active
low (without a jumper between XC1:8 and XC1:10).
Terminal XC1

CW
≥5k Ω

CCW

rpm

A

Factory Default Function

Specifications

1

DI1

Start / Stop

6 Isolated Digital Inputs

2

DI2

FWD / REV Section (Remote Mode)

Minimum High Level: 18Vdc

3

DI3

No function

Maximum Low Level: 3Vdc

4

DI4

No function

Maximum Voltage: 30Vdc

5

DI5

JOG (Remote Mode)

Input Current:

6

DI6

Ramp 2 Selection

11 mA @ 24Vdc

7

COM

Digital Inputs Common

8

COM

Digital Inputs Common

9

24Vdc

Digital inputs 24Vdc source

Isolated 24Vdc ± 8 %,Capac: 90mA

10

DGND*

0V Reference of the 24Vdc Source

Grounded by a 249 Ω resistor

11

+ REF

Positive Reference for Potentiometer

+ 5.4Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2mA

12

AI1+

Analog Input 1:

13

AI1-

Speed Reference (Remote Mode)

14

- REF

Negative Reference for Potentiometer

-4.7Vdc ± 5 %, Capacity: 2mA

15

AI2+

Analog Input 2:
No Function

Valid for AI1 and AI2

16

AI2-

17

AO1

18

Valid for AI1 and AI2
differential, resolution: (0 to 10)Vdc or
(0 to 20)mA / (4 to 20)mA

Impedance: 400 k Ω [(0 to 10)Vdc]
500 Ω [(0 to 20)mA / (4 to 20)mA]

Analog Output 1: Speed

(0 a 10)Vdc, RL ≥ 10 k Ω (Max load.)
resolution: 11 bits

DGND

0V Reference for Analog Outputs

Grounded by a 5.1 Ω resistor

19

AO2

Analog Output: Motor Current

(0 to 10)Vdc, RL ≥ 10 kΩ (Max. Load)
Resolution: 11 bits

20

DGND

0V Reference for Analog Outputs
Factory Default Function

Terminal XC1A
21

RL1 NC

22

RL1 NO

23

RL2 NO

Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N>Nx)

24

RL1 C

Relay Output - No Fault

25

RL2 C

26

RL2 NC

27

RL3 NO

Relay Output - Speed Reference > P288

28

RL3 C

(N*>Nx)

Grounded by a 5.1 Ω resistor
Specification

Relay Output - No Fault

Relay Output - Speed > P288 (N>Nx)

Contact capacity:
1A
240Vac

Note: NC = normally closed contact, NO = normally open contact, C = common
Figure 3.12 b) - XC1/XC1A Control Terminals Description (CC9 board) Active Low Digital Inputs

NOTE!
For using the digital inputs as active low it is necessary to remove the jumper
between XC1:8 and XC1:10 and place it between XC1:7 and XC1:9.

61

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

* Can be used for grounding
of the signal
and control cable shields

CC9 Board

Figure 3.13 - Dip switch position for
(0 to 10)V or (0 to 20)mA/(4 to 20)mA selection

As a default the analogue inputs are selected as (0 to 10)V. This can be
changed using the dip switch S1 on the control board.
Analog
Input

Factory Default
Function

Dip
Switch

AI1

Speed Reference

S1.2

OFF (0 to 10)V (Factory Default)
ON (4 to 20)mA / (0 to 20)mA

AI2

No Function

S1.1

OFF (0 to 10)V (Factory Default)
ON (4 to 20)mA / (0 to 20)mA

Selection

Table 3.7 - Dip switch configuration

Related Parameters: P221, P222, P234 to P240.
During the signal and control wire installation you must follow these
guidelines:
1) Cable Cross Section: 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) to 1.5 mm² (14 AWG );
2) Max. Torque: 0.50 N.m (4.50 lbf.in);
3) XC1 wiring must be connected with shielded cables and installed
separately from other wiring (power, control at 110V/220Vac, etc.),
according to Table 3.8.

Inverter Model

Wiring
Length

Output current

Min. Separation
Distance

≤ 100m (330ft)

≥ 10cm (4in)

≤ 24A

> 100m (330ft)

≥ 25cm (10in)

Output current

≤ 30m (100ft)

≥ 10cm (4in)

≥ 28A

> 30m (100ft)

≥ 25cm (10in)

Table 3.8 – Wiring separation distances

If the crossing of these cables is unavoidable, install them perpendicular,
maintaining a minimum separation distance of 5 cm (2 in) at the crossing
point.

62

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Connect the shield as shown below:
Insulate with Tape
Inverter
Side

Do Not Ground
Connect to Ground:
Screw located on the CC9 Board and on support plate of the CC9 Board

Figure 3.14 – Shield Connection

4) For wiring distances longer than 50m (150ft), it is necessary to use galvanic
isolators for the XC1:11 to 20 analog signals.
5) Relays, contactors, solenoids or electromagnetic braking coils installed
near inverters can generate interference in the control circuit. In order to
eliminate this interference, connect RC suppressors in parallel with the
coils of AC relays. Connect a free - wheeling diode in case of DC relays/
coils.
6) When an external keypad (HMI) is used (Refer to Chapter 8), separate the
cable that connects the keypad to the inverter from other cables, maintaining
a minimum distance of 10cm (4in) between them.

3.2.7 Typical Terminal
Connections

Connection 1 – Keypad Start/Stop (Local Mode)
With the factory default setting, you can operate the inverter in the local
mode. This operation mode is recommended for users who are operating the
inverter for the first time; without additional control connections. For start-up
according to this operation mode, follow Chapter 5.

Connection 2 - 2-Wire Control Start/Stop (Remote Mode)
Valid for factory default setting and inverter operating in remote mode. For
the factory default programming, the selection of the operation mode (Local/
Remote) is made via the key
(default is Local). Pass default of the key
to remote P220=3.

63

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Start/Stop

Connector XC1
1
DI1
2
DI2
3
DI3
4
DI4
5
DI5
6
DI6
7
COM
8
COM
9
24Vdc
10 DGND*
11
+ REF
12
AI1 +
13
AI1 14
- REF

FWD/REV
JOG

CW
≥5 k Ω
CCW

Figure 3.15 - XC1 (CC9) Wiring for Connection 2

Connection 3 - 3-Wire Control Start/Stop
Selection of function Start/Stop with 3 wire control.
Parameters to be programmed:
Set DI3 to START
P265=14
Set DI4 to STOP
P266=14
Program P224=1 (DIx) if you want the 3 wire control in local mode.
Program P227=1 (DIx) if you want the 3 wire control in remote mode.
To program the rotation selection via DI2
Set P223=4 if in Local Mode or
Set P226=4 if in Remote Mode.
S1 and S2 are momentary push buttons, NO contact for Start and NC contact
for Stop.
The speed reference can be via Analog Input AI (as in Connection 2), via keypad
(HMI) (as in Connection 1), or via any other source. The function Start/Stop is
described in Section 6 in this manual.
Connector XC1
1

DI1

FWD/REV

2

DI2

Start

3

DI3

Stop

4

DI4

5

DI5

6

DI6

7

COM

8

COM

9

24Vdc

10

DGND*

Figure 3.16 -XC1 (CC9) Wiring for Connection 3

64

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Connection 4 - FWD Run / REV Run
Selection function FWD/REV.
Parameters to be programmed:
Set DI3 to FORWARD Run
P265=8
Set DI4 to REVERSE Run
P266=8
When the FWD Run / REV Run Function is programmed, the function is
always active, in both local and remote operation modes.
At the same time, the keys
and
remain inactive (even when P224=0
or P227=0)
The direction of rotation is defined automatically by the FWD Run / REV Run
commands.
Clockwise rotation for Forward and Counter Clockwise rotation for Reverse.
The speed reference can be from any source (as in Connection 3).

Connector XC1
FWD Run S1

REV Run S2

1

DI1

2

DI2

3

DI3

4

DI4

5

DI5

6

DI6

7

COM

8

COM

9

24Vdc

10

DGND*

Figure 3.17 - XC1 (CC9) Wiring for Connection 4

65

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.3

European EMC Directive Requirements for
Conforming Installations

The CFW-09 inverter series was designed taking in consideration safety and
EMC aspects. The CFW-09 units do not have an intrinsic function until
connected with other components (e.g. a motor). Therefore, the basic product
is not CE marked for compliance with the EMC Directive. The end user takes
personal responsibility for the EMC compliance of the whole installation.
However, when installed according to the recommendations described in the
product manual and including the recommended filters/EMC measures the
CFW-09 fulfill all requirements of the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) as defined
by the Product Standard EN61800-3 “Adjustable speed electrical power drives
systems”, specific for variable speed drives systems.
Compliance of the whole series of the CFW-09 is based on testing some
representative models. A Technical Construction File was checked and
approved by a Competent Body.
The CFW-09 inverter series are intended for professional applications only.
Therefore, the harmonic current emissions defined by the standards EN 610003-2 and EN 61000-3-2/A 14 do not apply.

NOTE!
The 500-600V models are intended to be connected to an industrial low
voltage power supply network, or public network which does not supply
buildings used for domestic purpose - second environment according to
the EN61800-3 standard.
The filters specified in itens 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 do not apply to the 500-600V
models.

3.3.1 Installation

For installing the frequency inverters in accordance to the Product Standard
EN61800-3 the following items are required:
1. Output cables (motor wiring) must be flexible armored or to be installed
inside a metallic conduit or in a tray with equivalent attenuation.
2. The control (inputs and outputs) and signal wiring must be shielded or
installed inside a metallic conduit or a tray with equivalent attenuation.
3. It is essential to follow the grounding recommendations presented in this
manual.
4. For first environment (low-voltage public network): install an RFI filter
(radio-frequency interference filter) at inverter input.
5. For second environment (industrial areas) and unrestricted
distribution (EN61800-3): install an RFI filter at inverter input.

NOTE!
The use of a filter requires:
The cable’s shielding must be solidly connected to the common backplane,
using brackets.
The inverter and the filter must be mounted in close proximity, electrically
connected, to one another, on the same metallic backplane. The wiring
between them should be kept as short as possible.
Two filters are suggested: Epcos and Schaffner, detailed on the following items
3.3.2 and 3.3.3. Figures 3.18 and 3.19 present a connection diagram for EMC
filters, Epcos and Schaffner respectively.

66

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Description of conducted emission classes according to the standard
EN61800-3:
Class B: first environment, unrestricted distribution
Class A1: first environment, restricted distribution
Class A2: second environment, unrestricted distribution

ATTENTION!
For installation with inverters that complies class A1 (first environment
restricted distribution), note that this is a product of the restricted sales
distribution class according to IEC/EN61800-3 (1996) + A11 (2000). In a
domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequated measures.

ATTENTION!
For installation with inverters that complies class A2 (second environment
unrestricted distribution), note that this product is not intended to be used
on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio
frequency interference is expected if used on such a network.
The following tables 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 show the Epcos filters for CFW09
frequency inverters with 380-480V, 500-600V and 660-690V power supply
respectively, the maximum motor cable length for conduted emission classes A1, A2 and B (according to EN61800-3) and the electromagnetic
radiation disturbance level.

3.3.2 Epcos filters

Controling and Signal Wiring

Filter

Q1

Transforme

XC1 1 to 28

F1
L1 L1

XR

L2 L2

S

U

F2
V

Motor

CFW - 09
F3
L3 L3
E

E

PE

Ground Rod/Grid or
Building Steel
Structure

T
PE

W
PE

Panel or Metallic Enclosure
Protective Grounding - PE

Figure 3.18 – Epcos EMC filters connection in CFW09 frequency inverters

67

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

380-480V power supply:
Inverter
Model

Load Type

3,6A (2)

CT/VT

4A (2)

CT/VT

5,5A (2)

CT/VT

9A (2)

CT/VT

13A

CT/VT

16A

CT/VT

24A

CT/VT

Epcos Input Filter

Maximum motor cable length
according to conducted emission
class (EN61800-3)
Class A2 Class A1 Class B

Inside metallic
panel

B84143A8R105
100m

50m

20m

N/A

100m

35m

B84143A16R105

B84143A25R105

NO

B84143A36R105
CT

30A

First environment, restricted
distribution

85m

VT
38A (3)

CT

B84143A50R105

45A

CT

First environment, restricted
distribution

50m

VT
(3)

100m
B84143A66R105

First environment, restricted
distribution

VT
CT

60A

VT

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

B84143A90R105

CT

70A

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

VT
CT

86A

B84143A120R105
100m

First environment, restricted
distribution

25m

VT
CT

105A

B84143G150R110

VT
142A

(3)

VT
CT/VT

211A

CT/VT

240A

N/A

First environment, restricted
distribution
B84143G220R110
YES
N/A

100m

100m

25m

CT/VT
B84143B320S20
(3)

CT/VT

361A (3)

CT/VT

450A

CT/VT

312A

First environment, restricted
distribution

CT

180A

B84143B400S20

B84143B600S20
515A

CT/VT

600A

CT/VT

Electromagnetic radiation
disturbance level (Product
Standard EN61800-3
(1996)+A11 (2000))
First environment, restricted
distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

B84143B1000S20 (1)

First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Notes:
(1) The RFI filter suggested above for model 600A/380-480V onsiders a power supply with 2% voltage drop. For a power supply with 4%
voltage drop it’s possible to use B84143B600S20 RFI filter. In this case, consider the same motor cable lengths and radiated emission data
as shown in table above.
(2) Minimum output frequency = 2,9Hz.
(3) Minimum output frequency = 2,4Hz.
Table 3.9 - Epcos filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 380-480V power supply

68

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

500-600V power supply:
Load
Type

Inverter Model

Epcos Input Filter

Maximum motor cable length
according to conducted
emission class (EN61800-3)
Class
Class
Class
A2
A1
B

Inside metallic
panel

Electromagnetic radiation
disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)+A11
(2000))
First environment,
restricted distribution

CT

107A/500-690V

VT

B84143B150S21

First environment,
restricted distribution

CT

147A/500-690V

VT
211A/500-690V

CT/VT

B84143B250S21

First environment,
restricted distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

CT

247A/500-690V

VT
CT

315A/500-690V

B84143B400S125

100m

25m

N/A

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

YES

VT

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

CT

343A/500-690V

VT
CT

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

418A/500-690V
VT
B84143B600S125
CT

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

472A/500-690V
VT

N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Note: Minimum output frequency = 2.4Hz.
Table 3.10 - Epcos filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 500-600V power supply

660-690V power supply:

Inverter Model

Load
Type

100A/660-690V and
107A/500-690V

CT

127A/660-690V and
147A/500-690V

CT

179A/660-690V and
211A/500-690V

VT

Inside metallic
panel

Electromagnetic
radiation disturbance
level (Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)+A11
(2000))
First environment,
restricted distribution

B84143B150S21

First environment,
restricted distribution

VT
CT/VT

225A/660-690V and
247A/500-690V

CT

259A/660-690V and
315A/500-690V

CT

305A/660-690V and
343A/500-690V

CT

340A/660-690V and
418A/500-690V

CT

428A/660-690V and
472A/500-690V

Epcos Input Filter

Maximum motor cable
length according to
conducted emission class
(EN61800-3)
Class
Class
Class
A2
A1
B

B84143B180S21

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

VT
VT

First environment,
restricted distribution

100m
B84143B400S125

N/A

YES
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

VT

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

VT
CT/VT

25m

B84143B600S125

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution

N/A = Not Applicable – The inverters were not tested with these limits.
Note: Minimum output frequency = 2.4Hz.
Table 3.11 - Epcos filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 660-690V power supply

69

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

The following tables 3.12 and 3.13 show the Schaffner filters list for CFW09
inverter series with 380-480V and 220-230V power supply, respectively.

3.3.3 Schaffner filters

Controling and Signal Wiring

Q1

Filter
Output

Filter Input

Input CM Choke

Filter

Output CM
Choke
XC1 1 to 28

Transformer
F1
L1 L1

XR

L2 L2

S

U

F2

Motor

V
CFW - 09

F3
L3 L3
E

PE

Ground Rod/Grid or
Building Steel
Structure

PE

W

T

E

PE

Panel or Metallic Enclosure
Protective Grounding - PE

Figure 3.19 - Schaffner EMC filters connection in CFW09 frequency inverters

380-480V power supply:

Model

Optional Device

Input
filter

Input
Choke

Output
CM
Choke

Inside
Metallic
Panel

CM

3,6 A

RS-232

FN-3258-7-45

No

No

No

4 A, 5 A

EBA RS-485
Serial Interface
EBA RS-485
Serial Interface
No

FN-3258-7-45

No

No

No

FN-3258-16-45

No

No

No

FN-3258-16-45

No

No

No

No

FN-3258-30-47

No

No

No

EBB
RS-485 Serial
Interface

FN-3258-55-52

No

Yes

No

FN-3258-55-52

Schaffner 203 (1151042) 2 turns (filter input
side)
No

No

No

No

FN-3258-100-35

2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output
sides)

No

No

9A
13 A
16 A
24 A
30 A

30 A
38 A
45 A

Electromagnetic radiation
disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)
+ A11 (2000) *1
First environment, restricted
distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

Table 3.12 - Schaffner filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 380-480 V power supply.

70

Conducted
Emission
Class
B
B
B
B
B
A1

A1
A1

*2

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

380-480V power supply:
Model

Optional Device

Input
filter

Input

Electromagnetic radiation
disturbance level
(Product Standard
EN61800-3 (1996)
+ A11 (2000) *1

Conducted

Output
CM
Choke

Inside
Metallic
Panel

2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/ output
sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output
sides)
Schaffner 203 (1151042) 2 turns in the
control
cable
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output
sides)
No

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

Yes

A1

2X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)
2X
Schaffner
167
(1151-043)
(UVW)

Yes

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

Yes

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)

Yes

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

Yes

First environment, restricted
distribution

CM
Choke

45 A

EBA
RS-485
Serial Interface

FN-3258-100-35

45 A

EBB
RS-485
Serial Interface

FN-3258-100-35

45 A

Profibus-DP
12 MBaud

FN-3258-100-35

60 A
70 A
86 A
105 A

No

FN-3258-100-35

No

FN-3359-150-28

2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Output filter side

142 A

No

FN-3359-250-28

2 X Schaffner 167
(1151-043)
output filter side

No

FN-3359-250-28

Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
output filter side

No

FN-3359-400-99

Emission
Class

*2

A1

180 A

211 A
240 A
312 A
361 A
450 A

515A
600 A

No

No

FN-3359-600-99

FN-3359-1000-99

Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side

Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side
Schaffner 159
(1151-044)
Output filter side

Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)
Schaffner
159
(1151-044)
(UVW)

Yes

A1

First environment, restricted
distribution
A1

Yes

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

Table 3.12 (cont.) - Schaffner filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 380-480 V power supply.

71

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION
220V-230V power supply:
Optional
Device

Input
filter

6A
1 phase

No

FS6007-16-06

7A
1 phase
10 A
1 phase
10 A
1 phase

No

FS6007-25-08

Model

No

EBA
RS-485
Serial Interface
10 A
EBB
1 phase
RS-485
Serial
Interface
6A
No

Electromagnetic radiation
Common
disturbance level
Inside
Common mode Ferrite
mode Ferrite Metallic (Product Standard EN61800(Input)
Panel
3 (1996)
(Output)
+ A11 (2000)) *1
No
Schaffner
First environment, restricted
No
203
distribution
(1151-042)
2 turns
No
No
First environment, restricted
No
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

Conducted
Emission
Class *2
B

B

FS6007-36-08

No

No

No

FS6007-36-08

No

No

No

FS6007-36-08

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

B

FN-3258-7-45

2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) (filter input/output
sides (2 turns))
No

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

B

First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

B

B
B

7A
10 A
13 A
16 A
24 A
28 A

No

FN-3258-16-45

No

No

No

No

FN-3258-30-47

No

No

No

No

FN-3258-55-52

No

No

Yes

45 A

No

FN-3258-100-35

No

No

45 A

EBA
RS-485
Serial Interface
EBB
RS-485
Serial Interface

FN-3258-100-35

2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output sides)
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) - (filter
input/output sides)
Schaffner 203 (1151042)choke2 turns in the control
cable
2 x Schaffner 203
(1151-042) (filter input/output
sides)
No

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

No

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

No

Yes

A1

2X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)
2X
Schaffner
203
(1151-042)
(UVW)

Yes

Second environment,
unrestricted distribution
First environment, restricted
distribution

First environment, restricted
distribution

A1

45 A

FN-3258-100-35

FN-3258-100-35

45 A
Profibus-DP
12 MBaud
54 A
70 A
86 A

No

FN-3258-100-35

No

FN-3258-130-35

2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Filter output side

105 A

No

FN-3359-150-28

2 X Schaffner 203
(1151-042)
Filter output side

Yes

Table 3.13 - Schaffner filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 220-230V power supply.

72

B

A1
A1

A1

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Model

Optional
Device

Input
filter

130 A

No

FN-3359-250-28

Electromagnetic radiation
Common
disturbance level
Inside
Common mode Ferrite
mode Ferrite Metallic (Product Standard EN61800(Input)
Panel
3 (1996)
(Output)
+ A11 (2000)) *1
2 X Schaffner 167
2X
Yes
First environment, restricted
(1151-043)
Schaffner
distribution
Filter output side
167
(1151-043)
(UVW)

Conducted
Emission
Class *2
A1

Notes:
*1 - First environment/restricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11):
30 to 230MHz: 30dB (uV/m) in 30m
230 to 1000MHz: 37dB (uV/m) in 30m
Second environment/unrestricted distribution (Basic Standard CISPR 11: Group 2, class A):
30 to 230MHz: 40dB (uV/m) in 30m
230 to 1000MHz: 50dB (uV/m) in 30m
*2 - Motor shielded cable length: 20m.
Table 3.13 (cont.) - Schaffner filters list for CFW09 inverter series with 220-230V power supply.

3.3.4 EMC filter characteristics

WEG
P/N

Filter

0208.2126
0208.2127
0208.2128
0208.2129
0208.2130
0208.2131
0208.2132
0208.2133
0208.2134
0208.2135
0208.2136
0208.2137
0208.2138
0208.2139
0208.2140
0208.2141
0208.2142
0208.2143
0208.2144
0208.2072
0208.2073
0208.2074
0208.2075
0208.2076
0208.2077
0208.2078
0208.2079
0208.2080
0208.2081
0208.2082
0208.2083
0208.2084
0208.2085
0208.2086
0208.2087
0208.2088
Note: (*) According

The following table 3.14 shows the main technical characteristics of Epcos
and Shaffner filters used in CFW09 inverter series. Figure 3.20 presents
drawings of these filters.
Manufacturer

Nominal
current [A]

Power
losses [W]

B84143A8R105
8
6
B84143A16R105
16
9
B84143A25R105
25
12
B84143A36R105
36
18
B84143A50R105
50
15
B84143A66R105
66
20
B84143A90R105
90
27
B84143A120R105
120
39
B84143G150R110
150
48
Epcos
B84143G220R110
220
60
320 (*)
B84143B320S20
21
B84143B400S20
400
33
B84143B600S20
600
57
B84143B1000S20
1000
99
B84143B150S21
150
12
B84143B180S21
180
14
B84143B250S21
250
14
B84143B400S125
400
33
B84143B600S125
600
57
FS6007-16-06
16
4
FS6007-25-08
25
4
FS6007-36-08
36
5
FN3258-7-45
7
3.8
FN3258-16-45
16
6
FN3258-30-47
30
12
FN3258-55-52
55
26
FN3258-100-35
100
35
Schaffner
FN3258-130-35
130
43
FN3359-150-28
150
28
FN3359-250-28
250
57
FN3359-400-99
400
50
FN3359-600-99
600
65
FN3359-1000-99
1000
91
1151-042
1151-043
1151-044
to the manufacturer, this filter can be used up to 331A.

Weight
[kg]
0.58
0.90
1.10
1.75
1.75
2.7
4.2
4.9
8.0
11.5
21
21
22
28
13
13
15
21
22
0.9
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.8
1.2
1.8
4.3
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
11
18
-

Drawing
(figure
3.20)
a
b
c

Connector
type

d
e
f
g
h
i

-

j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r

s

/05
/08
/08
/45
/45
/47
/52
/35
/35
/28
/28

t
Bus /99

-

-

Table 3.14 – Technical specifications of EMC filters for the CFW09 inverter series.

73

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

a) EPCOS B84143A8R105 Filter

8

133.7

1.5

50

6.3

PE M4 x 11

L1
L2
L3

38

51.4

4.5

Terminals 4 mm²

Marking
LINE

LOAD

L1'
L2'
L3'

155
165

b) EPCOS B84143A16R105 Filter

9

199.5

1.5

60

70

PE M5 x 15

38

46.4

4.5

Terminals 4 mm²

L1
L2
L3

Marking
LINE

LOAD

L1'
L2'
L3'

221
231

Figure 3.20 a) b) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

74

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

c) EPCOS B84143A25R105 Filter
199.5

9

1.5

60

83

PE M5 x 15

38

46.4

4.5

PE M6 x 14

L1
L2
L3

Marking
LOAD

LINE

L1'
L2'
L3'

221
231

d) EPCOS B84143A36R105 and B84143A50R105 Filter

8

200

1.5

70

90

PE M6 x 14

35

58

4.5

Terminals 10 mm²

L1
L2
L3

Marking
LOAD

LINE

L1'
L2'
L3'

255
265

Figure 3.20 c) d) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

75

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

e) EPCOS B84143A66R105 Filter
200

8

1.5

120

141.5

PE M6 x 14

35

58

4.5

Terminals 16 mm²

L1
L2
L3

Marking
LOAD

LINE

L1'
L2'
L3'

255
265

f) EPCOS B84143A90R105 Filter
240

80

25

1.5

63

PE M10 x 34

100

135

13

4.6

290

L1
L2
L3

Marking
LINE

LOAD

L1'
L2'
L3'

60

6.5

Terminals 35 mm²

255

Figure 3.20 e) f) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

76

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

g) EPCOS B84143A120R105 Filter

240

90

25

1.5

PE M10 x 34

63

100

150

13

290

46

6.5

Terminals 35mm²

Marking
LOAD

LINE

L1'
L2'
L3'

65

L1
L2
L3

255

h) EPCOS B84143G150R110 Filter
350

90

500±10

Terminal
blocks
50mm2

Litz wire

200

L3'
L2'

0.5

78

40

100

L1'
PE

PE M10 x 35

Wire end ferrule
Litz wire markings

Marking
LINE LOAD

86

L1
L2
L3

65±0.3

6.5

380
365±0.5

Figure 3.20 g) h) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

77

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

i) EPCOS B84143G220R110 Filter

Litz wire

Terminal blocks 95mm2
400

110

Wire end ferrule

500±10

220

L3'
L2'

30

0.5

79

110

L1'
PE

PE M10 x 35

Litz wire markings

430

L1
L2
L3

85±0,3

Marking
LINE LOAD

106

6.5

415±0.5

j) EPCOS B84143B320S20 and B84143B400S20 Filters
300
60

91
60

240±1

36

42±2

42±2
360±2

16

85±0.5
116

15

25

15

2

∅12

∅11

PE M10 x 30

Figure 3.20 i) j) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

78

210

30

120

LOAD

L3

LINE

260

235±1

L2

L2

Marking

180±0.5

L1

L1

220

4 x M6 mm deep

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

k) EPCOS B84143B600S20 Filter
350
60

91
60

290±1

36

210

30

180±0.5

120

LOAD
L3

L3

LINE

260

L2

L2

5

Marking

235±1

L1

L1

4 x M6 / mm deep

2

∅12
42±3

42±3
410±2.5

85±0.5

16

116

15

30

15

∅11

PE M10 x 30

l) EPCOS B84143B1000S20 Filter
350
65

141
65

290±1

61

250

40

160

L3

∅12
52±3
420±2.5

2.5
52±3

16

135±0.8
166

20

40

20

220±0.8

LOAD

L3

LINE

275±1
300

L2

Marking

L2

8

L1

L1

4 x M6 / 6 mm deep

∅14

PE M12 x 30

Figure 3.20 k) l) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

79

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

m) EPCOS B84143B150S21 and B84143B180S21 Filters

91

260
32±1

32±1

150

36

LINE

LOAD

6.6
97.2

115±0.2

140

120

30

80

170

L3

L3

155±2

L1
L2

Marking

L2

3

L1

2 x M5 / mm deep

2
81

97.5

141
10

10

20

310±2

∅9
PE M10 x 30

n) Filtro EPCOS B84143B250S21

91

300
60

60

240±0.6

36

L3

LINE

116

42±1
15

25

360±2

∅11

PE M10 x 30

Figure 3.20 m) n) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

80

140

110

30

2

∅12
42±1
15

80

190

165

L1

LOAD

L3

L2

Marking

L2

5

L1

2 x M6 / 6 mm deep

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

o) EPCOS B84143B400S125 Filter
240

L3'

L2'

L1'

270±3
L3

L2

25

L1

15

40±3

∅9

330±2

210±0.5

40±3

15

∅11

220±1

78.2

116

2

5

100
200

Figure 3.20 o) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

81

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

p) EPCOS B84143B600S125 Filter
265

L3'

L2'

39±3

L3

L2

L1

15

∅12

30

140

90

3

8

120
215

Figure 3.20 p) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

82

310±3

370±2

250±0.5

39±3

L1'

15

∅11

240±1

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

q) Schaffner FS6007-16-06 Filter
119 (4.68)
109 (4.29)

85.5 (3.36)
84.5 (3.33)
66 (2.6)

98 (3.88)

6.3x0.8

3.7

4.4

(0.147)

51
(2.0)

40
(1.57)

SCHAFFNER

30

1.2
(0.047) 15.6

(0.173)

(0.614)

12.3

E

10.8

P/N

57.6
(2.267)

Type /05
Fast-on terminal 6.3 x 0.8mm

r) Schaffner FS6007-25-08 and FS6007-36-08 Filter
119 (4.68)
113 (4.25)

57.6 (2.267)

98.5 (3.88)

51
(2.0)

4.4
(0.173)

P/N

40
(1.57)

SCHAFFNER

3.7
(0.145)

84.5 (3.33)
66 (2.6)

85.5 (3.36)

M4

1.2
(0.047) 15.6
(0.614)

16.2

E

Bolt type 08=M4

Figure 3.20 q) r) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm (in)]

83

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

s) Schaffner FN3258-7-45, FN3258-16-45, FN3258-30-47, FN3258-55-52, FN3258-100-35 and FN3258-130-35 filters

Rated Current

Type/35 - Terminal block for flexible and
rigid cable of 50mm2 or AWG 1/0.
Max.Torque : 8Nm

Connector

MECHANICAL DATA SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW

Type/45 - Terminal block for 6mm2 solid
cable, 4mm2 flexible cable AWG 12.

Type/47 - Terminal block for 16mm2
solid wires,10mm2 flexible wires
AWG 8.

Top

Type/52 - Dimesions in mm (inch)
Terminal block for 25mm2 solid
wires,16mm2 flexible wires AWG 6.

Figure 3.20 s) - EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm (in)]

84

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

t) Schaffner FN3359-150-28, FN3359-250-28, FN3359-400-99, FN3359-600-99 and FN3359-1000-99 filters
Types 400A to 1000A

Types 150A to 250A

Top

Top

Type/28
M10 bolt
RATED CURRENT

Bus bar connection(Type/99)
Series FN 2259

Connector

These filters are supplied with M12
bolts for the grounding connection.

Figure 3.20 t) – EMC filters for CFW-09 inverter series [dimensions in mm]

85

CHAPTER

4

KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION
This Chapter describes the CFW-09 operation via the standard Keypad
or Human-Machine Interface (HMI), providing the following information:
General Keypad Description;
Use of the Keypad;
Parameter Programming;
Description of the Status Indicators.

4.1 DESCRIPTION
OF THE KEYPAD

The standard CFW-09 Keypad has two readout displays: a LED readout
with a 4 digit, seven-segment display and a LCD display with two lines of
16 alphanumeric characters. There are also 4 indicator LED’s and 8 keys.
Figure 4.1 shows the front view of the Keypad and indicates the position
of the readouts, keys and status LED’s.
Functions of the LED Display:
The LED Display shows the fault codes, drive status, the parameter number
and its value. For units of current, voltage or frequency, the LED display
shows the unit in the right side digit (L.S.D.) as shown here.
· A
current (A)
. U voltage (volts)
· H frequency (Hertz)
· Blank
speed and other parameters

NOTE!
When the indication is higher than 9999 (for instance in rpm) the number
corresponding to the ten of thousand will not be displayed (ex.: 12345
rpm will be read as 2345 rpm). The correct indication will be displayed
only on the LCD display.

LED's Display

LCD-Display

Green LED "Local"

Green LED "Forward"

Red LED "Remote"

Red LED "Reverse"

Figure 4.1 - CFW-09 Standard Keypad

Functions of the LCD Display:
The LCD Display shows the parameter number and its value
simultaneously,
without requiring the toggling of the
key.It also provides a brief
description of each parameter function, fault code and inverter status.

87

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

LOCAL and REMOTE LED’s:
Inverter in Local Mode:
Green LED ON and Red LED OFF.
Inverter in Remote Mode:
Green LED OFF and Red LED ON.
Direction of Rotation (FWD/REV) LED’s:
Refer to Figure 4.2 below.
Speed
Forward

Forward

Reverse

FWD / REV Command (Key or DI2)

ON

FLASHING

OFF

Figure 4.2 - Direction of Rotation (FWD / REV) LED’s

Basic Functions of the Keys:
The functions described below are valid for factory default programming and
Local Mode operation. The actual function of the keys may vary if parameters
P220 through P228 are re-programmed.
Starts the inverter via the acceleration ramp. After starting, the display
sequences through these units at each touch of the Start key in the order
shown here (see item 4.2.2 a):
rpm

Volts

Status

Torque

%

Hz

A

Stops (disables) the inverter via the deceleration ramp. Also resets the inverter after a fault has occurred.
Toggles the LED display between the parameter number and its value (Number/
Value).
Increases the speed, the parameter number or the parameter value.
Decreases the speed, the parameter number or the parameter value.
Reverses the direction of motor rotation between Forward/Reverse.
Toggles between the LOCAL and REMOTE modes of operation.
Performs the JOG function when pressed.
Any DIx programmed for General Enable must be closed (and the CFW-09
must be stopped) to enable JOG function.
88

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

4.2 USE OF THE KEYPAD
(HMI)

The keypad is used for programming and operating the CFW-09 allowing the
following functions:
Indication of the inverter status and operation variables;
Fault Indication and Diagnostics;
Viewing and programming parameters;
Operation.

4.2.1 Keypad Operation

All functions relating to the CFW-09 operation (Start, Stop, Motor Direction of
Rotation, JOG, Increment/Decrement of the Speed Reference and Selection of
Local Mode/Remote Mode) can be performed through the Keypad. This is valid
with the factory default programming of the inverter. All keypad keys are enabled
when the Local Mode has been selected. These same functions can be
performed in Remote Mode by means of digital and analog inputs.
Flexibility is provided through the ability to program the parameters that define
the input and output functions.
Keypad keys operation description:
Both
and
keys are enabled when P224 = 0 (I, O Key) for Local Mode
and/or P227 = 0 (I,O Key) for Remote Mode.
Starts the inverter via the Acceleration Ramp.
Stops the inverter via Deceleration Ramp.

NOTE!
It resets the inverter after a Fault Trip (always active).
When the Jog key is pressed, it accelerates the motor according to the
Acceleration Ramp up to the JOG speed programmed in P122 (default is 150
rpm). When released, the motor decelerates according to the Deceleration
Ramp and stops.
Enabled when P225 = 1 (Keypad) for Local Mode and/or P228 = 1 (Keypad) for
Remote Mode.
If a Digital Input is set to General Enable (P263 to P270 = 2) it has to be closed
to allow the JOG function.
Selects the control input and speed reference source, toggling between LOCAL Mode and REMOTE Mode.
Enabled when P220 = 2 (Keypad LOC) or 3 (Keypad REM).
Reverses the motor direction of rotation.
Enabled when P223 = 2 (Keypad FWD) or 3 (Keypad REV) for Local Mode
and/or P226 = 2 (Keypad FWD) or 3 (Keypad REV) for Remote Mode.
The keys described below are enabled when P221 = 0 (Keypad) for Local
Mode and/or P222 = 0 (Keypad) for Remote Mode. The parameter P121 contains
the speed reference set by the keypad.
When pressed it increases the speed reference.
When pressed it decreases the speed reference.

89

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

NOTE!
Reference Backup
The last frequency Reference set by the keys
and
is stored when the
inverter is stopped or the AC power is removed, provided P120 = 1 (Reference
Backup active is the factory default). To change the frequency reference before
starting the inverter, the value of parameter P121 must be changed.

4.2.2 “Read-Only” Variables
and Status

Parameters P002 to P099 are reserved for the display of “read-only” values. The
factory default display when power is applied to the inverter is P002. Motor speed
in rpm. The user can scroll through the various read-only parameters or use the
factory configured display of the key values. This is done by pressing the start
.
key
a) Some selected “read-only” variables can be viewed following the
procedure below:

Press
Motor Speed
P002=1800r pm

Press

Press
Output Volt age
P007 =4 60V

VFD Status
P0 06=run

Moto r To rque
P009 =73.2%

Press

Press

(Only if P203=1)
Press

Press

Press

Motor Current

Moto r Frequency

P00 3=24 .3A

P005=60 .0Hz

Process Valiable
P040=53.4%

Current = 24.3A
P002=1800r pm

The “read-only” variable to be shown after AC power is applied to the inverter is
defined in Parameter P205:

P205
0

Initial Monitoring Parameter
P005 (Motor Frequency)

1

P003 (Motor Current)

2

P002 (Motor Speed)

3

P007 (Output Voltage)

4

P006 (Inverter Status)

5

P009 (Motor Torque)

6

P070 (motor speed and motor current)

7

P040 (PID process variable)

Table 4.1 - Choosing the initial monitoring parameter

90

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

b) Inverter Status:

Inverter is READY to be started
(No Fault condition)
VFD
ready

VFD Status
P006 =run

Inverter has been started
(Run condition)

Line voltage in too low for inverter operation
(Undervoltage condition)
DC Lin k Under
Vol t age

c) LED display flashing:
The display flashes in the following conditions:
During the DC Injection braking;
Trying to change a parameter value when it is not allowed;
Inverter in a current overload condition (Refer to Chapter 7 - Diagnostics
and Troubleshooting);
Inverter in Fault condition (Refer to Chapter 7 - Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting).

4.2.3 Parameter Viewing and
Programming

All CFW-09 settings are made through the parameters. The parameters are
shown on the display with the letter P followed by a number.
Example (P101):

101 = Parameter Number
De cel. Ti me
P1 0 1=1 0. 0s

Each parameter is associated to a numerical value (parameter content), that
corresponds to an option selected among those options that are available for
this parameters.
The values of the parameters define the inverter programming or the value of
a variable (e.g. current, frequency, voltage). For inverter programming you
should change the parameter content(s).
To allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change
parameter P000 to the password value. The factory default password value is
5. Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them.
For more detail see P000 description in Chapter 6.

91

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Press the

Comments

key
Motor Speed
P002=0 r pm

Use the
reach P100

and

keys to

Select the desired parameter
Accel. Time
P100=5. 0 s

Press the

key
Accel. Time

Numeric value associated to the
parameter (4)

P100=5. 0 s

Use the
and
set the new value

Sets the new desired value.

keys to

(1) (4)

Accel. Time
P100=6. 1s

(1) (2) (3)

Press the

key

Accel. Time
P100=6. 1s

NOTES:
(1) For parameters that can be changed with the motor running, the inverter
will use the new value immediately after it has been set. For the parameters
that can be changed only with motor stopped, the inverter will use this new
set value only after the

key is pressed.

(2) By pressing the
key after the reprogramming, the new programmed
value will be stored automatically and will remain stored until a new value is
programmed.
(3) If the last value programmed in the parameter is not functionally compatible
with other parameter values already programmed, an E24 - Programming Error
- will be displayed.
Example of programming error:
Programming two digital inputs (DIx) with the same function. Refer to Table
4.2 for the list of programming errors that will generate an E24 Programming
Error.
92

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

(4) To allow the reprogramming of any parameter value it is required to change
parameter P000 to the password value. The factory default password value is
5. Otherwise you can only read the parameter values and not reprogram them.
For more detail see P000 description in Chapter 6.

E24 - Incompatibility between parameters
1)

Two or more parameters between P264 or P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 1 (LOC/REM).

2)

Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 6 (Ramp 2).

3)

Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 9 (Speed/Torque).

4)

P265 equal to 8 and P266 different than 8 or vice versa (FWD Run / REV Run).

5)

P221 or P222 equal to 8 (Multispeed) and P266 ≠ 7 and P267 ≠ 7 and P268 ≠ 7.

6)

[P221=7 or P222=7] and [(P265 ≠ 5 and P267 ≠ 5) or (P266 ≠ 5 and P268 ≠ 5)].
(with reference=EP and without DIx=increase EP or without DIx=decrease EP).

7)
8)

P264 and P266 equal to 8 (Reverse Run).
[P221 ≠ 7 and P222 ≠ 7] and [(P265=5 or P267=5 or P266=5 or P268=5)].
(without reference=EP and with DIx=increase EP or with DIx=decrease EP).

9)

P265 or P267 or P269 equal to 14 and P266 and P268 and P270 different than 14 (with DIx=Start and DIx ≠ Stop).

10) P266 or P268 or P270 equal to 14 and P265 and P267 and P269 different than 14 (with DIx ≠ Start and DIx=Stop).
11)

P220 > 1 and P224 = P227 = 1 without any DIx set for Start/Stop or DIx = Fast Stop or General Enable.

12) P220 = 0 and P224 = 1 and without DIx = Start/Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx = General Enable.
13) P220 = 1 and P227 = 1 and without DIx = Start/Stop or Fast Stop and without DIx = General Enable.
14) DIx = START and DIx = STOP, but P224 ≠ 1 and P227 ≠ 1.
15) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 15 (MAN/AUT).
16) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 17 (Disables
Flying-Start).
17) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 18 (DC Voltage Regulator).
18) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 19 (Parameter Setting Disable).
19) Two or more parameters between P265, P266, P267, P268 and P269 equal to 20 (Load user via DIx).
20) P296=8 and P295=4, 6, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, or 49 (P295 incompatible with inverter model – To avoid damages of
the internal inverter components).
21) P296=5, 6, 7 or 8 and P297=3 (P297 incompatible with inverter model).
22) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 21 (Timer RL2).
23) Two or more parameters between P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 and P270 equal to 22 (Timer RL3).
24) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270=21 and P279 ≠ 28.
25) P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270=22 and P280 ≠ 28.
26) P279=28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 ≠ 21.
27) P280=28 and P265 or P266 or P267 or P268 or P269 or P270 ≠ 22.
28) P202 ≤ 2 and P237=1 or P241=1 or P265 to P270=JOG+ or P265 to P270=JOG-.
29) P203=1 and P211=1 and [P224=0 or P227=0]
30) P220=0 and P224=1 and P227=0 or P227=1 and P263=0
31) P220=1 and P224=0 or P224=1 and P227=1 and P263=0
32) P220=2 and P224=0 or P224=1and P227=0 or P227=1 and P263=0

Table 4.2 - Incompatibility between Parameters - E24

93

CHAPTER

5

START-UP
This Chapter provides the following information:
How to check and prepare the inverter before power-up;
How to power-up and check for proper operation;
How to operate the inverter.

5.1 PRE-POWER
CHECKS

The inverter shall be installed according to chapter 3: Installation.

DANGER!
Disconnect the AC input power before making any connections. Even when the
drive project is different from the suggested connections, the following
recommendations are applicable.
1) Check all connections
Check if the power, grounding and control connections are correct and
well tightened.
2) Clean the inside of the inverter
Remove all shipping material from the inside of the inverter or cabinet.
3) Check if the selected inverter AC power is correct (refer to section 3.2.3)
4) Check the motor
Check all motor connections and verify if its voltage, current and frequency
match the inverter specifications.
NOTES!
Operation in VT mode
When the motor data is set properly during the first power-up routine,
the drive automatically sets the additional parameters used for the
correct operation under this control mode.
5) Uncouple the load from the motor
If the motor cannot be uncoupled, make sure that the direction of rotation
(FWD/REV) cannot cause damage to the machine.
6) Close the inverter cover or cabinet doors

5.2 INITIAL
POWER-UP

After the inverter has been checked, AC power can be applied:
1) Check the supply voltage
Measure the line voltage and check if it is within the specified range
(refer to section 9.1).
2) Power-up the AC input
Close the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch.
3) Check if the power-up has been successful
When the inverter is powered up for the first time or when the factory
default parameter values are loaded (P204 = 5), a start-up sub-routine
is run. This sub-routine requests the user to program some basic
parameters to ensure proper operation and motor protection.
A start-up programming example is shown below:
Inverter
Line: CFW-09
Rated Current: 9 A
Rated Voltage: 380V to 480 V
Model: CFW090009T3848ESZ
Cooling: Self-ventilated

94

Motor
WEG IP55
Power: 5 HP
rpm: 1730, 4 POLE
Rated Current: 7.9 A
Rated Voltage: 460 V
Frequency: 60 Hz
Cooling: Self-ventilated

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ORIENTED START-UP
Initial Power-up - Programming via Keypad (HMI) (Based on the example above):
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

After power-up, the display shows
the following message
l ang u age
P20 1 = English

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

DESCRIPTION
Language Selection:
0=Português
1=English
2=Español
3=German

Enter the programming mode
l ang u age
P20 1 = English

User the
and
select the language

keys to
l ang u age
P20 1 = English

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Press the key
next parameter

Exit the programming mode.
l ang u age
P20 1 = English

to go to the
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 440 / 460V

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Selected Language:
1 = English

Inverter Rated Voltage Selection:
0=220V/230V
1=380V
2=400V/415V
3=440V/460V
4=480V
5=500V/525V
6=550/575V
7=600V
8=660V/690V

Enter the programming mode
VFD Rated Volt.
P296 = 440 / 460V

95

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Use the and keys
to
select the inverter power supply voltage.
VFD Rated
P296 = 380V

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Press the
parameter.

Volt.

DESCRIPTION

Selected Inverter Rated Voltage:
1 = 380V

Exit the programming mode.
VFD Rated
P296 = 380V

Volt.

key to go to the next
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 =440V

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Motor Rated Voltage:
0 to 690V

Enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 =440V

Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
380V

Use the and keys
to
set
the correct motor rated voltage value
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 =380V

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
parameter

Exit the programming mode.
Moto r Rated Volt
P400 =380V

Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295(1)

key to go to the next
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 9. 0 A

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode.

96

Enter the programming mode
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 9. 0 A

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Use the
and
keys to set
the correct motor rated current value

DESCRIPTION

Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9A

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the key
parameter

Exit the programming mode.
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9A

to go to the next
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300Hz

Enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

Use the
and
keys to set the
correct motor rated frequency value
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
parameter

Programmed Motor Rated Frequency:
60 Hz

Exit the programming mode.
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

key to go to the next

Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm
Motor Rated rpm
P402=17 50rpm

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Enter the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm
P402=17 50rpm

97

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm

Use the
and
keys to set
the correct motor rated rpm value
Motor Rated rpm
P402 =17 30rpm

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
parameter

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated rpm
P402 =17 30rpm

key to go to the next
Moto r Rated HP
P4 04=0. 33HP

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Use the
and
keys to select
the motor rated power

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode.

Press the
parameter

Enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated
P4 04=0. 33HP

HP

Mo to r Rated HP
P404=5. 0HP

Selected Motor Rated Power:
5.0 HP/3.7 kW

Exit the programming mode.
Mo to r Rated HP
P404=5. 0HP

key to go to the next
Ventilation Type
P406 =Self Vent.

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0=Self Ventilated
1=Separate Ventilation
3=Increased Protection

Enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P406 =Self Vent.

98

Motor Rated HP Range:
1 to 1600.0 HP
1 to 1190.0 kW

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Use the
and
keys to select
the motor ventilation type

DESCRIPTION

Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated
Ventilation Type
P40 6 =Self Vent.

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Exit the programming mode.
Ventilation Type
P406 =Self Vent.

The first power-up routine is finished.
Inverter is ready to operate.

Refer to Section 5.3
VFD
ready

Note: (1) P401 maximum value is 1.8xP295 for model 4.2A/500-600V and 1.6xP295 for models 7A and 54A/220-230V; 2.9A and
7A/500-600V; 107A, 147A and 247A/500-690V; 100A, 127A and 340A/660-690V.

ATTENTION!
Open the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch to shut down the CFW-09.

NOTES!
To repeat the initial power-up procedure:
Set the parameter P204 = 5 or 6 (this loads the factory default parameters)
and follow the initial power-up sub-routine again;
The initial power-up sub-routine described above automatically sets some
parameters according to the entered data. For more details, refer to Chapter
6.
Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up:
a) Insert the motor data at parameters P400 to P407;
b) For operation in the vector mode run the self-tuning routine (P408 > 0);
c) Set P156, P157, P158, P169, P170, P171, and P172;
d) Power the drive down and up for the new settings to take place and for
the proper motor operation.
Modification of motor characteristics after the first power up, for operation in
VT mode:
Follow the previous procedures and also set parameter P297 to 2.5 kHz.

5.3 START-UP

This Section describes the start-up procedure when operating via the Keypad (HMI).
Four types of control will be considered:V/F 60Hz, Sensorless Vector, Vector
with Encoder Feedback and VVW (Voltage Vector Weg).

DANGER!
Even after the AC input is disconnected, high voltages may still be present.
Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down to allow a full discharge of the
capacitors.
99

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

5.3.1 Type of Control: V/F 60Hz Operation Via Keypad (HMI)

The V/F or Scalar control is recommended in the following cases:
Several motors driven by the same inverter;
Motor rated current lower than 1/3 of the inverter rated current;
For test purposes, without a motor connected to the inverter.
The V/F control can also be used in applications that do not require fast
dynamic responses, accurate speed regulation or high starting torque
(speed error will be a function of the motor slip).
When parameter P138 (Rated Slip) is programmed, speed accuracy of
1% can be obtained.
The sequence below is valid for the Connection 1 (refer to section 3.2.7).
The inverter must be already installed and powered up according to chapter 3
and section 5.2.
LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Inverter is ready to be operated.

Power-up the inverter

Press the
or

VFD
ready

key. Press the keys
until P000 is reached

Parameter
P000 = 0

Access

Enter the programming mode
Parameter
P000 = 0

Use the
and
the password value

Access

-

keys to set

Password value (factory default = 5)
Parameter
P000 = 5

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Access

-

Exit the programming mode.
Parameter
P000 = 5

or

Access

-

until
Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

100

Enables the access to change parameters
content.
With the factory default programming
[P200 = 1 (Password Active)], P000 must
be set to 5 to allow parameters changes

-

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Press the keys
P202 is reached

DESCRIPTION

Type of Control Selection:
0=V/F 60Hz
1=V/F 50Hz
2=V/F Adjustable
3=Sensorless Vector
4=Vector with Encoder
5=VVW

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

DESCRIPTION

Enter the programming mode
Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

Use the
and
select the type of control

keys to

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Press the
P002 is reached

Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

If the option V/F 60Hz (value=0) is
already programmed, ignore this
action

Exit the programming mode.

keys or until
Motor Speed (rpm)
Motor Speed
P002 = 0 r pm

Press the

This is a read-only parameter

key
Motor Speed
P002 = 0 r pm

Press the

Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90 r pm

Press the
key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached

Press the
FWD / REV key.
Obs: The LED’s on the keypad show
whether the motor is running FWD
or REV.

Motor accelerates from 0 to 90rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW)
direction of rotation (1)
* for 4 pole motors

Motor accelerates up to 1800rpm* (2)
* for 4 pole motors
Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm

Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm

Motor decelerates (3) down to 0 rpm
and then reverses the direction of
rotation accelerating back up to
1800rpm

101

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

Stop key
VFD
ready

Press the

key and hold it
Motor Speed
P002 = 150 r pm

Release the

Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to
the JOG speed set at P122.
Ex.: P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

key
VFD
ready

NOTE!
The last frequency reference value set via the
and
keys is saved
If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter, change parameter
P121 (Keypad Reference).
OBSERVATIONS:
(1) If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct, switch off the inverter.
Wait 10 minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and then
swap any two wires at the motor output.
(2) If the acceleration current becomes too high, specially at low frequencies
(<15Hz), adjust the Torque Boost at P136.
Increase/decrease the content of P136 gradually until you obtain an
operation with constant current over the entire frequency range.
Refer to P136 in Chapter 6.
(3) If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, increase the deceleration time at
P101 / P103.

102

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

5.3.2 Type of Control: Sensorless
or Vector with Encoder
(Operation Via Keypad
(HMI))

For the majority of the applications, the Sensorless Vector control is
recommended. This mode permits an operation over a 100:1 speed range,
a speed control accuracy of 0.5 % (Refer to P412 - Chapter 6), high torque
and fast dynamic response.
Another advantage of this type of control is a higher immunity to sudden
AC input voltage variation and load changes, thus avoiding nuisance tripping
due to overcurrent.
The adjustments necessary for a good sensorless control operation are
made automatically.
The Vector Control with Encoder Feedback offers the same advantages
as the Sensorless Control described above, with the following additional
benefits:
Torque and speed control down to zero speed (rpm);
Accuracy of 0.01 % in the speed control
The closed loop vector control with encoder requires the use of the optional
board EBA or EBB for encoder connection - Refer to Chapter 8.
OPTIMAL BRAKING:
This setting allows controlled motor braking within shortest possible
times without using other means, such as DC Link chopper with braking
resistor (for more details about this function refer to P151 – Chapter 6).
The inverter is supplied with this function set at maximum. This means
that the braking is disabled. To enable the braking, set P151 according
to Table 6.7.
The sequence below is based on the example in Section 5.2.

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Power-up the inverter

DESCRIPTION

Inverter is ready to be enabled
VFD
ready

Press the
or
reached

key. Press the keys
until P000 is

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Parameter Acess
P000 = 0

-

Enables the access to change
parameters content.
With the factory default programming
[P200 = 1 (Password Active)], P000
must be set to 5 to allow parameters
changes

Enter the programming mode
Parameter Acess
P000 = 0

-

103

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Use the
and
set the password value

keys to

Password value (factory default = 5)
Parameter Acess
P000 = 5

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

or

-

Exit the programming mode.
Parameter Acess
P000 = 5

Press the keys
P202 is reached

DESCRIPTION

-

until
Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

Type of Control Selection:
0=V/F 60Hz
1=V/F 50Hz
2=V/F Adjustable
3=Sensorless Vector
4=Vector with Encoder
5=VVW
Enter the programming mode

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode
Type o f con trol
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

Use the
select the
(Sensorless)

and
type

of

keys to
control

Ty pe of co ntrol
P20 2 =Sen sorl ess

Selected Type of Control:
3 = Sensorless Vector

OR
Use the
and
keys to
select the type of control (with
Encoder)

104

Selected Type of Control:
4 = Vector with Encoder
T ype of control
P202 = En co der

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Press the
key to save the
selected option and start the tuning
routine after changing to Vector
Control mode

Press the

Motor Rated Voltage Range:
0 to 690V
Moto r Rated
P400 = 380V

Volt

key and use the

and
keys to set the
correct motor rated voltage value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
next parameter

DESCRIPTION

Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
460V
Moto r Rated
P400 = 460V

Volt

Exit the programming mode.
Moto r Rated
P400 = 460V

Volt

key to go to the
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9A

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295(1)

Enter the programming mode
Mo to r R ated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9A

Use the
and
keys to set
the correct motor rated current value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter

Moto r R ated Cur.
P401=7.9A

Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A

Exit the programming mode.
Moto r R ated Cur.
P401=7.9A

Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300Hz
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

105

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Use the
and
keys to set
the correct motor rated frequency
value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
parameter

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

Exit the programming mode.

Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm
Motor Rated rpm
P402=1730rpm

Enter the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm
P402 =17 30rpm

Use the
and
keys to set
the correct motor rated rpm value
Motor Rated rpm
P402 =17 30rpm

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated rpm
P402 =17 30rpm

key to go to the
Moto r Rated
P404= 5.0 HP

106

Programmed Motor Rated
Frequency: 60 Hz

Moto r Rated Freq
P403=060Hz

key to go to the next

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Press the
next parameter

DESCRIPTION

HP

Motor Rated HP Range:
1 to 1600.0 HP
1 to 1190.0 kW

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Enter the programming mode
Moto r Rated
P4 04 = 5.0 H P

Use the
and
keys to
select the motor rated power

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Moto r Rated
P4 04 = 5.0 H P

HP

HP

Moto r Rated
P4 04 = 5.0 H P

HP

En coder PPR
P40 5 = 1024 PPR

Use the
and
keys to
set the correct encoder PPR value.
(Vector with Encoder only)

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode.
(Vector with Encoder only)

Press the
next parameter

Selected Motor Rated Power:
7=5.0 HP/3.7 kW

Exit the programming mode.

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode.
(Vector with Encoder only)

DESCRIPTION

En coder PPR
P40 5 = 1024 PPR

En coder PPR
P40 5 = XXXX PPR

En coder PPR
P40 5 = XXXX PPR

key to go to the
Ventilation Type
P4 06 =Self Vent.

Encoder Pulses per Rotation (PPR)
Range:
0 to 9999

Enter the programming mode

Programmed Encoder PPR:
XXXX

Exit the programming mode.

Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0=Self Ventilated
1=Separate Ventilation
2=Optional Flux
(only for P202=3)
3=Increased Protection

107

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P4 06 =Self

Vent.

Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated

Use the
and
keys to
select the motor ventilation type
Ventilation Type
P4 06 =Self

Press the
key to save the
selected option and exit the
programming mode

Exit the programming mode.
Ventilation Type
P4 06 =Self

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter
Note: Display shows during 3s:
P409 to P413=0
Run Self-tuning

Vent.

Vent.

Run Self Tuning
P408 = No

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Self-tuning Mode Selection:
0=No
1=No Rotation
2=Run for Im
3=Run for TM (only with Encoder)
4=Estimate TM (only with Encoder)

Enter the programming mode
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No

Use the
and
keys to
select the desired Self-tuning mode
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No

108

Sensorless:
Only select option 2 (Run for Im ) if no
load is coupled to the motor shaft.
Otherwise , select option 1 (No Rotation).
With Encoder:
In addition to the options above, it is also
possible to estimate the
TM
(Mechanical Time Constant) value.
With the load coupled to the motor shaft,
select 3 (Run for TM ). The motor will
only run when TM is estimated. All other
parameters are estimated with the motor at standstill. If only TM estimation is
desired, select option 4 (Estimate TM)
(Refer to P408 in Chapter 6)

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

ACTION

Press the
key to start the
self-tuning routine

Messages and values of the
estimated parameters are
shown

DESCRIPTION

Self-tuning routine in progress

Motor Speed (rpm)

End of the Self-tuning routine.
Inverter is back to normal operation
Motor Speed
P002 = XXXX r pm

Press the

Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90r pm

Press the
key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached

Motor Speed

Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW)
direction of rotation (2)
* for 4 pole motors

Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm* (3)
* for 4 pole motors

P002 = 1800r pm

Press the
FWD / REV key
Obs: The LED’s on the keypad
show whether the motor is running
FWD or REV

Press the

Motor Speed
P002 = 1800r pm

Stop key

Motor decelerates (4) down to 0 rpm
and then reverses the direction of
rotation accelerating back up to
1800rpm

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD
ready

Press the

key and hold it
Motor Speed
P002 = 150r pm

Release the

key

Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to
the speed set at P122
Ex.: P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD
ready

109

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

NOTES!
(1) P401 maximum value is 1.8xP295 for model 4.2A/500-600V and 1.6xP295
for models 7A and 54A/220-230V; 2.9A and 7A/500-600V; 107A, 147A and
247A/500-690V; 100A, 127A and 340A/660-690V.
(2) The last speed reference value set via the
and
keys is saved.
If you wish to change this value before enabling the inverter, change parameter
P121 (Keypad Reference).
(3) The self-tuning routine can be cancelled by pressing the

key.

(4) If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, you must increase deceleration time
at P101 / P103.
OBSERVATION:
If the rotation direction of the motor is not correct, switch off the inverter. Wait 10
minutes to allow a complete discharge of the capacitors and swap any two wires
at the motor output. If motor is equipped with an encoder, change the phase of
the encoder connections ( exchange channel A and A).

ATTENTION!
In Vector mode (P202=3 or 4), when the command STOP (START/STOP) is
enabled - see Figure 6.37, the motor will decelerate up to zero speed, but it
maintains the magnetization current (no-load current). This maintains the motor
with rated flux and when the next START command is given, it will achieve a
quick response.
For self-ventilated motors with no-load current higher than 1/3 of the rated current
(generally small motors lower than 10 HP), it is recommended that the motor
does not stay in this condition (magnetization current) for a long time, since it
may overheat. In these cases, we recommend to deactivate the command “General Enable” (when the motor has stopped), thus decreasing the motor current
to zero when stopped.
Another way to disable magnetization current with the motor stopped is to program
P211 to 1 (zero speed disable is ON) for both vector modes and, for vector with
encoder, still another option is to program P181 to 1 (Magnetization mode). If
magnetization current is disabled with the motor stopped, there will be a delay at
start while the flux builds up.

5.3.3 Type of Control:
VVW - Keypad
Operation

110

The VVW (Voltage Vector WEG) control mode follows the same philosophy of
the V/F control. The VVW control allows a reasonable improvement of the steadystate drive performance: it results in a better speed regulation and in a higher
torque capability at low speeds (frequencies lower than 5Hz).
As a result, the frequency (speed) range of the system is increased with respect
to the V/F control. Other advantages of this control are the simplicity and ease of
setting.
The VVW control uses the stator current measurement, the stator resistance
(that can be obtained from the self-tuning routine) and the motor nameplate data
to automatically estimate the torque value, the output compensation voltage value
and, consequently, the slip compensation value, which substitute the function of
parameters P137 and P138.
In order to get a good steady-state speed regulation, the slip frequency is
calculated from the estimated load torque value (which uses the motor nameplate
data).
The following sequence is valid for Connection #1 (refer to item 3.2.7). The drive
should have been already installed and powered up according to instructions in
Chapter 3 and item 5.2.

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

Power-up the inverter
Inverter is ready to be operated.
VFD
ready

Press the
keys
reached.

or

key. Press the
until P000 is
Parameter Access
P000 = 0

Enables the access to change
parameters content. With the factory
default programming [P200=1
(Password Active)], P000 must be set
to 5 to allow parameters changes.

-

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Enter the programming mode
Parameter Access
P000 = 0

-

Use the keys
and
to set the password value

Password value (factory default = 5)
Parameter Access
P000 = 5

Press the key
to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Exit the programming mode.
Parameter Access
P000 = 5

Press the keys
P202 is reached.

or

-

until
Type of control
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

-

Type of Control Selection:
0=V/F 60Hz
1=V/F 50Hz
2=V/F Adjustable
3=Sensorless Vector
4=Vector with Encoder
5=VVW

Enter the programming mode
Type of control
P202 = V/F 60 Hz

111

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Use the
and
keys to
select the type of control (VVW).

DESCRIPTION

Selected Type of Control:
5=VVW
Type of control
P202 = VVW

Press the key
to save the
selected option and start the tuning
routine after changing to VVW
Control mode

Press the

Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 460V

Motor Rated Voltage Range:
0 to 690V

key and use the

and
keys to set the
correct motor rated voltage value

Programmed Motor Rated Voltage:
460 V
Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 460V

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated Volt
P400 = 380V

Press the
next parameter

key to go to the

Motor Rated Current Range:
(0.0 to 1.30) x P295(1)
Motor Rated Cur.
P401=7.9 A

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Enter the programming mode
Motor Rated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9 A

Use the
and
keys to
set the correct motor rated current
value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

112

Programmed Motor Rated Current:
7.9 A
Motor Rated Cur.
P401=7.9 A

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated Cur.
P4 01 = 7. 9 A

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Motor Rated Freq
P403= 60Hz

DESCRIPTION

Motor Rated Frequency Range:
0 to 300Hz

Enter the programming mode

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode
Motor Rated Freq
P403= 60Hz

Use the
and
keys to
set the correct motor rated frequency
value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Programmed Motor Rated
Frequency: 60 Hz
Motor Rated Freq
P403= 60Hz

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated Freq
P403= 60Hz

Motor Rated rpm Range:
0 to 18000 rpm

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter
Motor Rated rpm
P402=1730 rpm

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Use the
and
keys to
set the correct motor rated rpm
value

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Enter the programming mode
Motor Rated rpm
P402=1730 rpm

Programmed Motor Rated rpm:
1730 rpm
Motor Rated rpm
P402=1730 rpm

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated rpm
P402=1730 rpm

113

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the
next parameter

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

key to go to the
Motor Rated HP
P404=5.0 CV

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

DESCRIPTION

Motor Rated HP Range:
1 to 1600.0 CV
1 to 1190.0 kW

Enter the programming mode
Motor Rated HP
P404=5.0 CV

Selected Motor Rated Power:
5.0 CV/3.7 kW

Use the
and
keys
to select the motor rated power
Motor Rated HP
P404=5.0 CV

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
next parameter

Exit the programming mode.
Motor Rated HP
P404=5.0 CV

key to go to the

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68

Motor Rated Power Factor
0.50 to 0.99

Enter the programming mode
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68

Motor Power Factor:
0.68

Use the
and
keys to
select the Motor Rated Power Factor
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

114

Exit the programming mode.
FP Nom. Motor
P40 7 = 0.68

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

Press the
next parameter

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

key to go to the
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399=67.0%

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

DESCRIPTION

Motor Rated Efficiency
50.0 to 99%

Enter the programming mode
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399=67.0%

Use the
and
keys to
select the Motor Rated Efficiency

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Press the
next parameter

Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399=67.0%

Motor Rated Efficiency
67.0%

Exit the programming mode.
Rendim.Nom.Motor
P399=67.0%

key to go to the
Ventilation Type
P406=Self Vent.

Pressionar
para entrar no
modo de programação

Motor Ventilation Type Selection:
0=Self Ventilated
1=Separate Ventilation
2=Optimal Flux
3=Increased Protection

Enter the programming mode
Ventilation Type
P406=Self Vent.

Use the
and
keys to
select the motor ventilation type

Press the
key to save the
programmed value and exit the
programming mode

Ventilation Type
P406=Self Vent.

Selected Motor Ventilation Type:
0 = Self Ventilated

Exit the programming mode.
Ventilation Type
P406=Self Vent.

115

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Press the
key to go to the
next parameter
Note: Display shows during 3s:
P409 to P413=0
Run Self-tuning

Press the
key to enter the
programming mode

Use the
and
keys to
select the desired Self-tuning mode
nota: O dispaly mostrará durante o
Auto-ajuste o P409

Press the
key to start the
self-tuning routine

Run Self Tuning
P408 = No

DESCRIPTION

Self-tuning Mode Selection:
0=No
1=No Rotation

Enter the programming mode
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No

Only select option 2 (No Rotation)
Run Self Tuning
P408 = No Rotation

Messages and values of
the estimated parameters
are shown

End of the Self-tuning routine.
Inverter is back to normal operation

Self-tuning routine in progress

Motor Speed (rpm)
Motor Speed
P002 =
XXXX rpm

Press the

Start key
Motor Speed
P002 = 90 r pm

Press the
key and hold until
1800 rpm is reached

116

Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm

Motor accelerates from 0 to 90 rpm*
(Minimum Speed), in the Forward (CW)
direction of rotation (2)
* for 4 pole motors

Motor accelerates up to 1800 rpm* (3)
* for 4 pole motors

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION

LED DISPLAY
LCD DISPLAY

Press the
FWD / REV key
Obs: The LED’s on the keypad
show whether the motor is running
FWD or REV

Press the

Motor Speed
P002 = 1800 r pm

Stop key

DESCRIPTION

Motor decelerates (4) down to 0 rpm
and then reverses the direction of
rotation accelerating back ⇒ up to
1800rpm

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD
ready

Press the

key and hold it
Motor Speed
P002 = 150 r pm

Release the

key

Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to the
speed set at P122
Ex.: P122 = 150 rpm
CCW direction of rotation

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm
VFD
ready

NOTE!
The drive always stores the last speed reference value set through the keypad.
Therefore, if you want to change this value before enabling the drive use the parameter
P121 - Keypad Speed Reference.

NOTES!
(1) If the direction of rotation of the motor is inverted, power the drive down, waits 10
minutes for the complete discharge of capacitors and interchange any two motor
output cables.
(2) In case of having E01 during deceleration, increase the deceleration time through
P101 / P103.

117

CHAPTER

6

DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
This Chapter describes in detail all CFW-09 parameters. In order to simplify the
explanation, the parameters have been grouped by characteristics and functions:
Read Only Parameters

Variables that can only be viewed on the
display but not changed. Examples
would be motor speed or motor current.

Regulation Parameters

Programmable values used by the
CFW-09 functions. Examples would be
Acceleration and Deceleration times.

Configuration Parameters

Set-up parameters that are programmed
during inverter start-up and define its basic
operation. Examples would be Control
Type, Scale Factors and the Input/Output
functions.

Motor Parameters

Motor data that is indicated on the motor
nameplate. Other motor parameters are
automatically measured or calculated
during the Self-tuning routine.

Special Function Parameters

It includes parameters related to special
functions.

Symbols and definitions used in this chapter:
(1)

Indicates that the parameter can be changed only with the inverter disabled
(motor stopped).
(2) Indicates that the values can change as a function of the motor parameters.
(3) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P413 (Tm Constant obtained during Self-tuning).
(4) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P409, P411
(obtained during Self-tuning).
(5) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P412 (Tr Constant obtained during Self-tuning).
(6) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P296.
(7) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P295.
(8) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P203.
(9) Indicates that the values can change as a function of P320.
(10) (For new drives) User Default = no parameters.
(11) The inverter will be delivered with settings according to the market,
considering the HMI language, V/F 50 Hz or 60 Hz and the required voltage.
The reset of the standard factory setting may change the parameters related
to the frequency (50Hz/60 Hz). Values within parenthesis mean the factory
setting for 50 Hz.
(12) The maximum value of P156 and P401 is 1.8xP295 for model 4.2A/500600V and 1.6xP295 for models 7A and 54A/220-230V; 2.9A and 7A/500600V; 107A, 147A and 247A/500-690V; 100A, 127A and 340A/660-690V.
Torque Current = it is the component of the motor total current responsible for
torque generation (used in Vector Control).
Active Current = it is the component of the motor total current proportional
to active electric power absorbed by the motor (used in V/F control).
118

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.1 ACCESS AND READ ONLY PARAMETERS - P000 to P099

Parameter
P000
Parameter Access/
Password Value
Setting

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
Description / Notes
0 to 999
This parameter opens the access to change other parameter values. When
[0]
P200 = 1 (Password Active)] it is necessary to set P000 = 5 to change
parameter values.
By programming P000 with the password that releases access to
changing of parameter content plus 1 (Password + 1), you will obtain
access only to the parameters with different content that the factory
default setting.
To change the password to any other value (password 1), proceed as
follows:
1) Set P000=5 (current password) and P200= 0 (password inactive).
2) Press the Key

.

3) Change P200 to 1 (password active).
4) Press

again: display shows: P000.

5) Press

again: display shows 5 (last password).

and
6) Use the
value (password 1).

keys to change to the desired password

7) Press
: display shows P000. From this moment on, the new
password becomes active. Thus, to change parameters content P000
has to be set to the new password. (Password 1).
P001
Speed
Reference

0 to P134
[-]
1rpm

Speed Reference value in rpm (Factory Default). With filter of 0.5s.
The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters
P207, P216 and P217. The scale factor can be changed at P208 and
P210.
It does not depend on the speed reference source.
Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference (P121)
when P221 or P222=0.

P002
Motor Speed

0 to P134
[-]
1rpm

Indicates the actual motor speed in rpm, (factory default). With filter of
0.5s.
The displayed units can be changed from rpm to other units at parameters
P207, P216 and P217. The scale factor can be changed at P208 and
P210.
Through this parameter is possible to change the speed reference (P121)
when P221 or P222=0.

P003
Motor Current

0 to 2600
[-]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

Indicates inverter output current in ampère (A).

119

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
Description / Notes

P004
DC Link Voltage

0 to 1235
[-]
1V

Indicates the inverter DC Link voltage in volt (V).

P005
Motor Frequency

0 to 1020
[-]
0.1Hz

Indicates the inverter output frequency in hertz (Hz).

P006
Inverter Status

Rdy, run, sub, Exy
[-]
-

Indicates the inverter status:
rdy- inverter is ready to be started or enabled;
run- inverter is enabled;
Sub- inverter is disabled and line voltage is too low for operation
(undervoltage);
Exy- inverter is in a fault condition, ‘xy’ is the number of the Fault code,
example: E06.

P007
Output Voltage

P009
Motor Torque

0 to 800
[-]
1Vac
0 to 150.0
[-]
0.1%

Indicates the inverter output voltage in volt (V).

Indicates the torque developed by the motor. It is determined as follows:
P009 =

Tm.100

xY

ITM
Where:
Tm = Measured motor torque current
ITM = Nominal motor torque current given by:
N = Speed
ITM =

Y = 1 for N ≤ Nrated
2

2

P401 - X

X= P410 x

P178

Y=

Nrated
N

for N> Nrated

100
P010
Output Power

P012
Digital Inputs
DI1 to DI8 Status

0.0 to 1200
[-]
0.1kW
LCD=1 to 0
LED=0 to 255
[-]
-

Indicates the instantaneous output power in quilowatt (kW).

Indicates on the Keypad LCD display the status of the 6 digital inputs of
the control board (DI1...DI6), and the 2 digital inputs of the I/O Expansion
Board (DI7 and DI8). Number 1 stands for Active (DIx closed) and number
0 stands for Inactive (DIx open), in the following order:
DI1, DI2, ... ,DI7, DI8.
The LED display shows a decimal value related to the 8 Digital Inputs,
where the status of each input is considered one bit of a binary number
where:

120

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
Description / Notes
Inactive = 0, Active = 1, and the DI1 status is the most significant bit (MSB).
Example:
DI1=Active (+24V); DI2=Inactive (0V)
DI3=Inactive (0V); DI4=Active (+24V)
DI5=Inactive (0V); DI6=Inactive (0V)
DI7=Inactive (0V); DI8=Inactive (0V)
This is equivalent to the binary sequence:
10010000
Which corresponds to the decimal number 144.
The Keypad displays will be as follows:

DI1 to DI8 Status
P012=10010000

P013
Digital and Relay
Outputs DO1, DO2
RL1, RL2 and RL3
Status

LCD = 1, 0
LED = 0 to 255
[-]
-

Indicates on the Keypad LCD Display the status of the 2 Digital Outputs
of the I/O Expansion Board (DO1, DO2) and the 3 Relay Outputs of the
control board. Number 1 stands for Active and number 0 stands for Inactive,
in the following order: DO1, DO2, RL1, RL2, RL3.
The LED display shows a decimal value related to the status of the 5
Digital and Relay Outputs, where the status of each output is considered
one bit of a binary number where:
Inactive = 0, Active = 1, and the status of DO1 is the most significant bit
(MSB). The 3 least significant bits are always ‘0’.
Example:
DO1=Inactive; DO2=Inactive
RL1=Active: RL2=Inactive; RL3=Active
This is equivalent to the binary sequence:
00101000
Which corresponds to the decimal number 40.
The Keypad displays will be:

DO1 to RL3 Status
P013= 00101

121

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P014
Last Fault
P015
Second Previous Fault
P016
Third Previous Fault
P017
Fourth Previous Fault

P018
Analog Input AI1' Value
P019
Analog Input AI2' Value
P020
Analog Input AI3' Value
P021
Analog Input AI4' Value

P022
WEG Use

P023
Software Version

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
Description / Notes
Indicates the numbers of the last, second, third and fourth previous Faults.

0 to 70
[-]
0 to 70
[-]
0 to 70
[-]
0 to 70
[-]
-

Fault Sequence:
Exy → P014 → P015 → P016 → P017 → P060 → P061 → P062 →
P063 → P064 → P065.
Ex: When the display shows 0 (zero), this means E00, 1 (one) means
E01 and so on.

-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%
-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%
-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%
-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%

Indicate the percentage value of the analog inputs AI1 to AI4. The
indicated values are obtained after offset action and multiplication by the
gain. Refer to parameters P234 to P247.

[-]
Indicates the CFW-09 Software Version.

X.XX
[-]
-

P024
A/D Conversion
Value of Analog
Input AI4

LCD: -32768 to 32767
LED: 0 to FFFFH
[-]
-

Indicates the A/D conversion result of the analog input A14 located on
the I/O Expansion Board.

P025
A/D Conversion
Value of Iv Current

0 to 1023
[-]
-

P025 and P026 indicate the A/D conversion result, in module, of the V
and W phase currents, respectively.

P026
A/D Conversion
Value of Iw Current

0 to 1023
[-]
-

122

The LCD display indicates the conversion value as a decimal number
and the LED display as a hexadecimal number with negative values in
supplement of 2.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
Description / Notes

P027
Analog Output AO1

0 to 100
[-]
0.1%

P028
Analog Output AO2

0 to 100
[-]
0.1%

P029
Analog Output AO3

-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%

P030
Analog Output AO4

-100 to +100
[-]
0.1%

P040
PID Process variable

0 to P528
[-]
1

Indicate the percentage value of the analog outputs AO1 to AO4 with
respect to the full-scale value. The indicated values are obtained after
the multiplication by the gain. Refer to the description of parameters
P251 to P258.

It indicates the process variable in % (factory setting), used as the PID
Feedback.
The indication unit can be changed through P530, P531 and P532. The
scale can be changed through P528 and P529.
See detailed description in Item 6.5 - Special Function Parameters.
This parameter also allows to modify the PID set point (P252) when
P221=0 or P222=0.

P042
Powered Time

LCD: 0 to 65530h
LED: 0 to 6553h (x10)
[-]
1

Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter was powered.
The LED Display shows the total number of hours that the inverter was
energized divided by 10.
This value remains stored even when the inverter is turned OFF.
Example: Indication of 22 hours powered.

Hours Energized
P042 = 22 h

P043
Enabled Time

0 to 6553h
[-]
0.1 (<999.9)
1 > 1000

Indicates the total number of hours that the inverter has run.
Indicates up to 6553 hours, rolls over to 0000.
If P204 is set to 3, the P043 is reset to zero.
This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF.

123

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P044
kWh Counter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 65535kWh
[-]
1

Description / Notes
Indicates the energy consumed by the motor.
Indicates up to 65535 kWh, then it return to zero.
If P204 is set to 4, the P044 is reset to zero.
This value remains stored even when inverter is turned OFF.

P060
Fifth Error
P061
Sixth Error

0 to 70
[-]
0 to 70
[-]
-

P062
Seventh Error

0 to 70
[-]
-

P063
Eighth Error

0 to 70
[-]
-

P064
Ninth Error

0 to 70
[-]
-

P065
Tenth Error

0 to 70
[-]
-

P070
Motor Speed and
Motor Current

0 to P134
[-]
1 rpm
0 to 2600
[-]
0.1A(<100)
1A(>99.9)

Indicates the numbers of the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth ninth and tenth
occurred error, respectively
Record Systematic:
Exy → P014 → P015 → P016 → P017 → P060 → P061 → P062 →
P063 → P064 → P065
Ex: When the display show 0 (zero), this means E00, 1 (one) means
E01 and so on.

Indicates simultaneously the motor speed value (rpm) and the motor
current value (A).
It is possible to use this parameter to change the speed reference (P121)
when P221 or P222=0.

NOTE!
The LED display shows the speed.

P071
Command Word

LCD: 0 a 65535
LED: 0 a FFFFh

Shows the command word value set through the network

P072
Fieldbus Speed
Reference

LCD: 0 a 65535
LED: 0 a FFFFh

Shows the speed reference value set through the Fieldbus network

124

The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal
representation, while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal
representation.

The LCD display of the keypad shows the value in a decimal
representation, while the LED display shows the value in a hexadecimal
representation.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.2 REGULATION PARAMETERS - P100 to P199

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P100
Acceleration Time

0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1s (< 99.9) -1s (>99.9)

P101
Deceleration Time

0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1s (< 99.9) -1s (>99.9)

P102
Acceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1s (< 99.9) - 1s (>99.9)

P103
Deceleration Time 2

0.0 to 999
[ 20 ]
0.1s (< 99.9) - 1s (>99.9)

P104
S Ramp

Description / Notes
Setting the vallue to 0.0s results in no Acceleration ramp.
Defines the time to accelerate (P100) linearly from zero up to the
maximum speed (P134) or to decelerate (P101) linearly from the
maximum speed down to 0 rpm.
The selection of the Acceleration / Deceleration Time Ramp 2 (P102 or
P103) can be made by reprogramming one of the digital inputs DI3 to
DI8. Refer to P265 to P270 in Ramp 2.

0 to 2
[0]
-

P104

S Ramp

0

Inactive

1

50%

2

100%

Table 6.0 - Choosing S or Linear Ramp
Speed

Linear
50% S ramp
100% S ramp
Time
Accel. Time
(P100/102)

Decel. Time
(P101/103)
Figure 6.1 - S or Linear Ramp

The ramp S reduces the mechanical stress during the acceleration and
deceleration of the load.
P120
Speed Reference
Backup

0 to 1
[1]
-

Defines if the Frequency Reference Backup function is disabled (0) or
enabled (1).
If P120 = Off, the inverter does not save the current reference value,
when the inverter is enabled again, it will restart from the minimum
frequency setting (P133).
This back-up function is applicable to the keypad (HMI), P.E, Serial,
Fieldbus and PID Setpoint (P525) references.
125

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
P120

Backup

0

Off

1

On

Table 6.1 - Speed Reference Backup

P121
Keypad Speed
Reference

P133 to P134
[ 90 ]
1rpm

P122 (2)(11)
JOG or JOG+
Speed Reference

0 to P134
[ 150 (125) ] (11)
1rpm

P123 (2)(11)
JOG Speed Reference

0 to P134
[ 150 (125) ] (11)
1rpm

To activate the

and

active: P221=0 or P222=0.

With P120 = 1 (On) the content of P121 is maintained (backup) even
when the inverter is disabled or turned off.

The JOG command source is defined at P225 (Local Mode) or P228
(Remote Mode).
If the JOG command is selected for DI3 to DI8, one of the Digital Inputs
must be programmed as follows:
Digital Input

Parameters

DI3
DI4

P265 = 3 (JOG)
P266 = 3 (JOG)

DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8

P267 = 3 (JOG)
P268 = 3 (JOG)
P269 = 3 (JOG)
P270 = 3 (JOG)

Table 6.2 - JOG Command selected by digital input

During the JOG command, the motor accelerates to the value defined
at P122, following the acceleration ramp setting.
The direction of rotation is defined by the Forward/Reverse function (P223
or P226).
JOG is effective only with the motor at standstill.
The JOG+ and JOG- commands are always via Digital Inputs.
One DIx must be programmed for JOG+ and another for JOG- as follows:

Digital Inputs
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8

Parameters
JOG+
P265 = 10
P266 = 10
P267 = 10
P268 = 10
P269 = 10
P270 = 10

JOGP265 = 11
P266 = 11
P267 = 11
P268 = 11
P269 = 11
P270 = 11

Table 6.3 - JOG+ and JOG- command selection

126

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
During the JOG + or JOG- commands the values of P122 or P123 are
respectively added to, or subtracted from the speed reference to generate
the total reference. Refer to Figure 6.26.

P124 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 1

P133 to P134
[ 90 (75) ] (11)
1rpm

P125 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 2

P133 to P134
[ 300 (250) ] (11)
1rpm

P126 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 3

P133 to P134
[ 600 (500) ] (11)
1rpm

P127 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 4

P133 to P134
[ 900 (750) ] (11)
1rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1200 (1000) ] (11)
1rpm

P128 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 5

P129 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 6

P130 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 7

P131 (2)(11)
Multispeed Ref. 8

These parameters (P124 to P131) are shown only when P221 = 8 and/
or P222 = 8 (Multispeed).
Multispeed is used when the selection of a number (up to 8) of preprogrammed speeds is desired:
If you want to use only 2 or 4 speeds, any input combination of DI4, DI5
and DI6 can be used. The input(s) programmed for other function(s)
must be considered as 0V in the table 6.4.
It allows control of the speed by relating the values programmed in
parameters P124 to P131 to a logical combination of the Digital Inputs.
The advantages of this function are stability of the fixed references and
electrical noise immunity (isolated digital inputs DIx).
Multispeed function is active when P221 (Local Mode) or P222 (Remote
Mode) is set to 8 (Multispeed).

Digital Input

Programming

DI4

P266 = 7

DI5

P267 = 7

DI6

P268 = 7

P133 to P134
[ 1500 (1250) ] (11)
1rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1800 (1500) ] (11)
1rpm
P133 to P134
[ 1650 (1375) ] (11)
1rpm

8 speeds
4 speeds
2 speeds
DI6

DI5

DI4

Speed Ref.

0V

0V

0V

P124

0V

0V

24V

P125

0V

24V

0V

P126
P127

0V

24V

24V

24V

0V

0V

P128

24V

0V

24V

P129

24V

24V

0V

P130

24V

24V

24V

P131

Table 6.4 - Multispeed References

127

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Speed
P130
P131
P129
P128
Accel. Ramp

P127
P126
P125
P124

Time
24V
DI6

0V (Open)
24V

DI5

0V (Open)
24V

DI4

0V (Open)
Figure 6.2 - Multispeed

P132 (1)
Maximum
Overspeed Level

0 to 100
[ 10 ]
1%

When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of P134+P132 longer
than 20ms, the CFW-09 will disable the PWM pulses by E17.
The P132 setting is a value in percent of P134.
When programmed P132 = 100%, this function remains disabled.

P133 (2)
Minimum Speed Ref.

0.0 to (P134-1)
[ 90 (75) ] (11)
1rpm

P134 (2)
(P133+1) to (3.4xP402)
Maximum Speed Ref. [ 1800 (1500) ] (11)
1rpm

Defines the maximum and minimum motor operation speed reference.
Are valid for any type of speed reference signal.
For more details about the actuation of P133 refer to P233 (Analog
Inputs Dead Zone).
a)
Speed
P134

P133

-10V

+10V
-P133

-P134

128

Speed
Reference

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
b)
Speed
P134

P133

0
0 ........................ 100%
0 ........................... 10V
0 ........................ 20mA
4mA ..................... 20mA
10V ............................. 0
20mA .......................... 0
20mA .................... 4mA

Speed
Reference

Figure 6.3 a) b) - Speed limits considering the “Dead Zone” active (P233=1)

P135 (2)
Speed transition to I/F
Control

0 to 90
[ 18 ]
1rpm

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 (Sensorless
Vector Control)

The speed at which the transition from Sensorless Vector Control to I/F
(Scalar Control with Imposed Current) occurs. The minimum speed
recommended for Sensorless Vector control is 18 rpm for 60 Hz motors
and 15 rpm for 50 Hz motors, with 4 poles.
For P135 ≤ 3 the CFW-09 will always operate in Sensorless Vector mode
when P202 = 3, (There is no transition to the I/F mode).
The current level to be applied on the motor in the I/F mode is set at
P136.
Scalar control with imposed current means only current control working
with current reference level adjusted by P136. There is no speed control,
just open loop frequency control.

P136
Manual Torque
Boost
For V/F Control
(P202 = 0, 1 or 2)

0 to 9
[1]
1

Compensates for the voltage drop on the motor stator resistance at low
frequencies and increases the inverter output voltage in order to maintain
a constant torque in V/F operation.
Always set P136 to the lowest value that permits the motor to start
satisfactorily. If the value is higher than required, an inverter overcurrent
(E00 or E05) may occur due to high motor currents at low frequencies.

129

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Output Voltage
Nominal

P136=9
1/2 Nominal

P136=0
0

30Hz

60Hz

Frequency

Figure 6.4 - P202=0- V/F 60Hz Curve

Output Voltage
Nominal

P136=9
1/2 Nominal

P136=0
0

25Hz

50Hz

Frequency

Figure 6.5 - P202 = 1 - V/F 50Hz Curve

P136
Current Reference
for I/F Mode
For Sensorless
Vector Control
(P202=3)

0 to 9
[1]
1

Sets the current to be applied to the motor when in I/F mode. I/F mode
occurs when the motor speed is lower than the value defined by
parameter P135.
P136

Current in I/F mode
% of P410 (Imr)

0

100%

1

111%

2

122%

3

133%

4

144%

5

155%

6

166%

7

177%

8

188%

9

200%

Table 6.5 - Current Reference for I/F Mode

130

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P137
Automatic Torque
Boost

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.00 to 1.00
[ 0.00 ]
0.01

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1 or 2
(V/F Control)

Description / Notes
The automatic Torque Boost compensates for the voltage drop in the
stator resistance as a function of the motor active current.
The criteria for setting P137 are the same as for the parameter P136.
P007
Torque Boost
P136

Speed
Reference

Output
Active
Current

Motor
Voltage

Automatic
Torque Boost
P137
P139
Figure 6.6 - Block Diagram P137

Output Voltage
Nominal

1/2 Nominal

Boost
Zone
1/2 Nom

Nominal

Speed

Figure 6.7 - V/F curve with automatic torque boost

P138
Slip Compensation
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1 or 2
(V/F Control)

-10.0 to +10.0%
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

P138 (for values between 0.0% and +10.0%) is used in the Motor Slip
Compensation output frequency function, which compensates for the
speed drop as the load increases.
P138 allows the user to set the VSD for more accurate slip compensation.
Once set up P138 will compensate for speed variations due to load by
automatically adjusting both voltage and frequency.

Total Reference
(See figures 6.26 and 6.27 b)

Speed

Slip
Compensation

Active
Output
Current
P139

∆F

P138
Figure 6.8 - Block Diagram P138

131

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Output Voltage
Vnom

(Function
to motor
load)
Nnom

Frequency

Figure 6.9 - V/F Curve with Slip Compensation

To set Parameter 138:
⇒Run the motor without load up to approximately half of the
application top speed;
⇒Measure the actual motor or equipment speed;
⇒Apply load;
⇒Increase P138 until the speed reaches its no-load value.
Values of P138 < 0.0 are used in special applications, where the
reduction of the output speed is desired as function of the motor current
increase. Ex.: load sharing between two motor/drive sets.
P139
Output Current Filter
[only for P202 = 0, 1
or 2 (for V/F control)]
This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2
(V/F Control) or 5
(VVW)

0.00 to 16.00
[ 1.00 ]
0,01s

0 to 10
[0]
0.1s

P141
Dwell Speed at Start

0 to 300
[ 90 ]
1rpm

132

It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation
functions. See figures 6.7 and 6.8.
Adjusts the response time of the slip compensation and automatic torque
boost. Refer to Figures 6.6 and 6.8.

P140
Dwell Time at Start

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0, 1, 2
(V/F Control) or 5
(VVW)

Adjusts the time constant of the active current filter.

Assist during high torque starts by allowing the motor to establish the
flux before starting to accelerate the load.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Speed

P141

Time

P140

Figure 6.10 - Curve for high torque starts

P142 (1)
Maximum Output
Voltage

0 to 100
[ 100 ]
0.1%

These parameters allow changing the standard V/F curves defined at
P202. Special V/F profiles may be necessary when motors with nonstandard voltages/frequencies are used.

P143 (1)
Intermediate Output
Voltage

0 to 100
[ 50 ]
0.1%

This function allows changing the predefined standard curves, which
represents the relationship between the output voltage and the output
frequency of the drive, and consequently, the motor magnetization flux.
This feature may be useful with special applications that require rated
voltage values or rated frequency values different from the standard ones.

P144 (1)
Output Voltage
at 3 Hz

0 to 100
[8]
0.1%

P145 (1)
Field Weakening
Speed
P146 (1)
Intermediate Speed

These parameter are shown
on the display(s)
only when P202 = 0,
1 or 2 (V/F Control)

P133(>90) to P134
[ 1800 ]
1rpm
90 to P145
[ 900 ]
1rpm

Function activated by setting P202 = 2 (V/F Adjustable).
The factory default value of P144 (8.0%) is defined for standard 60 Hz
motors. If the rated motor frequency (set at P403) is different from 60
Hz, the factory default value of P144 can become unsuitable and may
cause troubles during motor start. A good approach for the setting of
P144 is given by
P144=

3
x P142
P403

If an increase of the starting torque is required, increase the value of
P144 gradually.
Procedures for the parameter setting of the function “Adjustable V/F”:
1.Disable Inverter;
2.Check inverter data (P295 to P297);
3.Set motor data (P400 to P406);
4.Set display data in P001 and P002 (P208, P210, P207, P216 andP217);
5.Set speed limits (P133 and P134);
6.Set parameters of the function “Adjustable V/F” (P142 to P146);
7.Enable function “Adjustable V/F” (P202=2).

133

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Output Voltage
100%

Power Supply Voltage

P142
P202=2
P143

P144

0.1Hz

3Hz

P146

P145

P134

Speed/
Frequency

Figure 6.11 - Adjustable V/F Curve V/F

P150 (1)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Mode

0 to 2
[1]
-

P150
0=With losses
(Optimal Braking)
1=Without losses

This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

2=Enable/Disable
via DIx

Action
Optimal braking is active as described in P151 for vector
control. This gives the shortest possible deceleration time
without using dynamic braking or regeneration.
Automatic deceleration ramp control. Optimal braking is
not active. The deceleration ramp is automatically
adjusted to keep the DC link voltage below the level set in
P151. This avoids E01 DC link overvoltage tripping. Can
also be used with eccentric loads.
DIx=24V: The Braking acts as described for P150=1;
DIx=0V: The Optmal Braking becomes inactive. The
DC link voltage will be controlled by parameter P153
(Dynamic Braking).

Table 6.6 - DC Link Voltage Regulation Mode

P151 (6)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Level
For V/F Control
(P202=0,1, 2 or 5)

339 to 400 (P296=0)
[ 400 ]
1V
585 to 800 (P296=1)
[ 800 ]
1V
616 to 800 (P296=2)
[ 800 ]
1V
678 to 800 (P296=3)
[ 800 ]
1V

134

P151 sets the DC Link Voltage Regulation Level to prevent E01overvoltage. This Parameter jointly with the Parameter P152 allows two
operation modes for the DC Link Voltage Regulation. Please find below
a description of the two operation modes.
DC Link Voltage Regulation type when P152=0.00 and P151 is
different from the maximum value: ramp Holding – When the DC
Link Voltage reaches the Regulation Level during the deceleration, the
deceleration ramp time is increased and the speed is maintained at a
constant value till the DC Link Voltage leaves the actuation. See Figure
6.12.
This DC Link Voltage Regulation (ramp holding) tries to avoid the inverter
disabling through fault relating to DC Link Overvoltage(E01), when the
deceleration of loads with high inertia is carried out, or deceleration with
short times are performed.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes

739 to 800 (P296=4)
[ 800 ]
1V

DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
E01 - Overvoltage Level
P151

Regulation Level

Nominal

809 to 1000 (P296=5)
[ 1000 ]
1V
Time

885 to 1000 (P296=6)
[ 1000 ]
1V

Speed

924 to 1000 (P296=7)
[ 1000 ]
1V
1063 to 1200 (P296=8)
[ 1200 ]
1V

Time
Figure 6.12 - Deceleration with Ramp Holding

With this function you can achieve a optimized deceleration time
(minimum) for the driven load.
This function is useful in application where loads with medium moment
of inertia are driven, that require short deceleration ramps.
If even so the inverter is disabled during the acceleration due to overvoltage
(E01), reduce the value of P151 gradually, or increase the deceleration
ramp time (P101 and/or P103).
In case the supply line is permanently under overvoltage (Ud>P151), the
inverter cannot decelerate. In this case reduce the line voltage or
increment P151.
If even after these settings the motor cannot decelerate within the required
deceleration time, use the dynamic braking. (For more details about the
dynamic braking, see 8.10).

Type of DC Link Voltage Regulation when P152>0.00 and P151
are set different that than the maximum value: When the DC Link
Voltage reaches the regulation level during the deceleration, the
deceleration ramp time is increased and the motor is also accelerated
until the DC link voltage leaves the defined over-voltage level. There after
deceleration is continued. See Figure 6.13.
Inverter

400/

220/
380V

660/

500/

440/
480V

525V

Vrated

230V

415V

460V

P296

0

1

2

3

4

5

P151

375V

618V

675V

748V

780V

893V

575V 600V
6

7

690V
8

972V 972V 1174V

Table 6.7 - Recommended values for DC link voltage regulation level

135

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
DC Link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
E01 - Overvoltage Level
P151

Regulation Level

Nominal

Time
Speed

Time
Figure 6.13 - Deceleration curve with DC Link voltage limitation (regulation)

NOTES!
The factory setting is at maximum (link regulation is deactivated).
To activate this regulation, we recommend to set P151 according
Table 6.7.
If even after this setting the inverter is still disabled due to
overvoltage (E01) during the load acceleration, increase the value
of the Parameter P152 gradually, or increase the deceleration
ramp time (P101 and/or P103). The inverter will not decelerate,
if the supply line is permanently under overvoltage Ud > P151).
In this case reduce the line voltage or increment P151.

P152
DC Link
Voltage (Ud)

Speed

P151

Speed Ramp
Output

Figure 6.14 - Voltage Regulation Block Diagram of the DC-Link

NOTE!
For large motors it’s recommended the use of the ramp holding
function.

136

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P151 (6)
DC Link Voltage
Regulation Level
with and without
Optimal Braking
For Vector Control
(P202=3 or 4)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
339 to 400 (P296=0)
[ 400 ]
1V

Description / Notes
P151 defines the level for the DC link voltage regulation during braking.
The time of the deceleration ramp is automatically extended, thus avoiding
overvoltage error (E01).
The DC link voltage regulation has two modes of operation:

585 to 800 (P296=1)
[ 800 ]
1V
616 to 800 (P296=2)
[ 800 ]
1V
678 to 800 (P296=3)
[ 800 ]
1V
739 to 800 (P296=4)
[ 800 ]
1V
809 to 1000 (P296=5)
[ 1000 ]
1V
885 to 1000 (P296=6)
[ 1000 ]
1V
924 to 1000 (P296=7)
[ 1000 ]
1V
1063 to 1200 (P296=8)
[ 1200 ]
1V

1. With losses (Optimal braking) – set P150 to 0. In this mode the flux
current is modulated so as to increase the losses in the motor, there
by increasing the braking torque. It works better with lower efficiency
motors (smaller motors). It is not recommended for motors bigger
than 75HP/55kW. See explanation below.
2. Without losses – set P150 to 1. Only the DC link voltage regulation is
active.

NOTE!
P151 factory setting is set at maximum this disables the DC link
voltage regulation. To enable it, adjust according to table 6.7.
Optimal Braking:
The Optimal Braking is a unique method of stopping the motor that
provides more braking torque than DC Injection Braking without requiring
Dynamic Braking components. In the case of DC Braking, except for the
friction losses, only the rotor losses are used to dissipate the stored
energy due to the driven mechanical load.
With Optimal Braking, both the total motor losses and the inverter losses
are used. In this way, it is possible to achieve a braking torque of
approximately 5 times higher than with the DC braking (Refer to Figure
6.15).
This feature allows high dynamic performance without the use of a
Dynamic Braking resistor.
Figure 6.15 shows a Torque x Speed curve of a typical 7.5 kW/10 HP, IV
pole motor. The braking torque developed at full speed, with torque (P169
and P170) limited by the CFW-09 at a value equal to the motor rated
torque, is given by TB1 point (figure 6.15).
TB1 value depends on the motor efficiency and disregarding the friction
losses it is given by the following equation:
TB1 =

1-η
η

Where:
η = motor efficiency
For the case in Figure 6.15, the motor efficiency at full load condition is
84% η = 0.84, that results in TB1 = 0.19 or 19% of the motor rated
torque. Starting at TB1 point, the braking torque varies in the reverse
proportion of the speed (1/N). At low speeds, the braking torque reaches
the torque limit level set by the inverter. For the case of Figure 6.15, the
torque limit (100%) is reached when the speed is 20% of the rated speed.
137

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
The braking torque indicated in Figure 6.15 can be increased by increasing
the inverter torque limit: P169 (maximum forward torque current) or P170
(maximum reverse torque current).
In general, smaller motors have lower efficiency (higher losses)
consequently Optimal Braking can achieve higher braking torques with
smaller motors.
Examples: 0.75 kW/1 HP, IV poles: η = 0.76 that results in TB1= 0.32
15 kW/20 HP, IV poles: η = 0.86 that results in TB1= 0.16
Torque (PU)
1.0
(a)
(b)
TB1
0

0 0.2

(c)
1.0

Speed (PU)
2.0

Figure 6.15 - T x rpm curve for optimal braking and typical 10HP/7.5kW
motor driven by an inverter with torque limitation set for a value equal to the
rated motor torque

(a)
(b)
(c)

Torque generated by the motor in normal operation, driven by an
inverter in “motor mode”.
Braking torque generated by Optimal Braking
Braking torque generated with DC Injection Braking

NOTE!
The enabling of the optimal braking can increase the motor noise
level and the vibration level. If this not desired, disable the optimal
braking.
P152
Proportional Gain of
the DC Link Voltage
Regulator
[Only for P202= 0,
1, 2 (V/F control)
or 5 (VVW)]

P153 (6)
Dynamic Braking
Voltage Level

138

0.00 to 9.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01

Refer to P151 for V/F Control (Figure 6.14).
If P152 = 0.00 and P151 is different from the maximum value, the
Ramp Holding function is active. (See P151 for the Scalar Control
Mode)
P152 multiplies the DC link voltage error, i.e. DC link actual - DC link
setting (P151). P152 is typically used to prevent overvoltage in
applications with eccentric loads.

339 to 400 (P296=0)
[ 375 ]
1V
585 to 800 (P296=1)
[ 618 ]
1V
616 to 800 (P296=2)
[ 675 ]
1V

Dynamic braking can only be used if the inverter is fitted with a dynamic
braking resistor. The voltage level for actuation of the brake chopper
must be set according to the supply voltage. If P153 is set too close to
the overvoltage trip level (E01) an overvoltage trip may occur before the
brake chopper and resistor can dissipate the braking energy. The following
are the recommended settings:

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
678 to 800 (P296=3)
[ 748 ]
1V
739 to 800 (P296=4)
[ 780 ]
1V
809 to 1000 (P296=5)
[ 893 ]
1V
885 to 1000 (P296=6)
[ 972 ]
1V
924 to 1000 (P296=7)
[ 972 ]
1V
1063 to 1200 (P296=8)
[ 1174 ]
1V

Description / Notes
Inverter Vnom
220/230V
380V
400/415V
440/460V
480V
500/525V
550/575V
600V
660/690V

P296
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

E01
> 400V

P153
375V
618V
675V
748V
780V
893V
972V
972V
1174V

> 800V

> 1000V
> 1200V

Table 6.8 - Recommended settings of the Dynamic Braking Actuation
DC link Voltage (Ud) (P004)
E01 -Overvoltage Level
P153
Nominal

Dynamic Braking Level

Time
DB Resistor
Voltage

Ud

Ud

Time
Figure 6.16 - Curve of the Dynamic Braking Actuation

To actuate the Dynamic Braking:
⇒ Connect the DB resistor. Refer to Section 8
⇒ Set P154 and P155 according to the size of the Dynamic braking
resistor.
⇒ Set P151 to its maximum value: 400V (P296=0), 800V (P296=1,2,3
or 4), 1000V (P296=5, 6 or 7) or 1200V (P296=8), to avoid actuation of
the DC link Voltage Regulation before Dynamic Braking.
P154
Dynamic Braking
Resistor

P155
DB Resistor Power
Rating

0 to 500
[0]
0.1Ω ( ≤ 99.9)1Ω ( ≥ 100)

0.02 to 650
[ 2.60 ]
0.01kW (<9.99)
0.1kW (>9.99)
1kW(>99.9)

Resistance value of the Dynamic Braking resistor (in ohms).
P154 = 0 disables the braking resistor overload protection. Must be
programmed to 0 when braking resistor is not used.

Adjusts the overload protection for Dynamic Braking resistor. Set it
according to the power rating of the DB resistor (in kW).
If the average power in the braking resistor during 2 minutes is higher
than the value set at P155, the inverter trips on an E12 fault.
See item 8.10.

139

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P156 (2) (7) (12)
Motor Overload
Current at 100%
Speed

P157 to 1.3xP295 (12)
[ 1.1xP401 ]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

P157 (2) (7)
Motor Overload
Current at 50%
Speed

P156 to P158
[ 0.9xP401 ]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

P158 (2) (7)
Motor Overload
Current at 5%
Speed

0.2xP295 to P157
[ 0.55xP401 ]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

Description / Notes
I (A) =

Motor Current (P003)
Overload Current

4

3
2,5
2
1,5
1,3
1,1

0,5
t (s)

0
0

15

30

60 75

100

150

300

Figure 6.17 - Ixt Function - Overload detection
% P401

P156
110
100
98

P157

90

55

0
0 5

50

100

% Speed

Curve for motor with separate ventilation
Curve for self-ventilated motor
Increased Protection Curve

Figure 6.18 - Overload protection levels

Used to protect motor and inverter against timed overload (I x t - E05).
The Motor Overload Current (P156, P157 and P158) is the current level
above which the CFW-09 will consider the motor operating under
overload. The higher the overload, the sooner the Overload Fault E05 will
occur.
Parameter P156 (motor overload current at base speed) must be set
10% higher than the used rated motor current (P401).
The overload current is given as a function of the motor speed. The
parameters P156, P157 and P158 are the three points used to form the
overload curve, as shown in Figure 6.18 with the factory default levels.
140

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
This overload curve adjustment improves the protection of self-ventilated
motors, or it can be programmed with a constant overload level at any
speed for blower cooled motors.
This curve is changed when P406 (Ventilation Type) is changed during
the start-up subroutine. (See 5.2).

P160
Optimization of the
Speed Regulator
(for torque control)

0 to 1
[0]
-

When use P160 = 1?

Speed Regulator
Normal or
Saturated ?

Normal

Maintain
P160=0
Standard
Operation

Saturated
Set P160 = 1 (P202 = 4)
Set P160 = 0 (P202 = 3)

Speed reference setting.
See NOTE 1 !

Setting of the desired
Torque. See NOTE 2 !

Figure 6.19 - Torque Control

Speed Regulator operating with Current Limitation (Saturated) for
torque limitation purposes
The speed reference shall be set to value at least 10% higher than the
working speed. It ensures that the output of the speed regulator will be
equal to the maximum allowed value set for the maximum torque current
(P169, or P170, or external limitation through AI2 or AI3). In such way, the
regulator will operate with current limitation, i.e., saturated.
When the speed regulator is positively saturated, i.e., in the forward
direction (set in P223/P226), the value for the torque current limitation is
set at parameter P169.
When the speed regulator is negatively saturated, i.e., in the reverse
direction (set in P223/P226), the value for the torque current limitation is
set at parameter P170.
The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also a
protection function (limitation). For instance: in a winder, if the winding
material is disrupted, then the regulator leaves the saturated condition
and starts controlling the motor speed, which will be limited by the speed
reference value.

141

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Torque limitation settings
The torque can be limited as follows:
1. Through parameters P169/P170 (by using the keypad, the Serial
Wegbus protocol or the Fieldbus protocols)
2. Through AI2 (P237 = 2 - Maximum torque current)
3. Through AI3 (P241 = 2 - Maximum torque current)
Notes:
The motor current shall be equivalent to the CFW-09 drive current so
that the torque control can achieve its best precision.
The sensorless control (P202=3) does not work with torque limitation at
frequencies lower than 3Hz. Use the vector with encoder control
(P202=4) for applications that require torque limitation at frequencies
lower than 3Hz.
The torque limitation (P169/P170) shall be greater than 30% in order to
guarantee the motor start in the sensorless mode (P202=3). After the
motor has started and it is running above 3Hz, the torque limitation
value (P169/P170) may be reduced below 30%, if required.
The motor torque (Tmotor) can be calculated from the value at P169/
P170 by using the following equation:

Tmotor




=







 ×100
2
P
178
 
(P401)2 −  P410 ×

100  

P169 *
P 295 ×
×K
100

where:
Tmotor - Percentage value of the rated motor torque.

 1 for N ≤ N rated

K =
 N rated × P180 for N > N
rated
 N
100
Nnom = Motor synchronous speed
N = Motor actual speed
* NOTE: The above equation is valid for forward torque. To reverse torque,
replace P169 by P170.

142

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(3)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P161
Proportional Gain of
the Speed Regulator

0.0 to 63.9
[ 7.4 ]
0.1

P162 (3)
Integral Gain of the
Speed Regulator

0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.023 ]
0.001

Description / Notes
The gains for the speed regulator are automatically set based on the
value of parameter P413 (Tm Constant).
However, these gains can be manually adjusted in order to optimize the
dynamic response of the speed. Increase this value to have a faster
response. Although, reduce this value in case of speed oscillations.
In general, P161 smoothes abrupt changes of speed or reference, while
P162 reduces the error between the set point and the real speed value,
as well as improves the torque response at low speeds.
Optimization of the Speed Regulator – Procedure for manual setting:

1 - Select the acceleration (P100) and/or deceleration (P101) time
according to the application;
2 - Set the speed reference to 75% of the maximum value;
3 - Configure the analog output AO3 or AO4 to Real Speed by setting
P255 or P257 to 2.
4 - Block the speed ramp – Start/Stop = Stop and wait until the motor
stops;
5 - Release the speed ramp – Start/Stop = Start; observe the motor speed
signal at the analog output AO3 or AO4 with an oscilloscope;
6 - Check among the options in figure 6.20 which waveform best represents
the signal measured with the oscilloscope.
N (V)

N (V)

t (s)

a) Low Gain(s)

N (V)

t (s)

b) Optimized Speed
Regulator

t (s)

c) High Gain(s)

Figure 6.20 - Types of response for the Speed Regulator.

Settings of P161 and P162 as a function of the type of response presented
in figure 6.20:
a) Increase the proportional gain (P161), and/or increase the integral
gain (P162).
b) Speed regulator is optimized.
c) Decrease the proportional gain (P161), and/or decrease the integral
gain (P162).

143

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P163
Offset value for the
Local Reference #1

-999 to 999
[0]
1

P164
Offset value for the
Remote Reference #1

-999 to 999
[0]
1

Description / Notes
Parameters P163 or P164 may be used to compensate a bias offset at
the analog input signals, when the speed reference is given by the analog
inputs (AI1 to AI4).
Refer to figure 6.26.

These parameters (P160 to P164)
are shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control)
P165
Speed Filter

0.012 to 1.000s
[ 0.012s ]
0.001s

This parameter is shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
P166
Speed Regulator
Differential Gain

P168 (4)
Integral Gain of the
Current Regulator
Parameters
(P166 and P167 and
P168) are shown
on the display(s)
only when P202 = 3
or 4 (Vector
Control)

144

NOTE!
In general, this parameter shall not be changed. Increasing the
speed filter value renders the system response slower.

0.00 to 7.99
[ 0.00 ]
-

The differential action may reduce the effects on the motor speed caused
by the load variation. Refer to figure 6.27 a).
P166
0.0
0.01 to 7.99

This parameter is shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
P167 (4)
Proportional Gain of
the Current Regulator

Adjusts the time constant for the Speed Filter. Refer to figure 6.27 a).

Differential Gain Action
Off
On

Table 6.9 - Speed Regulator Differential Gain Action

0.00 to 1.99
[ 0.5 ]
0.01
0.000 to 1.999
[0.010 ]
0.001

The parameters P167 and P168 are set by the self-tuning routine as a
function of parameters P411 and P409, respectively.

NOTE!
These parameters must not be changed.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P169 (7)
Maximum Output
Current
For V/F Control
(P202=0, 1, 2 or 5)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.2xP295 to 1.8xP295
[ 1.5xP295 ]
0.1A(<100) -1A(>99.9)

Description / Notes
This parameter limits the motor output current by reducing the speed,
which avoids motor stalling under overload conditions.
As the motor load increases, the motor current also increases. When
this current exceeds the value set at parameter P169, the motor speed
is reduced (by using the deceleration ramp) until the current value falls
below the value set at P169. The motor speed is resumed when the
overload condition stops.
Motor current
P169

Time

Speed
Decel. Ramp
(P101/P103)

Accel. Ramp
(P100/P102)

Accel.
Ramp

Decel.
Ramp

During
Acceleration

During
Deceleration

During
Cont. Duty

Time

Figure 6.21 - Curves showing the actuation of the current limitation

P169 (7)
Maximum Forward
Torque Current
For Vector Control
(P202 = 3 or 4)

0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1%

This parameter limits the value of the component of the motor current
that produces forward torque. The setting is expressed as a percentage
value of the drive rated current (P295=100%).
The values of P169/P170 can be calculated from the maximum desired
value for the motor current (Imotor) by using the following equation:
P169/P170(%) =

100 x Imotor

2

-

100 x P410

P295

P170
Maximum Reverse
Torque Current
This parameters (P169 and
P170) are shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1%

2

P295

This parameter limits the value of the component of the motor current
that produces reverse torque. While operating in torque limitation, the
motor current can be calculated by:

Imotor =

P169 or P170
x P295
100

2

+ (P410) 2

145

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
The maximum torque produced by the motor is given by:
P295 x
Tmotor (%) =

P169
xK
100

x 100

(P401) - P410 x P178
100
2

2

where:
1 for N ≤ Nrated
K=

Nrated
x P180 for N > Nrated
N
100

While the Optimal Braking is operating, P169 limits the maximum output
current in order to produce the braking forward torque (refer to P151).
See the above description for P169.

P171
Maximum Forward
Torque Current at
the Maximum Speed
(N = P134)

0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1%

P172
Maximum Reverse
Torque Current at
the Maximum Speed
(N = P134)

0 to 180
[ 125 ]
1%

Torque current limitation as a function of the speed:
Torque Current

P170/P169

P173=0

P172/P171
P173=1
Speed
Synch. Speed x P180
100

These parameters (P171 and
P172) are shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

P134

Figure 6.22 – Operation curve of the torque limitation at maximum speed

This function is disabled while the value of P171/P172 is equal to or
greater than the value of P169/170.
P171 and P172 operate also during the optimal braking by limiting the
maximum output current.

P173
Type of Curve for the
Maximum Torque
This parameter is show on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
146

0 to 1
[0]
-

It defines the operation curve of the torque limitation at the field-weakening
region. Refer to figure 6.22.
P173

Curve Type

0

Ramp

1

Step

Table 6.10 - Curve Type of the Maximum Torque

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P175 (5)
Proportional Gain of
the Flux Regulator
P176 (5)
Integral Gain of
the Flux Regulator

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 31.9
[ 2.0 ]
0.1
0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.020 ]
0.001

Description / Notes
P175 and P176 are automatically set as a function of parameter P412.
In general the automatic setting is adequate and there is no need for a
reconfiguration.
These gains shall only be manually reconfigured when the excitation
current signal (id*) is oscillating and compromising system operation.

NOTE!
The excitation current (id*) may be unstable in case of P175 > 12.
Note: (id*) can be observed at analog outputs AO3 and /or AO4 by
setting P255=14 and / or P257=14, or at P29 and / or P30.

P177
Minimum Flux
P178
Rated Flux
P179
Maximum Flux

0 to 120
[0]
1%
0 to 120
[ 100 ]
1%
0 to 120
[ 120 ]
1%

Parameters P177 and P179 define the output limits of the flux regulator
in the Sensorless Vector control.

0 to 120
[ 95 ]
1%

This parameter is represented as a percentage of the motor rated speed
(P402) and defines the speed where the field weakening region of the
motor starts.

NOTE!
These parameters shall not be changed.
P178 is the flux reference to both Vector controls (sensorless and with
encoder).

P177 to P179
are active only when
P202=3 (Sensorless
Vector)
P180
Starting Point of the
Field Weakening
Region

If the drive is operating in Vector control and the motor is not reaching its
rated speed, it is possible to gradually reduce the value of parameters
P180 and/or P178 until it works appropriately.

These parameters (P175, P176,
P178 and P180) are
shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control)
P181
Magnetization Mode
This parameter
is shown on the
display only when
P202 = 4 (Vector
Control with Encoder)

0,1
[0]
-

P181

Function

0

General Enable

1

Start/Stop

Action
It applies magnetization current after
General Enable ON
It applies magnetization current after
Start/Stop ON

Table 6.11 - Magnetization Mode

In sensorless vector, magnetization current is permanently ON. To disable
magnetization current when the motor is stopped, program P211 to 1
(ON). This can be given a time delay by programming P213 greater than
zero.
147

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - P200 to P399

Parameter
P200
Password

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0,1
[1]
-

Description / Notes
P200

Function

0

Off

1

On

Result
Disables the Password and allows
changing parameters content
independently of P000.
Enables the Password and allows
changing parameters content only when
P000 is set to the password value.

Table 6.12 - Password

The factory default for the password is P000 = 5.
To change the password refer to P000.
P201 (11)
Language Selection

0 to 3
[-]
-

P201
0
1
2
3

Language
Português
English
Español
Deutsch

Table 6.13 - Language selection

P202 (1) (2) (11)
Type of control

0 to 5
[0]
-

Type of Control
V/F 60Hz
V/F 50Hz
V/F Adjustable (Refer to P142 to P146)
Sensorless Vector
Vector with Encoder
VVW (Voltage Vector WEG)

P202
0
1
2
3
4
5

Table 6.14 - Type of control selection

For details on the Type of Control selection Refer to Section 5.3.

P203 (1)
Special Function
Selection

0,1
[0]
-

It defines the selection type of special functions:
P203

Functions

0

Not Used

1

PID Regulator

Table 6.15 - Special Function selection

For the special function of PID regulator, see detailed description of
related parameters (P520 to P535).
When P203 is changed to 1, P265 is changed automatically to 15 Manual/Auto.

148

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(1) (10)

P204
Load/Save
Parameters

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[0]
-

Description / Notes
The parameters P295 (Inverter Rated Current), P296 (Inverter Rated
Voltage), P297 (Switching Frequency), P308 (Serial Address) and P201
(Language) are not changed when the factory default parameters are
loaded through P204 = 5 and 6.
In order to load the User Parameters #1 (P204=7) and/or the User
Parameters #2 (P204=8) into the operation area of the CFW-09, it is
necessary that the User Memory #1 and/or the User Memory #2 have
been previously saved (P204=10 and/or P204=11).
Once entered the user parameters are automatically saved to the VSD
EEPROM. In addition it is possible to save two further sets of
parameters, or to use these as a “backup”.
The operation of Load User 1 and/or 2 can also be done by DIx (See
parameters P265 to P269).
The options P204=5, 6, 7, 8, 10 and 11 are disables when P309 ≠ 0
(Active Fieldbus).
User
Default
1

Current
Inverter
Parameters

P204=5
or 6

Factory
Default

User
Default
2

Figure 6.23 - Parameter Transference

149

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
P204
0, 1, 2, 9

Action
Not Used:
No action
Reset P043:
Resets the Time Enabled hour
meter to zero
Reset P044:
Resets the kWh counter to zero
Load WEG-60Hz:
Resets all parameters to the 60Hz
factory default values.
Load WEG-50Hz:

3

4
5

6

Resets all parameters to the 50Hz
factory default values.
Load User 1:
Resets all parameters to the values stored
in Parameter Memory 1.
Load user 2:
Resets all parameters to the value
stored in Parameter Memory 2.
Save User 1:
Stores all current inverter parameter
values to Parameter Memory 1.
Save User 2:
Stores all current inverter parameter values
to Parameter Memory 2.

7

8

10

11

Table 6.16 - Action of loading/saving parameters

NOTE!
The action of loading/saving parameters will take effect only after
P204 has been set and the
key is pressed.
P205
Display Default

0 to 7
[2]
-

Selects which of the parameters listed below will be shown on the display
as a default after the inverter has been powered up:
P205
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Display Default
P005 (Motor Frequency)
P003 (Motor Current)
P002 (Motor Speed)
P007 (Motor Voltage)
P006 (Inverter Status)
P009 (Motor Torque)
P070 (motor speed and motor current)
P040 (PID Process Variable)

Table 6.17 - Options displays default

150

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P206
Auto-Reset
Time

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 255
[0]
1s

Description / Notes
In the event of a fault trip, except for E09, E24, E31 and E41,the CFW-09
can initiate an automatic reset after the time given by P206 is elapsed.
If P206 ≤ 2 Auto-Reset does not occur.
If after Auto-Reset the same fault is repeated three times consecutively,
the Auto-Reset function will be disabled. A fault is considered consecutive
if it happens again within 30 seconds after Auto-Reset.
Hence, if an error occurs four consecutive times, it will be permanently
indicated (and the drive will be disabled).

P207
Reference
Engineering Unit 1

32 to 127
[ 114 (r) ]
-

This parameter is useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with
LCD display.
P207 is used to apply a customised display to P001 (Speed reference)
and P002 (motor speed). The letters rpm can be changed to user selected
characters, E.g. CFM, L/s, etc.
The Reference Engineering Unit is formed by three characters, which
will be applied to the Speed Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed
(P002) LCD display indications. P207 defines the left character. P216
defines the center character and P217 the right character.
All characters correspondent to the ASCII code from 32 to 127 can be
chosen.
Examples: A, B, ... , Y, Z, a, b, ... , y, z, 0, 1, ... , 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +,...

P208 (2) (11)
Reference Scale
Factor

1 to 18000
[ 1800 (1500) (11) ]
1

Defines how the Speed Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed (P002)
will be displayed.
For indicating the values in rpm:
Set the synchronous speed according to the following table.

Frequency

50Hz

60Hz

Motor Pole
Number
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8

Syncronous
Speed - rpm
3000
1500
1000
750
3600
1800
1200
900

Table 6.18 - Synchronous speed reference in rpm

For indicating other values:
The displayed value when the motor is running at synchronous speed
can be calculated through the following equations:
P002 = Speed x P208 / Sync speed x (10)P210
151

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
P001 = Reference x P208 / Sync speed x (10)P210
Where:
Reference = Speed Reference in rpm.
Speed = Motor speed in rpm;
Sync Speed = Motor synchronous speed (120 x P403 / Poles);
Poles = Motor number of poles (120 x P403 / P402);
Example:
Desired indication: 90.0 l/s at 1800 rpm
Motor synchronous speed: 1800 rpm
Programming: P208 = 900, P210 = 1, P207 = l, P216 = /, P217 = s

P209 (1)
Motor Phase Loss
Detection

0,1
[0]
-

P209
0
1

Motor Phase Loss (E15)
Off
On

Table 6.19 - Actuation Motor Phase Loss Detection

With the Motor Phase Loss Detector enabled (P209=1), E15 happens
when the following conditions occur simultaneously during a minimum
time of 2 seconds:

i.

P209 = On;

ii.

Inverter enabled;

iii.

Speed reference higher than 3%;

iv.

| Iu - Iv| > 0.125xP401 or | Iu – Iw| > 0.125xP401
or | Iv – Iw| > 0.125xP401.

P210
Decimal point of
the Speed Indication

P211 (1)
Zero Speed
Disable

0 to 3
[0]
1

0,1
[0]
-

Defines the number of digits after the decimal point of the Speed
Reference (P001) and the Motor Speed indications (P002).

P211

Zero Speed Disable

0

Off

1

On

Table 6.20 - Zero Speed Disable

When active, it disables (general disabling, motor runs freely) the inverter
when the speed reference and the actual motor speed are lower than
the value set at P291 (Zero Speed Zone).
The CFW-09 will be enabled again, when one of the conditions defined
by the Parameter P212 is satisfied.

152

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P212
Condition to Leave
Zero Speed Disable

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 or 1
[0]
-

Description / Notes
P212
(P211=1)
0

Inverter leaves zero
speed disable if
P001 (Speed ref. N*) >
P291 or P002 (Motor
speed N) > P291

1

P001 (Speed ref. N*) > P291

Table 6.21 - Condition to Leave Zero Speed Disable

When the PID Regulator is active (P203=1) and in Automatic mode, the
inverter leaves the Zero Speed, besides the programmed condition in
P212, only when the PID input error (the difference between setpoint and
process variable) is higher than the value programmed in P535.
P213
Time Delay for Zero
Speed Disable

P214 (1) (9)
Line Phase Loss
Detection

0 to 999
[0]
1s

0 or1
[1]
-

P213=0: Zero speed disable without timing.
P213>0: Zero speed disable will only become active after the time delay
set in P213. Timing starts when the zero speed zone conditions are
met. If these conditions are no longer met during the delay time, the
timer will reset.

P214
0
1

Line Undervoltage/
Phase Fault (E03)
Off
On

Table 6.22 - Actuation Line Phase Loss Detection

The phase loss detector is active when:
P214 = On and the CFW-09 is enabled.
The display indication and the updating of the fault memory happens 3
seconds after the fault has occurred.
NOTE!
The phase loss detection is not available in types up to 28A for 220230V and 380-480V supply voltage and in types up to 14A for 500600V supply voltage, independently of the value set in P214.
P215 (1)
Copy Function

0 to 2
[0]
-

P215

Action

0=Off

None

1= INV → Transfers the current parameter
Keypad values and the content of the
User 1/2 Memories to the non volatile
EEPROM memory of the Keypad
(HMI). The current inverter
parameters are not changed.
2= Keypad
→ INV

Transfers the content of the Keypad
(HMI) memory to the current inverter
parameters and to the User 1/2
Memories.

Table 6.23 - Action copy function

153

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
The copy function is used to transfer the content of the parameters from
one inverter to another. The inverters must be of the same type (voltage/
current and the same software version must be installed.
NOTE!
If the HMI has parameters saved of a “different version” than installed
in the inverter to which it is trying to copy the parameters, the
operation will not be executed and the inverter will display the error
E10 (Error: not permitted Copy Function). “Different Version” are
those that are different in “x” or “y”, supposing that the numbering
of Software Versions is described as Vx.yz.

Example: version V1.60 → (x=1, y=6 and z=0) stored in the HMI previously
i.
Inverter version: V1.75 → (x´=1, y´=7 and z´=5)
P215=2 → E10 [(y=6) ≠ (y´=7)]
ii.
Inverter version: V1.62 → (x´=1, y´=6 and z´=2)
P215=2 → normal copy [(y=6) = (y´=6)]
The procedure is as follows:
1. Connect the Keypad to the inverter from which the parameters will be
copied (Inverter A);
2. Set P215=1 (INV ® HMI) to transfer the parameter values from the
Inverter A to the Keypad.
key. P204 resets automatically to 0 (Off) after the
3. Press the
transfer is completed.
4. Disconnect the Keypad from the inverter.
5. Connect the same Keypad to the inverter to which the parameters
will be transferred (Inverter B).
6. Set P215=2 (HMI ® INV) to transfer the content of the Keypad memory
(containing the Inverter A parameters) to Inverter B.
key. When P204 returns to 0, the parameter transfer
7. Press the
has been concluded. Now Inverters A and B have the same parameter
values.
Note:
In case Inverters A and B are not of the same model, check the values of
P295 (Rated Current) and P296 (Rated Voltage) of Inverter B.
If the inverters are driving different motors, check the motor related
parameters of Inverter B.
8. To copy the parameters content of the Inverter A to other inverters,
repeat items 5 to 7 of this procedure.

154

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
INVERTER
A

INVERTER
B

Parameters

Parameters

keypad→INV
P215 = 2
Press

INV→keypad
P215 = 1
Press

EEPROM

EEPROM

keypad

Keypad

Figure 6.24 -Copying the Parameters from the “Inverter A” to the “Inverter B”

While the Keypad runs the reading or writing procedures, it cannot be
operated.
P216
Reference Engineering
Unit 2

32 to 127
[ 112 (p) ]
-

P217
Reference Engineering
Unit 3

32 to 127
[ 109 (m) ]
-

These parameters are useful only for inverters provided with a keypad
with LCD display.
The engineering unit of the speed reference is composed of three
characters, which will be displayed on the indication of the Speed
Reference (P001) and Motor Speed (P002). P207 defines the left
character, P216 the center character and P217 the right character.
For more details, refer to Parameter P207.

P218
LCD Display
Contrast Adjustment

0 to 150
[ 127 ]
-

This parameter is useful only for inverters provided with a keypad with
LCD display.

P220 (1)
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection Source

0 to 10
[2]
-

Defines the source of the LOCAL / REMOTE selection command.

It allows the adjustment of the LCD Display contrast. Increase/decrease
the parameter content to obtain the best contrast.

155

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
Always LOCAL Mode
Always REMOTE mode
Key
of the Keypad (HMI) (LOCAL Default)
Key
of the Keypad (HMI) (REMOTE Default)
Digital inputs DI2 to DI8 (P264 to P270)
Serial (Local Default) - SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus
Serial (Remote Default) - SuperDrive or incorporated Modbus
Fieldbus (Local Default) - Optimal Fieldbus board
Fieldbus (Remote Default) - Optimal Fieldbus board
PLC (L) - Optimal PLC board
PLC (R) - Optimal PLC board

P220
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Table 6.24 - LOCAL/REMOTE Selection

In the factory default setting, the key
of the Keypad (HMI) will select
Local or Remote Mode. When powered up, the inverter starts in Local
mode.

P221 (1)
LOCAL Speed
Reference Selection

P222 (1)
REMOTE Speed
Reference Selection

0 to 11
[0]
-

0 to 11
[1]
-

The description AI1’ as apposed to AI1 refers to the analogue signal after
scaling and/or gain calculations have been applied to it (See figure 6.29).
P221/P222
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

LOCAL/REMOTE Speed Reference Selection
and
of the keypad
Analog Input AI1' (P234/P235/P236)
Analog Input AI2' (P237/P238/P239/P240)
Analog Input AI3' (P241/P242/P243/P244)
Analog Input AI4' (P245/P246/P247)
Sum of the Analog Inputs AI1' + AI2' > 0 (Negative values are
zeroed)
Sum of the Analog Inputs AI1' + AI2'
Electronic Potentiometer (EP)
Multispeed (P124 to P131)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC

Table 6.25 - LOCAL/REMOTE Speed Reference Selection

The reference value set by the
P121.

and

keys is contained in parameter

Details of the Electronic Potentiometer (EP) operation in Figure 6.37.
When option 7 (EP) is selected, program P265 or P267=5 and P266 or
P268=5.
When option 8 is selected, program P266 and/or P267 and/or P268 to 7.
When P203=1 (PID), do not use the reference via EP (P221/P222=7).
When P203=1 (PID), the value programmed in P221/P222 becomes the
PID setpoint.
156

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P223 (1) (8)
LOCAL FWD/REV
Selection

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[2]
-

Description / Notes
P223
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Key
Key

LOCAL FWD/REV Selection
Always Forward
Always Reverse
of the Keypad (Default Forward)
of the Keypad (Reverse Default)
Digital Input DI2 (P264 = 0)
Serial (FWD Default)
Reserved Serial (REV Default)
Fieldbus (FWD Default)
Fieldbus (REV Default)
Polarity AI4
PLC (FWD)
PLC (REV)

Table 6.26 - LOCAL FWD/REV Selection

P224 (1)
LOCAL START/STOP
Selection

0 to 4
[0]
-

P224
0
1
2
3
4

LOCAL START/STOP Selection
and
of the Keypad.
Digital Input (DIx)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.27 - LOCAL START/STOP Selection

Note: If the Digital Inputs are programmed for Forward Run/Reverse
Run, the
and
keys will remain disabled independently of the
value programmed at P224.

P225 (1) (8)
LOCAL JOG
Selection

0 to 5
[1]
-

P225
0
1
2
3
4
5

LOCAL JOG Selection
Disable
Key
of the Keypad
Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.28 - LOCAL JOG Selection

The JOG speed reference is given by parameter P122.

157

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(1) (8)

P226
REMOTE FWD/REV
Selection

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 11
[4]
-

Description / Notes
P226
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Key
Key

REMOTE FWD/REV Selection
Always Forward
Always Reverse
of the Keypad (Default Forward )
of the Keypad (Default Reverse )
Digital Input DI2 (P264 = 0)
Serial (FWD Default)
Serial (REV Default)
Fieldbus (FWD Default)
Fieldbus (REV Default)
Polarity AI4
PLC (FWD)
PLC (REV)

Table 6.29 - REMOTE FWD/REV Selection

P227 (1)
REMOTE START/
STOP Selection

0 to 4
[1]
-

P227
0
1
2
3
4

REMOTE START/STOP Selection
and
of the Keypad.
Digital Input (DIx)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.30 - REMOTE START/STOP Selection

Note: If the Digital Inputs are programmed for Forward Run/Reverse
Run, the
and
keys will remain disabled independently of
the value programmed at P227.

P228 (1) (8)
REMOTE JOG
Selection

0 to 5
[2]
-

P228
0
1
2
3
4
5

REMOTE JOG Selection
Disable
Key
of the Keypad
Digital inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270)
Serial
Fieldbus
PLC
Table 6.31 - REMOTE JOG Selection

The JOG speed reference is given by parameter P122.

158

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

LOCAL
REFERENCE
(P221)
FWD/REV
(P223)
START/STOP
(P224)
JOG
(P225)

LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection (P220)
LOCAL
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
REFERENCE

REMOTE
REFERENCE
LOCAL
COMMANDS
REMOTE
REFERENCE
(P222)

COMMANDS

COMMANDS

REMOTE
COMMANDS

FWD/REV
(P226)
START/STOP
(P227)
JOG
(P228)

Figure 6.25 - Block diagram of the Local / Remote mode

159

160

Commands
and
Reference
Refer to
Figure 6.25.

Start/Stop

P244

P133
P134
Reference
Limits

P134
P133

P134 = Max.Ref.
P133 = Min. Ref.

FWD/REV

JOG

P001
Reference

OFFSET:
P163 - LOC
P164 - REM

AI3

AI2

P240

P242

P238

P122

JOG

-1

P020

P019

(*) Valid only for P202 = 3 and 4.

Figure 6.26 - Block diagram of the Speed Reference
Digital Input (DIx)
Commands

P123

P122

P100-ACCEL
P101-DECEL

Accel/Decel. Ramp

Accel/Decel. Ramp 2

2a

P102-ACCEL
P103-DECEL

JOG- (*)

JOG+ (*)

Fast
Stop

+

-

+

P241 = 1- After Ramp Ref. (P241 = N* w/o ramp) (*)

+

P237 = 1- After Ramp Ref. (P237 = N* w/o ramp) (*)

Total
Reference

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

n2

Sensorless

w/ encoder
n1
P202

Total
Reference

-

nEC

+

Ride-Through=OFF

Gp = P175
GI = P176

Flux Regulator

See fig. 6.44

RideThrough=ON

Sensorless

-

-

P202
IMR
Ys

Encoder

IMR*/Ys*

Gd = P166

Gp = P161
GI = P162

P178=Nominal Flux
P180 = nFW

n

P177

P179

P169=Max. FWDT
P170=Max. REVT

Id*

Iq*

Id

-

Iq

-

AI2, AI3/P237,P241 = 2 -Max. Torque Current

(Speed/Torque Control
see table 6.40)

Command via DIx

Speed Regulator

Gp = 1.00
GI = 0.00

n1

USd*

USq*

P165

12ms

n2
Estimated speed

Ys
Stator Flux

Tr

Excitation Cur.
Id

Torque Current
Iq

Gp = P167
GI = P168

IMR
Magnetizing
Current

Id

Iq

Current Regulator

Id

n
P405 = PPR

F

TRANSF.

Iq

Us

Is

PPR

Encoder

TRANSF.

P297 = Switch Fq.

PWM

PWM

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.27 a) - Block Diagram of the Vector Control

161

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P202 =Type of Control
P202 = 0 ou 1= V/F
V
PWM
P136
V
Total
Reference

PWM

Speed
P202 = 2 = Adjustable V/F
V
F

P142
P143
P144
P146 P145
Speed
V
Reference
V
Automatic
Torque BOOST
Speed

Slip
Compensation

V
P137

TRANSF.

P138

Speed

Is = Output Current

Active
Current
P139

P169 = Max. Output Current

ON
Start/Stop
OFF
P169

Is

Figure 6.27 b) - Block Diagram of the V/F control (Scalar)

162

6.25)

(See Figure

Reference

P151

P100-104

Hold

P151

Ud

t

Ud

P133

P134

P403

P404, P399,
P401, P409,
P402, P403
Ud

DC Voltage
Regulator

P202=5 (VVW Control)

Filter

+ f
slip

t

Estimated
Torque

TL/TR, SR

Calculate fslip

+

m

fo
la
lo

fo

fo

la

lo

Flux Control

P400, P403,
P401, P407,
P409, P178

m*

m

P295

fo

m

lo

Calculate lo

P295

la

Calculate la

Output
compensation
voltage

Ud

iv , iw

iv , iw

Sextant
angle

Space Vector
Modulation
PWM

FWD/
REV

PWM

iv , iw

MI
3∅

Ud

lo

Rede

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.27 c) - Block diagram of the VVW Control

163

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(1)

P232
Stop Mode
Selection

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes

0 to 2
[0]
-

P232

Stop Mode

0
1
2

Ramp to Stop
Coast to Stop
Fast Stop

Table 6.32 - Stop Mode Selection

Parameter P232 is valid only for the following commands:
1) The key

of the keypad;

2) Start/Stop function with 2-wire control (through DI1=1)
3) Start/Stop function with 3-wire control (refer to parameters from P265
to P270 for a complete description about the function 14).
In the V/F mode the option 2 (Fast Stop) is not available.

NOTE!
When the “Coast to Stop” option is selected, only start the motor if
it is completely stopped.

P233
Analog Inputs
Dead Zone

This parameter is active only for the analog inputs (AIx) programmed as
speed reference.

0,1
[0]
-

When set to 1 enables the Dead Zone for the Analog Inputs.
If P233 = 0 (Off) the “zero” signal at the Analog Inputs (0V/0mA/ 4mA or
10V/20mA) is directly related to the minimum speed programmed at
P133. Refer to Figure 6.28 a).
If P233 = 1 (On) the Analog Inputs have a “dead zone”, and the speed
reference remains at its minimum value (defined by P133) until the input
signal reaches a level proportional to the minimum speed. Refer to Figure
6.28 b).
a) Inactive Dead Zone P233=0
Reference
P134

P133

0

Alx Signal
0 ...................................... 10V
0 .................................... 20mA
4mA ................................. 20mA
10V ..................................... 0
20mA .................................. 0
20mA ............................... 4mA

164

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
b) Active Dead Zone P233=1
Reference
P134

P133

Alx Signal

0
0 ...................................... 10V
0 .................................... 20mA
4mA ................................. 20mA
10V ..................................... 0
20mA .................................. 0
20mA ............................... 4mA

Figure 6.28 a) b) - Actuation of the Analog Inputs

When the Analog Input AI4 is programmed for -10V to +10V (P246 = 4),
the curves shown in Figure 6.27 are still valid, with the difference that
with AI4 negative the direction of rotation is reversed.
P234
Analog Input AI1 Gain

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

AI1' - P018
AI3' - P020
P234, P242, P245

AIx
P235
P243
P246

AI4' - P021

GAIN

+
+

OFFSET (P236, 244, P247)
Figure 6.29 - Block diagram of the Analog Input AI1, AI3, AI4

The internal values AI1', AI3', and AI4' are the result of the following
equation:
AIx' = (AIx + OFFSET x 10 V) x Gain
100
For example : AI1 = 5V, Offset = -70% and Gain = 1.00:

AI1' = (5 + (-70) x 10 V) x 1 = -2 V
100
AI1' = -2V, means that the motor will run in reverse with a reference
equal to 2V.
165

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(1)

P235
Analog Input AI1
Signal

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 3
[0]
-

Description / Notes
P235
0
1
2
3

Input AI1 Signal
(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA

Switch S1.2
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON

Table 6.33 - AI1 signal selection

When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI1, set the S1.2
switch on the control board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to
have maximum speed with minimum reference.

P236
Analog Input AI1
Offset

-100 to +100
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

P237 (1)(8)
Analog Input AI2
Function

0 to 3
[0]
-

Refer to P234.

P237
0
1
2
3
4

Input AI2 Function
P221/P222
After Ramp Reference
Maximum Torque Current
PID Process Variable
Maximum Torque Current (AI2+AI1)
Table 6.34 - AI2 function

When the option 0 (P221/P222) is selected, AI2 may supply the speed
reference (if set to do so at P221/P222), which is subject to the speed
limits (P133, P134) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps (P100 to
P103). Refer to Figure 6.25.
The option 1 (After Ramp Reference, valid only for P202=3 and 4) is
generally used as an additional reference signal, for instance, in
applications with a dancer. Refer to Figure 6.25. It bypasses the accel/
decel ramp.
The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) permits controlling the torque
current limit P169, P170 through the analog input AI2. In this case P169,
P170 will be Read only parameters. See figure 6.26a). For this type of
control, check if P160 should be equal to one or zero.
When AI2 is set to maximum (P019 = 100%), the torque limit will be
also maximum - P169/P170 = 180%.
The option 3 (PID Process Variable) defines the input AI2 as feedback
signal of the PID regulator (for instance: presure, temperature sensor,
etc.), if P524=0.
When AI2 is set to its maximum value (P019=100%), the PID process
variable will be on its maximum value (100%).

166

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Option 4 – Maximum Torque Current (AI2+AI1):
When parameters P237=2 and P241=0, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237=4 and P241=0, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
When parameters P237=2 and P241=2, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237=4 and P241=2, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
When parameters P237=4 and P241=4, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
Note: The range of the sum between AI1 and AI2 may vary from 0 to
180%. If the sum result is negative, then the value will be set to zero.

P238
Analog Input AI2
Gain

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

AI2' - P019
P238

AI2

Gain
P239
Filter (P248)
OFFSET
(P240)
Figure 6.29 - Block diagram of the Analog Input AI2

The internal value of AI2' is the result of the following equation:
OFFSET
x 10V) x Gain
AI2' = (AI2 +
100
For example: AI2 = 5V, OFFSET = -70% and Gain = 1.00:
AI2' = (5 +

(-70)
x 10V) x 1 = -2V
100

AI2' = -2V, means that the motor runs in reverse direction reference
equal to 2V
P239 (1)
Analog Input AI2
Signal

0 to 3
[0]
-

P239
0
1
2
3

Input AI2 Signal
(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA

Switch S1.1
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON

Table 6.35 - AI2 signal selection

167

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI2, set the switch
S1.1 on the control board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to
have maximum speed with minimum reference.

P240
Analog Input AI2
Offset
P241 (1)
Analog Input AI3
Function
(Isolated analog
input on the optional
board EBB.
Refer to Chapter 8)

-100 to +100
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

0 to 3
[0]
-

Refer to P234.

P241
0
1
2
3
4

Input AI3 Function
P221/P222
After Ramp Reference
Maximum Torque Current
PID Process Variable
Maximum Torque Current (AI3+AI2)
Table 6.36 - AI3 function

When the option 0 (P221/P222) is selected, AI3 may supply the speed
reference (if set to do so at P221/P222), which is subject to the speed
limits (P133, P134) and the acceleration/deceleration ramps (P100 to
P103). Refer to Figure 6.25.
The option 1 (After Ramp Reference, valid only for P202=3 and 4) is
generally used as an additional reference signal, for instance, in
applications with a dancer. Refer to Figure 6.25. It bypasses the accel/
decel ramp.
The option 2 (Maximum Torque Current) permits controlling the torque
current limit P169, P170 through the analog input AI3. In this case P169,
P170 will be Read only parameters. See figure 6.26 a). For this type of
control, check if P160 should be equal to one or zero.
When AI3 is set to maximum (P020 = 100%), the torque limit will be
also maximum - P169/P170 = 180%.
The option 3 (Process Variable) defines the input AI3 as feedback signal
of the PID Regulator (for instance: pressure, temperature sensor, etc.), if
P524=1.
When AI3 is set to its maximum value (P020=100%), the PID process
variable will be on its maximum value (100%).

Option 4 - Maximum Torque Current (AI3+AI2):
When parameters P237=0 and P241=2, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI3.
When parameters P237=0 and P241=4, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI2 and
AI3.

168

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
When parameters P237=2 and P241=2, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the signal at the Analog Input AI2.
When parameters P237=2 and P241=4, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI2 and
AI3.
When parameters P237=4 and P241=4, the torque current limit (P169
and P170) is given by the sum of the signals at Analog Inputs AI1 and
AI2.
Note: The range of the sum between AI2 and AI3 may vary from 0 to
180%. If the sum result is negative, then the value will be set to zero.

P242
Analog Input AI3
Gain

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

P243 (1)
Analog Input AI3
Signal

0 to 3
[0]
-

Refer to P234.

P243
0
1
2
3

Input AI3 Signal
(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20) mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0) mA
(20 to 4) mA

Switch S 4.1 (EBB)
Off/On
On
Off/On
On

Table 6.37 - AI3 signal selection

When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI3, set the S4.1
switch on the EBB board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to
have maximum speed with minimum reference.
P244
Analog Input AI3
Offset

P245
Analog Input AI4
Gain (14 bit Analog
Input of the optional
board EBA. Refer to
Chapter 8)
P246 (1)
Analog Input AI4
Signal

-100 to +100
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

0 to 4
[0]
-

Refer to P234.

Refer to P234.

P243
0
1
2
3
4

Input AI4 Signal
(0 to 10)V / (0 to 20)mA
(4 to 20) mA
(10 to 0)V / (20 to 0)mA
(20 to 4)mA
(-10 to +10)V

Switch S 2.1 (EBA)
OFF/ON
ON
OFF/ON
ON
OFF

Table 6.38 - AI4 signal selection

169

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
When a current signal is used at the Analog Input AI4, set the switch
S2.1 on the EBA board to “ON”.
Options 2 and 3 provide an inverse reference with which is possible to
have maximum speed with minimum reference.

P247
Analog Input AI4
Offset

P248
Filter Input AI2

P251
Analog Output AO1
Function

-100 to +100
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

0.0 to 16.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s
0 to 13
[2]
-

Refer to P234.

It sets the time constant of the RC Filter of the Input AI2 (see Figure
6.29)

Check possible options on Table 6.39.
With factory default values (P251 = 2 and P252 = 1.000) AO1 = 10V
when the motor speed is equal to the maximum speed defined at P134.
The AO1 output can be physically located on the control board CC9 (as
a 0V to 10V output) or on the option board EBB (AO1', as a (0 to 20)mA/
(4 to 20)mA output). Refer to Chapter 8.

P252
Analog Output AO1
Gain

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

P253
Analog Output AO2
Function

0 to 13
[5]
-

Adjusts the gain of the AO1 analog output. For P252=1.000 the AO1
output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.

Check possible options on Table 6.39.
With factory default values (P253 = 5 and P254 = 1.000) AO2 = 10V
when the output current is equal to 1.5 x P295.
The AO2 output can be physically located on the control board CC9 (as
a 0V to 10V output) or on the option board EBB [(AO2' , as a (0 to
20)mA/ (4 to 20)mA output)]. Refer to Chapter 8.

P254
Analog Output AO2
Gain

P255
Analog Output AO3
Function (Located on
the Optional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA)

170

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

0 to 62
[2]
-

Adjusts the gain of the AO2 analog output. For P254=1.000 the AO2
output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.

Check possible options on Table 6.39.
With factory default values (P255 = 2 and P256 = 1.000) AO3 = 10V
when the motor speed is equal to maximum speed defined at P134.
For more information about the Analog Output AO3, refer to Chapter 8.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P256
Analog Output AO3
Gain

P257
Analog Output AO4
Function (Located on
the Optional I/O
Expansion Board
EBA)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

0 to 62
[5]
-

Description / Notes
Adjusts the gain of the AO3 analog output for P256=1.000 the AO3
output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.

Check possible options on Table 6.39.
For factory default values (P257 = 5 and P258 = 1.000) AO4 = 10V when
the output current is equal to 1.5 x P295.
For more information about the AO4 output, refer to Chapter 8.
Functions
Speed Reference

P251
(AO1)
0

P253
(AO2)
0

P255
(AO3)
0

P257
(AO4)
0

Total Reference

1

1

1

1

Real Speed

2

2

2

2

Torque Reference
[P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector)]

3

3

3

3

Torque Current
[P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector)]

4

4

4

4

Output Current
(with filter 0.3s)

5

5

5

5

PID Process Variable

6

6

6

6

Active Current
[P202 = 0,1, 2 or 5]
(with filter 0.1s)

7

7

7

7

Power (kW)
(with filter 0.5s)

8

8

8

8

PID Setpoint

9

9

9

9

Torque Positive [P202=3
or 4 (vector)]

10

10

10

10

11
12

11
12

11
12

11
12

13

13

-

-

-

-

14 to 62

14 to 62

Motor Torque
PLC
Dead zone for speed
indication
WEG Use

Table 6.39 - Functions of the Analog Outputs

P258
Analog Output AO4
Gain

0.000 to 9.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

Adjusts the gain of the AO4 analog output for P258=1.000 the AO4
output value is set according to the description after figure 6.31.

171

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
P251
P253
P255
P257
Speed Reference
Total Reference
Real Speed
Torque Reference
Torque Current

P252, P254, P256, P258

Output Current

Gain

AOX

PID Process Variable
Active Current
Power
PID Setpoint
Positive Torque Current
Motor Torque
Dead zone for speed
indication
PLC
Figure 6.31 - Block diagram of the Analog Outputs

Scale of the Analog Outputs indications:
Full scale = 10V: for outputs AO1 and AO2 located on the control board
CC9 and AO3 and AO4 located on the optional board EBA;
Full scale = 20mA for the outputs AO1I and AO2I located on the optional
board EBB.
Speed Reference (P001): Full scale = P134
Total Reference: Full scale = P134
Motor Speed (P002): Full scale = P134
Torque Reference: Full scale = 2.0 x P295
Torque Current: Full scale = 2.0 x P295
Output Current: Full scale = 1.5 x P295
PID Process Variable: full scale = 1.0 x P528
Active Current: Full scale = 1.5 x P295
Power: Full scale = 1.5 x 3.P295 x P296
PID Setpoint: full scale = 1.0 x P528
Motor Torque: full scale = 2.0 x P295
Dead Zone for Speed Indication: Full scale = P134
P259
Dead zone for
speed indication

172

0 a P134
[ 1000 ]
1 rpm

While the speed indication in P002 is below of the value set at P259
(P002Nx) ]
-

P280 (1)
Relay Output RL3
Function

0 to 40
[ 1 (N*>Nx) ]
-

Description / Notes
Check possible options on Table 6.40 and details about each function’s
operation on the charts in the figure 6.36.
The status of the Digital Outputs can be monitored at Parameter P013.
The Digital Output will be activated when the condition stated by it's
function becomes true. In case of a Transistor Output, 24Vdc will be
applied to the load connected to it. For a Relay Output, the relay will
pick up when the output is activated.
Parameter
P275
P276
P277
(Output)
Function
(DO1)
(DO2)
(RL1)
Not Used
0, 27 and 28 0, 27 and 28 0 and 28
N* > Nx
1
1
1
N > Nx
2
2
2
N < Ny
3
3
3
N = N*
4
4
4
Zero Speed
5
5
5
Is > Ix
6
6
6
Is < Ix
7
7
7
Torque > Tx
8
8
8
Torque < Tx
9
9
9
Remote
10
10
10
run
11
11
11
ready
12
12
12
No Fault
13
13
13
No E00
14
14
14
No E01+E02+E03
15
15
15
No E04
16
16
16
No E05
17
17
17
4 to 20 mA OK
18
18
18
Fieldbus
19
19
19
FWD
20
20
20
Proc. Var. >VPx
21
21
21
Proc. Var. >VPy
22
22
22
Ride-Through
23
23
23
Pre-charge OK
24
24
24
With error
25
25
25
Enabled Hours > Hx
26
26
26
PLC
27
Timer
N > Nx and Nt > Nx
29
29
29
Brake (Vel) - Real Speed
30
30
30
Brake (Ref) 31
31
31
Total Reference
Overweight
32
32
32
Slack Cable
33
33
33
Torque Polarity +/34
34
34
Torque Polarity -/+
35
35
35
F > Fx _ 1
36
36
36
F > Fx _ 2
37
37
37
Set point =
38
38
38
Process Variable
No E32
39
39
39
Ready 2
40
40
40

P279
(RL2)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

P280
(RL3)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

31

31

32
33
34
35
36
37

32
33
34
35
36
37

38

38

39
40

39
40

Table 6.40 - Functions of the Digital Outputs and Relay Outputs

181

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Additional Notes about the Digital Output Functions:
- Remote: Inverter is operating in Remote mode.
- Run: Inverter is enabled (the IGBTs are switching, the motor may be at
any speed, including zero).
- Ready: Inverter neither is in fault non in undervoltage condition.
- No Fault: Inverter is not in any fault condition.
- With Error means that the inverter is disabled due to some error.
- No E00: Inverter is not in an E00 fault condition.
- No E01+E02+E03: Inverter is not in an E01 or E02 or E03 fault condition.
- No E04: Inverter is not in an E04 fault condition.
- No E05: Inverter is not in an E05 fault condition.
- 4 to 20mA OK: If applicable, the 4 to 20 mA current reference is present.
- Zero Speed: Motor speed is lower than the value set at P291 (Zero
Speed Zone)
- Not Used: Digital Output remains inactive.
- Forward: Motor is running forward.
- Torque > Tx and Torque < Tx: Valid only for P202 = 3 or 4 (Vector
Control).
Torque corresponds to motor Torque as indicated in Parameter P009.
- Ride-Through: means that the inverter is executing the Ride-Through
function.
- Pre-charge OK: means that the DC-Link voltage is higher than the precharge voltage level.
- Fieldbus: allows changing the state of the digital outputs (P275 to
P280) from the Fieldbus network. Refer to item 8.12.5.2.
- N > Nx and Nt > Nx: (this option works only for P202=4 - Vector with
Encoder Control) means that both conditions must be satisfied in order
that DOx = Saturated Transistor and/or RLx= relay picked up. The Digital
Outputs will come back to its OFF state, that is, DOx = Cut-off Transistor
and/or RLx = released relay, when only N>Nx condition is not satisfied
(that is, independent of Nt>Nx condition).
- Timer: This times enable and disable the relays 2 and 3 (refer P283 to
P286).
- Brake (Vel) – Real Speed
It uses the Real Speed in the comparison of N > Nx to activate the brake.
Note: Nx is programmable at P288.
- Brake (Ref) – Total Reference
If P202 = 3 (Sensorless Control) – It uses the Total Reference in the
comparison of N* > Nx to activate the brake.

182

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
If P202 ≠ 3 (V/F, VVW or Vector with Encoder control), the comparison
of N > Nx to activate the brake will always use the Real Speed, regardless
of the selection (“31=Brake (Ref)” or “30=Brake (Vel))”.

NOTE!
Refer to figures 6.39 q), r) and s)

Preliminary settings:
Nx (P288) = 7% to 10% of the motor speed (sensorless control), 2% to
5% of the speed (vector with encoder control)
Ix (P290) = 20% to 130% of P401
P355 = 0 seconds
P354 = 1.5 x time to activate the brake
P356 = 0.85 x time to release the brake
P353 = 0.2 seconds

NOTE!
These preliminary settings are suggestive and may be changed
according to the application.

- Overweight - Situation where the lifted load weight is greater than the
maximum allowed.
When the CFW09 is powered up, the output set to the option “32 =
Overweight” is activated. In order to deactivate the output, i.e., detect
the overweight condition, the following conditions shall be satisfied:
- P361 = 1 (Load Detection = On);
- Parameters P362, P363 and P367 properly set;
- P367 (Overweight Level) lower than the output current (P367 < Is)
during the stabilization time.
If P361 = 0 (Load Detection = Off) – the output always remains
activated.

- Slack Cable - Situation where the lifted load weight is lower than the
minimum weight detected by the crane.
When the CFW09 is powered up, the output set to the option “33 =
Slack Cable” is activated. In order to deactivate the output, i.e., detect
the slack cable condition, the following conditions shall be satisfied:
- P361 = 1 (Load Detection = On);
- Parameters P362, P363, P364 and P365 properly set;
- Slack cable condition detected.

183

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes

NOTES!
If the slack cable condition is detected during the stabilization
time, the motor remains at the stabilization speed until receiving
a “Stop” command. However, if this condition is detected outside
of the stabilization time, the output set to this option will be
deactivated and the motor will maintain the same speed.
The only way of disabling the Slack Cable function is stopping the
motor.
To a better understanding refer to figures 6.47 a) and b).
If P361 = 0 (Load Detection = Off) – the output always remains
activated.
- Torque Polarity +/The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque
is positive.
- Torque Polarity -/+
The output programmed to this function will be activated when the torque
is negative.

NOTE!
The outputs that are set to the function “Torque Polarity” have a
hysteresis in its operation that can be configured at parameter P358
(Hysteresis for the Torque Current – Iq). This resource works in the
transition of these outputs at the moment they are activated or
deactivated.

DOx or Rlx = 34 – Torque Polarity +/Status of the contacts at XC1
(NC) RL1 (NO)
(NO) RL2 (NC) RL3 (NO)
21-24
22-24
23-25
25-26
27-28

Torque
Polarity

XC4 Voltage
DO1 (5, 6)
DO2 (7, 6)

Positive
(+)

0V

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Closed

Negative
(-)

+24V

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Open

Table 6.42 a) - Status of the DOx and RLx contacts with the torque
polarity +/- function

DOx or Rlx = 35 – Torque Polarity -/+
Status of the contacts at XC1
(NC) RL1 (NO)
(NO) RL2 (NC)
RL3 (NO)
21-24
22-24
23-25
25-26
27-28

Torque
Polarity

XC4 Voltage
DO1 (5, 6)
DO2 (7, 6)

Positive
(+)

+24V

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Open

Negative
(-)

0V

Open

Closed

Closed

Open

Closed

Table 6.42 b) - Status of the DOx and RLx contacts with the torque
polarity +/- function

184

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes

NOTE!
It is used only with the Master/Slave function to indicate the torque
polarity at the digital or relay outputs.
Description of the Torque Polarity +/- function for the Torque
Master/Slave function
The implementation of this function requires the digital or relay outputs
of the “master” CFW-09 to be set to the options P275=34 (Torque
Polarity +/-) or P275=35 (Torque Polarity -/+).
Therefore, a load resistor (Rc) shall be connected at the digital output
DO1 (XC4:5) or DO2 (XC4:7), as presented in figure 8.1. This output
shall be connected to the digital input DI2 of the “Slave” CFW-09, which
shall be set to the option P264=0 (Direction of Rotation).
In the master CFW-09
(Vector with encoder):

In the slave CFW-09
(Vector with encoder):
P100=P101=0;
P275 or P276=34 or 35; P160=1;
P357= 0.1s
P223=P226=DI2=4;
P358= 2.00%
P264=0
P253=4
P237=2
P234=1.2

Table 6.43 - Minimum required settings for the torque Master/Slave function

For P275 or P276 = 34 or 35
When the torque current of the “master” CFW-09 is positive, the digital
output DO1 or DO2 will be set to zero, which will force the speed
regulator of the “slave” to saturate positively, producing a positive
torque current.
When the torque current of the “master” CFW-09 is negative, the
digital output DO1 or DO2 will be set to 24V, which will force the
speed regulator of the “slave” to saturate negatively, producing a
negative torque current.

185

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Master

Slave

EBA.01
COM 6

XC1
10

DGND 4
CFW-09
24Vdc 8

(Torque +/-)

CFW-09

EBA.01

XC4:
DO1

R 500
3W

XC1:
17, 18
AO1
XC1:
19,20
AO2

M

XC1
DI2

FWD/REV

XC1
12, 13
AI1

Speed
Reference

XC1
15, 16
AI2

Max. Torque
Current
EBA.01

M

Figure 6.38 - Diagram for the Torque Master/Slave function

- F > Fx _ 1: This function activates the relay and/or transistorized outputs
set to this option when the output frequency value (F) is greater than the
value set at P369 (Fx) plus the hysteresis value set at P370. When F <
Fx - P370, the outputs set to this option are deactivated (refer to figure
6.39 t).
- F > Fx _ 2: With this option the hysteresis for the acceleration is
disabled, therefore, this function activates the relay and/or transistorized
outputs set to this option when the output frequency value (F) is greater
than the value set at P369 (Fx). When F < Fx - P370, the outputs set to
this option are deactivated (refer to figure 6.39 v).
- Set point = Process Variable. This function activates the digital or
relay output when the Set point value equals the Process Variable value
(refer to figure 6.39 v).
- No E32 - It indicates that the drive is disabled due to an E32 error.
- Ready 2 - Indicates that the motor is disabled (motor stopped) without
error and without undervoltage.
Symbols used in the Digital Output functions:
N = P002 (Motor speed)
N* = P001 (Frequency Reference)
Nx = P288 (Speed Nx) - User selected speed reference point.
Ny = P289 (Speed Ny) - User selected speed reference point.

186

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Ix = P290 (Current Ix) - User selected current reference point.
Is = P003 (Motor Current)
Torque = P009 (Motor Torque)
Tx = P293 (Torque Tx) - User selected torque reference point.
Vpx = P533 (Process Variable x) - User selected reference point.
Vpy = P534 (Process Variable y) - User selected reference point.
Nt = Total Reference (See Figure 6.26) after all scalings, offsets,
additions, etc.
Hx = P294 (Hours Hx)
PLC = See PLC board manual
Fx = P370 (Frequency Fx) – Frequency reference defined by the user.

P283
Time for RL2 ON

0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s

P284
Time for RL2 OFF

0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s

P285
Time for RL3 ON

0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s

P286
Time for RL3 OFF

0.0 to 300
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s

Used in the function as Relay Output: Timer of the relay 2 or 3.
When the timing function of the relays 2 and 3 is programmed at any
DIx, and when the transition is effected from 0V to 24V, the relay will be
enabled according to the time set at P283 (RL2) or P285 (RL3). When
the transition from 24V to 0V occurs, the programmed relay will be
disabled according to the time set at P284(RL2) or P286(RL3).
After the DIx transition, to enable or disable the programmed relay, it is
required that the DIx remains in on/off status during the time set at
parameters P283/P285 and P284/P286. Otherwise the relay will be reset.
See figure 6.34.
Note: For this function, program P279 and/or P280 = 28 (Timer).

187

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

b) N < Ny

a) N > Nx
N

Motor Speed

N

Nx (P288)

P287
P287

Time

Ny (P289)

P287
P287

Time

ON
Relay/Transistor
Output

Relay/ Transistor
Output ON

OFF

ON
OFF

c) N = N*

d) Is > Ix
Is
N

N*

Ix (P290)
Time
Time
ON

ON
Relay/Transistor
OFF
Output

Relay/Transistor
Output OFF

OFF

e) N* > Nx

OFF

f) Is < Ix
Is

N*
Nx (P288)

Ix (P290)
Time

Time
Relay/
Transistor
Output
OFF

ON

ON

Relay/
Transistor
Output

OFF

g) Torque > Tx

ON

OFF

h) Torque  Nx

j) N > Nx and Nt > Nx
6553 h
N

Nt

N
Nx (P288)

Hx (P294)

Time
Time
Hours
Enable
(P043)

0

ON
Relay/Transistor
OFF

Relay/
Transistor

OFF

ON
OFF

OFF

l) 4 to 20mA OK

k) No External Fault
Ready/
Run
State

Fault (Exy)
State

2mA

Ref

c/ EOX
Time

Relay/
Transistor
Output ON

Time

Relay/Transistor
Output
OFF
ON

ON

OFF

n) Process Var. > VPx

m) N = 0

P291

Zero Speed Zone

VPx (P533)

Time

Process Var.
ON
Relay/
Transistor
OFF
Relay/Transistor
Output
OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

o) Pre charge Ok

p) Process Var. < VPy

Link CC
Pre-Charge
Level

VPy (P534)

Process Var.

Time
ON
Relay/Transistor
Output
ON

Relay/
Transistor
OFF

Time

ON

OFF

ON

Figure 6.39 i) to p) - Details about the operation of the Digital and Relay Output Functions (cont.)

189

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

q) Logic for the Brake Activation when DOx or Relay = 30 or 31

CFW-09
Start/Stop

N > Nx

Is > Ix
V/F Control
Activate
the brake

Auxiliary

Is > Imr

Release
the brake

No Error

Run

Auxiliary

NOTES!
1) To release the brake (transition from NC to NO) both comparisons are performed Is > Ix, Is > Imr. At the same
time, the drive shall receive a Start/Stop command in the “Run” state and with no error.
2) To activate the brake (transition from NO to NC) the comparison N > Nx is performed.
3) If P202=4 (Vector with Encoder), the brake is not activated when the speed crosses zero at the reversing of the
direction of rotation.
Figure 6.39 q) - Details about the operation of the Digital and Relay Output Functions (cont.)

190

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

r) Operation of parameters P353 to P356 with Ix > Imr.
Current

Ix

Imag
Reset Pulse for the
integrator of the
speed regulator
Start/Stop
P354
Accepted only
after P355
P356
P356
RLx or DOx Output
(brake activation)

P353

P355

Speed
Reference
Nx

Real Brake

Real Speed
Nx

Note: The Start/Stop function in the figure above is valid only for commands from the DI1 (Digital Input #1) set to the option
“1=Start/Stop”.

Figure 6.39 r) - Details about the operation of the Digital and Relay Output Functions (cont.)

191

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

s) Operation of parameters P353 to P356 with Ix < Imr.

Current

Magnetized
Motor

Imag

Ix
Reset Pulse for the
integrator of the
speed regulator

Start/Stop
P354

Accepted only
after P355
P356

P356

RLx or DOx Output
(brake activation)

P353

P355

Speed Reference
Nx

Real Brake

Real Speed
Nx

Figure 6.39 s) - Details about the operation of the Digital and Relay Output Functions (cont.)

192

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

t) F > Fx _ 1

u) F > Fx _ 2
P369 + P370
Fx (P369)
P369 - P370

ON

Relay
Transistor OFF

Fx (P369)
P369 - P370

N

ON

Relay
Transistor OFF

OFF

N

OFF

v) Set point = Process Variable
P040

P537
P525
P537

ON
Relay/
Transistor OFF

OFF

Figure 6.39 t) to v) - Details about the operation of the Digital and Relay Output Functions (cont.)

193

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P287
Hysteresis for Nx/Ny

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 5%
[ 1.0 ]
0.1

P288 (2) (11)
Nx Speed

0 to P134
[ 120 (100) ] (11)
1rpm

P289 (2) (11)
Ny Speed

0 to P134
[ 1800 (1500) ] (11)
1rpm

P290 (7)
Ix Current

0.0 to 2.0 x P295
[ 1.0 x P295 ]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

Description / Notes
Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
N > Nx and N < Ny.

Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
N* > Nx, N > Nx and N < Ny.

Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions:
Is > Ix and Is < Ix.

P291
Zero Speed Zone

1 to 100
[1]
1%

Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function Zero Speed and the
Zero Speed Disable (Refer to P211 and P212).

P292
N=N* Band
(At Speed Band)

1 to 100
[1]
1%

Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs function N = N* (At Speed).

P293
Tx Torque

0 to 200
[ 100 ]
1%

Used by the Digital and Relay Outputs functions Torque > Tx and
Torque < Tx. In this output mode, the motor torque indicated in
parameter P009 is compared with the value programmed in P293.
The setting is expressed in % of the motor rated current (P401=100%)

P294
Hours Hx

194

0 to 6553h
[ 4320 ]
1.0

Used in the functions of the digital outputs Hours Enabled higher than
Hx.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P295 (1)
Inverter Rated
Current

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 81
[ According to the
CFW-09 rated
current for CT
application]
-

Description / Notes
Even if some models withstand a higher current for VT applications, the
setting of P295 shall be kept in accordance with the drive rated current
(CT).
Do not modify the value of P295 for VT applications.
220-230V Models
IN
P295
Size
6A
3
7A
4
1
10A
6
13A
7
16A
8
2
24A
9
28A
10
45A
13
3
54A
14
4
70A
16
5
86A
17
105A
18
6
130A
19

500-600V Models
IN
P295
Size
2,9A
39
4,2A
40
7A
4
2
10A
6
12A
41
14A
42
22A
43
4
27A
44
32A
45
44A
46
53A
47
7
63A
48
79A
49
above
600A
25
500HP
652A
72
794A
73
897A
76
978A
78
1191A
79
1345A
81
660-690V Models
IN
P295
Size
100A
50
8E
127A
52
179A
54
225A
56
259A
58
10E
305A
59
340A
61
428A
64
492 A
68
above
500HP
580 A
70
646 A
71
813 A
74
869 A
75
969 A
77
1220A
80

380-480V Models
IN
P295
Size
3,6A
0
4A
1
1
5,5A
2
9A
5
13A
7
2
16A
8
24A
9
30A
11
3
38A
12
4
45A
13
60A
15
5
70A
16
86A
17
6
105A
18
142A
20
7
180A
21
8
211A
55
240A
22
312A
67
9
361A
23
450A
24
10
515A
69
600A
25
above
686A
33
500HP
855A
34
1140A
35
1283A
36
1710A
37
500-690V Models
IN
P295
Size
107A
51
8E
147A
53
211A
55
247A
57
315A
60
10E
343A
62
418A
63
472A
65

Special Models
IN
P295
2A
38
33 A
66
200 A
26
230 A
27
320 A
28
400 A
29
570 A
30
700 A
31
900 A
32

Table 6.44 - Inverter Rated current selection

195

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P296 (1) (11)
Inverter Rated
Voltage
(Rated Input Voltage)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 8
[ 0 for models 220-230V
3 for models 380-480V
6 for models 500-600V
and 500-690V
8 for models 600-690V ]
-

Description / Notes
P296
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Inverter Rated Voltage
220V/230V
380V
400V/415V
440V/460V
480V
500V/525V
550V/575V
600V
660V/690V

Table 6.45 - Inverter Rated voltage selection

ATTENTION!
Set P296 according to the rated AC line voltage! Do not set
according to short term peak values.
For CFW-09 models ≥ 86A/380-480V, ≥ 44A/500-600V and 500690V models, also adjust the voltage selection jumper (Refer
to Section 3.2.3).
P297 (1) (2)
Switching Frequency

0 to 3
[ 2 (5.0 kHz) ]
-

P297
0
1
2
3

Switching Frequency
1.25 kHz
2.5 kHz
5.0 kHz
10.0 kHz

Table 6.46 - Switching frequency selection

The rated switching frequency for each model is shown in item 9.1. When
a higher switching frequency is used, it is necessary to derate the output
current as specified in item 9.1 note 3.
Note that the switching frequency must be reduced from 5kHz to 2.5kHz
when the VT rated current is used in the following models: from 54A to
130A/220-230V, from 30A to 142A/380-480V and 63A/500-600V.
Note that the following models have a rated switching frequency of 2.5kHz:
from 180A to 600A/380-480V, 44A and 79A/500-600V, from 107A to 472A/
500-690V and all 660-690V models.
The switching frequency is a compromise between the motor acoustic
noise level and the inverter IGBTs losses. Higher switching frequencies
cause lower motor acoustic noise level, but increase the IGBTs losses,
increasing drive components temperature, thus reducing their useful life.
The predominant frequency on the motor is twice the switching frequency
programmed at P297.
P297 = 5.0 kHz results in an audible motor noise corresponding to
10.0kHz. This is due to the PWM technique used.
A reduction of the switching frequency also:
- Helps reducing instability and resonance problems that may occur in
certain application conditions.- Reduces the leakage currents to ground,
which may avoid nuisance E11 (Output Ground Fault).

196

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
The option 1.25kHz is not valid for the Vector Control (P202=3 or 4).
The option 10kHz is not valid for the Sensorless Vector Control (P202=3)
and for the models with supply voltage between 500V and 690V (2.9A to
79A/500-600V, 107A to 472A/500-690V and 100A to 428A/660-690V).

P300
DC Braking Time
This parameter is
shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0,1, 2, 3 or 5

0.0 to 15.0
[ 0.0 ]
0.1s

The DC braking feature provides a motor fast stop through the injection of
DC current.
This parameter sets the DC Braking Time when the drive is operating in
the V/F, VVW or Sensorless Vector control modes.
Control Mode
V/Hz
VVW
Vector Sensorless

DC Braking at Start
P302 and P371
P371 and P372

DC Braking at Stop
P300, P301 and P302
P300, P301 and P302
P300, P301 and P372

Table 6.47 - Parameters related to the DC Braking

Figure 6.40 shows the operation of the DC Braking with a ramp to stop
(stop command). Refer to P301:
a) V/F Control
Motor
Speed
P300
P301
Time
Dead
Time
+24V
Start/ Stop - DIx
Open

b) VVW and Sensorless Control
Motor
Speed

P300
P301
Time

+24V
Start/ Stop - DIx
Open

Figure 6.40 a) b) - DC Braking operation with a Ramp to Stop

197

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Figure 6.41 shows the operation of the DC Braking with a coast to stop
(general disable command).
This condition is valid only for the V/F control.

P300
Motor
Speed

Time

Dead
Time

+24V
General/Enable - DIx

Open

Figure 6.41 - DC braking operation with a general disable
command in the V/F control

For the V/F control, there is a “Dead Time” (motor runs freely) before the
DC braking starts. This time is required in order to demagnetize the
motor and it is a function of the motor speed.
During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes

.

The DC braking does not work with P202 = 4 (Vector with encoder
control).
If the drive is enabled during the DC braking operation, the braking process
is interrupted and the drive will return to its normal operation.

ATTENTION!
The DC braking may continue working even after the motor has
already stopped. Pay special attention to the motor thermal sizing
for cyclic braking of short time.

198

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P301
DC Braking Starting
Speed

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes

0 to 450
[ 30 ]
1 rpm

This parameter establishes the starting point from where the DC Braking
takes place. See figure 6.40.

0.0 to 10.0
[ 2.0 ]
0.1 %

This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (DC braking torque) applied to the
motor during the braking process.

This parameter is
shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0,1, 2, 3 or 5
P302
DC Braking
Voltage
This parameter is
shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 0,1, 2, 3 or 5

The setting shall be done by gradually increasing the value of P302,
which varies from 0 to 10% of the rated supply voltage, until the desired
braking torque is reached.
This parameter works only for the V/F and VVW control modes. For the
sensorless mode, refer to parameter P372.

P303
Skip Speed 1

P133 to P134
[ 600 ]
1rpm

P304
Skip Speed 2

P133 to P134
[ 900 ]
1rpm

Motor
Speed
P305

P303

P305

0 to 750
[0]
1rpm

2x
P306

P304

P306
Skip Band Range

P133 to P134
[ 1200 ]
1rpm

2 x P306

P303

P305
Skip Speed 3

P304

Speed
Reference

This feature prevents the motor from operating permanently at speeds
where the mechanical system enters into resonance, causing high
vibration or noise levels.
The passage through the skip speed band (2xP306) is made at the
programmed acceleration/deceleration rates.
This Function does not operate properly when two skip speeds are
overlapped.

P308 (1)
Serial Address

1 to 30
[1]
-

Sets the address of the inverter for the serial communication. See item
8.13.

199

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
(1)

P309
Fieldbus

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 6
[0]
-

Description / Notes
Defines the Fieldbus standard to be used (Profibus DP or Device NET)
or the number of variables to be exchanged with the master. See item
8.12.5.
P309
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Fieldbus Options
Inactive
Profibus DP 2 I/O
Profibus DP 4 I/O
Profibus DP 6 I/O
DeviceNet 2 I/O
DeviceNet 4 I/O
DeviceNet 6 I/O

Table 6.48 - Fieldbus Options

It is applicable only for the Profibus-DP kit (optional) or DeviceNet kit
(optional).

P310 (1)
STOP detection in a
Profibus network

0,1
[0]
-

This parameter allows programming the bit #6 of the Fieldbus control
word (refer to item 8.12.5.2 - Variable Written in the Inverter).

P310
0

Function
Off

Bit #6
No function

If bit6 = 0
1

On
If bit6 = 1

CFW09 Action
Executes a General
Disable command,
regardless of the value of
the remaining bits of the
control word.
Executes the commands
that were programmed at
the remaining bits of the
control word.

Table 6.49 - STOP detection in a Profibus network.

If this parameter is set to ON, the bit #6 of the control word shall be kept
in 1 to the drive operation. It will allow the drive to be disabled in case of
STOP in the master of the Fieldbus network, where the control word is
reset (all bits are set to zero).
P312
Type of Serial
Protocol

0 to 9
[0]
-

P312
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Type of Serial Protocol
WBUS Protocol
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 9600 bps, even parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 19200 bps, even parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, no parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, odd parity
Modbus-RTU, 38400 bps, even parity
Table 6.50 - Type of Serial Protocol

It defines the protocol type used for the serial communication.

200

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P313
Disabling with
E28/E29/E30

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 4
[0]
-

Description / Notes
Disabling with E28/E29/E30
Disable via Start/Stop
Disable via General Enable
No Action
Changes to LOCAL 1
Changes to LOCAL 2 - Keeping the
commands and the reference

P313
0
1
2
3
4

Table 6.51 - Disabling with E28/E29/E30

Defines the inverter behavior when the serial communication is inactive
(causing error E28), when physical connection with the master of the
Fieldbus is interrupted (causing error E29) or when the Fieldbus board
is inactive (causing error E30). See item 8.12.5.
For P313 = 4, when the drive detects a failure on the Fieldbus network
and changes from Remote mode to Local mode, the ramp enable
command and the speed reference received through the Fieldbus network
will be maintained in the Local mode if the ramp enable command is
being controlled in the Local mode through the 3-wire Start/Stop control
or through the keypad.

P314 (1)
Time for Serial
Watchdog Action

0.0 to 999.0s
[ 0.0 ]
-

P314

Time for serial
watchdog action

0.0

Disable

0.1 to 999.0

Enable

Table 6.52 - Serial Watchdog Action

If the inverter does not receive any valid serial telegram after the time
programmed at P314 has elapsed, the Fault Message E28 on the HMI
and the inverter will return to the action programmed at P313 - Type of
Disabling by E28/E29/E30.
To enable the inverter to execute this action, the inverter commands
must be programmed to the “Serial” option at the parameters P220 to
P228.

P318
Watchdog detection
for the PLC board

0,1
[1]
-

P318

Function

Description

0

Off

1

On

Disables the activation
of the Watchdog Error
for the PLC board - E71.
Enables the activation
of the Watchdog Error
for the PLC board - E71.

Table 6.53 - Watchdog detection for the PLC board

201

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P320 (1)
Flying Start/RideThrough

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 3
[ 0 (Inactive) ]
-

Description / Notes
The Parameter P320 selects the use of the following functions:
Function

P320
0

Inactive

1

Only Flying Start is active
[valid for P202=0,1, 2 (V/F Control), 3 (sensorless) or 5 (VVW)]

2

Flying Start and Ride-Through are active
[valid for P202=0,1, 2 (V/F Control), 3 (sensorless) or 5 (VVW)]

3

Only Ride-Through is active
Table 6.54 - Flying Start/Ride-Through

P321 (6)
Ud Line Loss Level
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

202

178 V to 282 V
(P296=0)
[252 V]
1V
307 V to 487 V
(P296=1)
[436 V]
1V
324 V to 513 V
(P296=2)
[459 V]
1V
356 V to 564 V
(P296=3)
[505V]
1V
388 V to 615 V
(P296=4)
[550V]
1V
425 V to 674 V
(P296=5)
[602V]
1V
466 V to 737 V
(P296=6)
[660V]
1V
486 V to 770 V
(P296=7)
[689V]
1V
559 V to 885 V
(P296=8)
[792V]
1V

The activation of the Ride-Through function can be visualized at the
outputs DO1, DO2, RL1, RL2 and/or RL3 (P275, P276, P277, P279
and/or P280) provided they are also programmed to “23=Ride-Through”;

NOTE!
When one of the functions, Ride-Through or Flying Start is activated,
the parameter P214 (Line Phase Loss Detection) is automatically
set to 0=Off.

NOTE!
This parameter works together with P321, P322, P323, P325, P326
for Ride-Through in Vector Control, and with P331, P332 for V/F
Control Ride-Through and Flying-Start.

NOTE!
Ud=Vac x 1.35

Ride-Through for Vector Control (P202=3 or 4)
The purpose of the Ride-Through function, in Vector mode (P202 = 3 or
4), is to ensure that the inverter maintains the motor running during the
line loss, not allowing interruption or fault storing. The energy required
for motor running is obtained from the kinetic energy of the motor (inertia)
during its deceleration. As soon as the line is reestablished, the motor
accelerates again to the speed defined by the reference.
After line loss (t0), the DC link voltage (Ud) starts to decrease in a rate
that depends on the motor load condition and may reach the undervoltage
level (t2), if the Ride-Through function is not operating. The time required
for this condition, typical for rated load, situates in a range from 5 to 15 ms;
With Ride-Through function active, the line loss is detected when Ud
voltage becomes lower than the “Ud line loss” value (t1). The inverter
immediately starts a controlled motor deceleration, regenerating the
energy into the DC link and thus maintaining the motor running, where
the Ud voltage is regulated to the “Ud Ride-Through” value.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P322 (6)
Ud Ride-Through
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

P323 (6)
Ud Loss Recover
Level
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
178 V to 282 V
(P296=0)
[245 V]
1V
307 V to 487 V
(P296=1)
[423V]
1V
324 V to 513 V
(P296=2)
[446 V]
1V
356 V to 564 V
(P296=3)
[490 V]
1V
388 V to 615 V
(P296=4)
[535 V]
1V
425 V to 674 V
(P296=5)
[588V]
1V
466 V to 737 V
(P296=6)
[644V]
1V
486 V to 770 V
(P296=7)
[672V]
1V
559 V to 885 V
(P296=8)
[773V]
1V

178 V to 282 V
(P296=0)
[267 V]
1V
307 V to 487 V
(P296=1)
[461 V]
1V
324 V to 513 V
(P296=2)
[486 V]
1V

Description / Notes
If the line loss is not recovered, the motor remains in this condition as
long as possible (depending on the energy equilibrium), until the
undervoltage condition (E02 at t5) occurs. If the line loss is recovered
(t3) before the undervoltage condition, the inverter detects its
reestablishment when the Ud voltage reaches the “Ud Loss Recover”
level (t4). Then the motor is accelerated according to the set ramp,
from the current speed value up to the value defined by the active speed
reference. See figure 6.43.
If the input voltage drops to a value between parameters P322 and P323,
the values of P321, P322 and 323 shall be readjusted.

NOTE!
Cares with Application:
The use of the line reactance or DC choke is mandatory to limit
the inrush current when the network is reestablished.

NOTE!
The function Ride-Trough in Vector Mode for models 107A to 472A/
500-690V and 100A to 428A/660-690V works only up to a maximum
time of 2s. In these models the control power supply is not fed from
the DC link, it is a separate power supply with 2s autonomy.

NOTE!
To activate the ride-though, the line supply must fall to a value lower
than (P321 ÷ 1.35).

Ud

Nominal
Loss Recover (P323)
Line Loss (P321)
Ride-Through (P322)

Undervoltage (75%)

E02

t0 t1

t2

t
(t)

t3 t4 t5

Figure 6.43 - Actuation of the Ride-Through function in Vector Control mode

203

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
356 V to 564 V
(P296=3)
[534 V]
1V
388 V to 615 V
(P296=4)
[583 V]
1V
425 V to 674 V
(P296=5)
[638V]
1V
466 V to 737 V
(P296=6)
[699V]
1V
486 V to 770 V
(P296=7)
[729V]
1V
559 V to 885 V
(P296=8)
[838V]
1V

P325
Ride-Through
Proportional Gain

0.0 to 63.9
[22.8]
0.1

This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)
P326
Ride-Through
Integral Gain
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

204

Description / Notes
t0 - Line loss;
t1 - Line loss detection;
t2 - Trip by Undervoltage (E02 without Ride-Through);
t3 - Line Recover;
t4 - Line Recover detection;
t5 - Trip by Undervoltage (E02 with Ride-Through);

Regulator RT
Ud Ride-Through

Blockdiagram
Figure 6.27 a)
Input
Kp, Ki
Ud

Figure 6.44 - Ride-Through PI Controller

0.000 to 9.999
[0.128]
0.001

Normally the factory setting for P325/P326 is adequate for most
applications.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P331
Voltage Ramp

0.2 to 60.0
[ 2.0 ]
0.1s

P332
Dead Time

0.0 to 10.0
[ 1.0 ]
0.1s

These
parameters ( P331
and P332) are only
displayed when
P202 = 0, 1, 2 or 5
(V/F / VVW Control)

Description / Notes
The Flying-start function allows the drive to start a motor that is running
freely. This function takes the motor from its actual speed to the speed
reference set at the drive.
In order to enable the Flying Start function set P320 = 1 or 2.
If the Flying-Start function is not needed at some moments, a digital
input may be set to disable the Flying-start (set only one of the parameters
between P265 and P270 to 17).
Flying Start for V/F control mode:
To do that it has a voltage ramp (adjusted in P331) and the motor
frequency is fixed and defined by the speed setpoint. The Flying Start
will always work when a start or run command is given, after the time
adjusted in P332 (to allow for the motor demagnetization).
Parameter P331 sets the time required for the output voltage reaching
the rated voltage;

Flying Start (FS) function for the sensorless vector control (P202=3)
The Flying-Start function takes place after the START command. At this
moment, the drive senses the motor speed, and once the motor speed
is found, which may be in the forward or reverse direction, the motor is
accelerated to the speed reference indicated in P001.
Parameters P135, P331 and P332 are not used by the Flying Start
function when P202=3.
Settings:
It is recommended to adjust P151 to the value in table 6.7 and P150 to
1.
Ride-Through for V/F control mode or VVW:
The Ride-Through function for the V/F and VVW control modes works in
a different manner than in the vector control mode. As soon as the line
supply falls to a value lower than the undervoltage (E02) Trip level (see
item 7.1), the IGBT inverter is disabled (no voltage pulses at the motor).
There is no tripping due to undervoltage, and the DC link voltage will
slowly fall until the line supply comes back.
If the line supply takes too long to come back (more than 2s) the inverter
may trip by E02 or E70. If it comes back before, the inverter will start
the motor with a voltage ramp like in the Flying Start function, The voltage
ramp time is defined also in P331. See figures 6.45 a) and b).
The parameter P332, used for the Ride-Through function, sets the
minimum time which the inverter will wait to restart the motor after voltage
re-establishment. This time is computed from the line loss and is required
for the motor demagnetization. Set this time at two times the motor
rotor constant, see table in P412.
The ride-through function allows recovering the drive without E02 trip
(under voltage) during a momentary power supply interruption.
205

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Line Supply Returns

DC Link Voltage
E02 level

P332

Enabled

Output Pulses

Disabled
P331
Output Voltage

0V
Output Speed (P002)

0 rpm
Figure 6.45 a) - Ride-Through actuation (Line returns before time set at P332 elapses) in V/F mode

Line Supply Returns

DC Link Voltage
E02 level

Enabled

Output Pulses

Disabled

Time Ajusted
P332

P332

P331
Output Voltage
0V

Output Speed (P002)
0 rpm
Figure 6.45 b) - Ride-Through actuation (Line returns after time set in P332, but before 2sec for
P332 ≤ 1sec or before 2 x P332 for P332 > 1sec) in V/F mode

206

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.3.1 Parameters for Crane Applications and for Torque Master/Slave Function - P351 to P368

Parameter
(1)

P351
Delay for E33
Speed without control

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 99.9
[ 99.9 ]
9

If the difference between N (Real Speed) and N* (Speed Reference)
remains greater than the value set at parameter P292 for a period longer
than that set at parameter P351 the drive will trip with an error code E33.
99.9 = E33 is disabled

This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4.

P352 (1)
Delay for E34
Long Period at
Torque Limitation

Description / Notes

0 to 999
[ 999 ]
s

This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4.

If the CFW-09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the
value set at P352 the drive will trip with an error code E34.
999 = E34 is disabled.

NOTE!
When the CFW-09 is used in “master/slave” applications, disable
this function on the slave drive.

P353 (1)
Delay for N Fx

209

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

a) Activation of the load detection parameters during the stabilization time and with P361 = On
Speed
N* x P368

N*

P362

t
Show Overweight
Output
Current
(1)
P367

(2)
P366
P365

t
P363

Calculate Im
P364
Show Slack
Cable

(1)
(2)

Overweight Condition
Normal Condition

Light load condition
Slack cable condition
Im - Average Current

Figure 6.47 a) - Details of the operation of digital functions

210

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

b) Diagram of the Load Detection Logic

Start

P361=1?
S
N > P362

N=0

To>1s

S

S

To=0

Increase To

S
Repeat
Detection

Slack Cable
Counter = 0
Repeat
Detection
1

Repeat
Detection

1

S
P364 > 0

S

S

Ramp Hold

Is > P365

Cable OK

S
S
P364 >0

Is > P365

Show Slack
Cable

S
Cable OK

S
Th > P363

Th=Th-1

Calculate Im
Th = 0

Im < P366
S
N* = N* x P368

Im > P367
S
Show
Overweight

End

To = Time in N=0 rpm
Th = Ramp Hold Time
N* = Speed Reference
N = Real Speed

Is = Output Current (P003)
Im = Average Current
Iq = Torque Current

Figure 6.47 b) - Details of the operation of digital functions

211

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P370
Hysteresis for Fx
P371
DC Braking Time
at Start
This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202=3 (Sensorless)
or 5 (VVW)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.0 to 15.0
[2.0]
0.1 Hz
0.0 to 15.0
[0.0]
0.1 s

Description / Notes
It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs: F > Fx

The DC braking at start consists of applying a DC current to the motor
between the “Start” command and the motor acceleration.
This parameter adjusts the DC braking time at start for the VVW and
Sensorless Vector control modes
If the drive is disabled during the DC braking operation, the braking
process will continue until the braking time set at P371 finishes. After
that the drive returns to the “RDY” state.
The DC braking at start is not available for:
- The V/Hz and Vector with Encoder control modes;
- Start commands through the serial and Fieldbus interfaces with P202=3;
- When P211=1;
- When the Flying Start function is set (P320>=1)
The DC current level is set at P302 (VVW) and P372 (sensorless).
During the DC Braking the LED displays flashes

P372
DC Braking
Current Level

0.0 to 90.0
[40.0]
0.1 %

This parameter is shown on
the display(s)
only when P202 = 3
(Sensorless)
P398 (1)
Slip Compensation
during Regeneration

This parameter is shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 5
(VVW)
212

This parameter adjusts the DC voltage (DC braking torque) applied to
the motor during the braking process.
The current level set at this parameter represents a percentage of the
drive rated current.
This parameter works only for the sensorless vector control.

0,1
[1]
-

This parameter is shown on
the display(s) only
when P202 = 5
(VVW)
P399 (1)(2)
Rated Motor
Efficiency

.

P398
0
1

Function
Off
On

Table 6.56 - Slip Compensation during Regeneration

50.0 to 99.
[-]
%

This parameter sets the motor rated efficiency;
This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW control.
The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation
of the slip compensation;
The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter
P404 is modified. The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard
three-phase WEG motors. The user shall set this parameter manually
for other motor types.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.4

MOTOR PARAMETERS - P400 to P499

Parameter
P400 (1) (6)
Motor Rated Voltage

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 690
[ P296 ]
1V

Description / Notes
Set this parameter value according to the motor nameplate and the
connection diagram in the terminal box.
This value cannot be greater than the rated voltage value set at P296.
In order to make a new setting of P400 effective while not in the guided
start-up routine, it is necessary to power the drive down/up.

P401 (1) (12)
Motor Rated Current

0.0 to 1.30xP295 (12)
[ 1.0 x P295 ]
0.1A(<100)-1A(>99.9)

P402 (1) (2) (11)
Motor Rated Speed

0 to 18000
[ 1750 (1458) ] (11)
1rpm
0 to 7200
[ 1750 (1458) ] (11)
1rpm

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.

0 to 300
[ 60 (50) ] (11)
1Hz
30 to 120
[ 60 (50) ] (11)
1Hz

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.

0 to 50
[4]
-

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate.

P403 (1) (11)
Motor Rated
Frequency

P404 (1)
Motor Rated Power

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate, considering the
motor operating voltage.

0 to 18000 rpm for V/F Control.
0 to 7200 rpm for Vector Control.

0 to 300Hz for V/F Control.
30 to 120Hz for Vector Control.

Motor Rated
Motor Rated
P404
Power (HP/kW)
Power (HP/kW)
0
0.33/0.25
26
180.0/132.0
1
0.50/0.37
27
200.0/150.0
2
0.75/0.55
28
220.0/160.0
3
1.0/0.75
29
250.0/185.0
4
1.5 /1.1
30
270.0/200.0
5
2.0 /1.5
31
300.0/220.0
6
3.0 /2.2
32
350.0/260.0
7
4.0 /3.0
33
380.0/280.0
8
5.0 /3.7
34
400.0/300.0
9
5.5 /4.0
35
430.0/315.0
10
6.0/4.5
36
440.0/330.0
11
7.5/5.5
37
450.0/335.0
12
10.0/7.5
38
475.0/355.0
13
12.5/9.0
39
500.0/375.0
14
15.0/11.0
40
540.0/400.0
15
20.0/15.0
41
600.0/450.0
16
25.0/18.5
42
620.0/460.0
17
30.0/22.0
43
670.0/500.0
18
40.0/30.0
44
700.0/525.0
19
50.0/37.0
45
760.0/570.0
20
60.0/45.0
46
800.0/600.0
21
75.0/55.0
47
850.0/630.0
22
100.0/75.0
48
900.0/670.0
23
125.0/90.0
49
1100.0/ 820.0
24
150.0/110.0
50
1600.0/1190.0
25
175.0/130.0
Table 6.57 - Motor rated power selection

P404

213

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P405 (1)
Encoder PPR

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
250 to 9999
[ 1024 ]
1

Description / Notes
Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) of the incremental
encoder, when P202 = 4 (Vector with Encoder).

This parameter
is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 4 (Vector
Control with Encoder)
P406 (1)
Motor Ventilation
Type

0 to 3
[0]
-

P406
0
1
2
3

Function
Self-ventilated
Forced Ventilation
Optimal Flux
Increased Protection

Table 6.58 - Type of motor ventilation

At the first drive power up (refer to items 5.2, 5.3 and 5.3.1) or when
P202 is modified from 0, 1 or 2 (V/Hz) to 5 (VVW), 3 or 4 (Vector - see
item 5.3.2), from 5 to 3 or 4 and vice versa, the value set at P406
automatically changes the overload protection as follows:
P406

P156

P157

P158

0

1.1xP401

0.9xP401

0.55xP401

1

1.1xP401

1.0xP401

1.0xP401

2

1.1xP401

1.0xP401

1.0xP401

3

0.98xP401

0.9xP401

0.55xP401

Table 6.59 - Motor overload protection action

ATTENTION!
The option P406=2 may be used (see use conditions below) when
motor should be operated at low frequencies with rated torque,
without requiring forced ventilation, for the operation range 12:1,
i.e., 5 at 60Hz/4.2 at 50Hz according the rated motor frequency.

CONDITIONS FOR USING OPTION P406=2:
i. Sensorless Vector Mode (P202=3);
ii. WEG motors series: Nema Premiun Efficiency, Nema High Efficiency,
IEC Premiun Efficiency, IEC TOP Premium Efficiency and Alto
rendimento Plus.

When P406=3, the switching frequency is limited to 5kHz.

214

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P407 (1) (2)
Rated Motor Power
Factor

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0.50 to 0.99
[-]
-

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 5 (VVW)

Description / Notes
This parameter sets the motor power factor;
This parameter is important to the correct operation of the VVW control.
The incorrect setting of this parameter results in the incorrect calculation
of the slip compensation;
The default value of this parameter is automatically set when parameter
P404 is modified. The suggested value is valid only for IV pole standard
three-phase WEG motors. The user shall set this parameter manually
for other motor types.

0 to 2
[ P202=3 ]
[0]
1

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

This parameter controls the self-tuning routine, which estimates the value
of parameters related to the motor under use. When P408 is set to
options 1, 2, or 3, the self-tuning routine estimates the value of parameters
P409 to P413. When this parameter is set to option 4, the self-tuning
routine only estimates the value of parameter P413.

0 to 4
[ P202=4 ]
[0]
1

Note: Best results for the self-tuning routine are obtained with a hot
motor.

The Self-tuning
Routine can be
cancelled by
pressing the

0,1
[ P202=5]
[0]
1

P408 (1)
Run Self-Tuning

key, only
when P409 to P413
are different from
zero.
Self-tuning can
be realized only with
P309=Inactive (0)

P408
0
1

Self-tuning
No
No rotation

2

Run for Imr

3
4

Run for TM
Measure TM

Type of Control
Sensorless Vector, Vector with
Encoder or VVW
Sensorless Vector or Vector
with Encoder
Vector with Encoder
Vector with Encoder

P202
3,4 or 5
3 or 4
4
4

Table 6.60 - Self-tuning options

- No rotation - The motor remains stationary during the self-tuning routine.
The value of P410 is obtained from a table, which is valid for WEG motors
up to 12 poles.
Thus, P410 shall be set to zero before starting the self-tuning routine. If
P410 ≠ 0, the self-tuning routine will keep the existing value.
Note: When using a non-WEG motor, set P410 to the proper value (no
load current) before running the self-tuning routine.
- Run for Imr - The value of P410 is estimated with the motor rotating.
This option shall be executed with no load coupled to the motor.

ATTENTION!
If the self-tuning routine is executed with a load coupled to the
motor and with P408 set to option 2 (Run for Imr), a wrong value of
P410 (Imr) may be obtained. This will result in a wrong estimation
of P412 (Lr/Tr Constant) and P413 (Mechanical Time Constant TM). An overcurrent fault (E00) may also occur during the drive
operation.
Note: The word “load” represents anything coupled to the motor
shaft such as a gearbox, an inertia wheel, etc.

215

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
- Run for TM - The value of parameter P413 (Mechanical Time Constant
- TM) is estimated with the motor rotating. It shall be run, preferentially,
with the load coupled to the motor.
- Measure TM – Estimates the value of P413 (Mechanical Time Constant
– TM) with the motor rotating. It shall be run, preferentially, with the load
coupled to the motor.

NOTES!
When P408 = 1 or 2:
The parameter P413 (Mechanical Time Constant – TM) is set to
an approximated value of the motor mechanical time constant.
The value of this parameter is set based on the motor rotor inertia
(table data is valid for WEG motors), on the Drive Rated Current,
and on the Drive Rated Voltage.
Vector with Encoder control (P202 = 4):
When P408 is set to option 2 (Run for Imr) and the self-tuning
routine is finished, it is mandatory to couple the load to the motor
and set parameter P408 to 4 (Measure TM) in order to estimate
P413 (Mechanical Time Constant – TM). In this case, parameter
P413 will also consider the driven load.
VVW Control - Voltage Vector WEG (P202=5):
In the self-tuning routine for the VVW control, only the mot stator
resistance (P409) is obtained. Therefore, the self-tuning routine
is always run with the motor stationary.

P409 (1)
Motor Stator Resistance
(Rs)
This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3, 4 (Vector
Control) a 5 (VVW)

216

0.000 to 77.95
[ 0.000 ]
0.001Ω

Value estimated by the Self-tuning routine.

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P410
Motor Magnetizing
Current (Imr)

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 1.25xP295
[ 0.0 ]
0.1A

When the motor can operate decoupled from the load (P408 = 2) this
value is estimated by the Self-tuning routine (P408=1 or 3) otherwise it
is obtained from a pre-stored value array valid for WEG motors.
If a non WEG motor is being used set this parameter to the correct
value before starting Self-tuning.

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

P411 (1)
Motor Flux Leakage
Inductance

Description / Notes

For P202=4 (vector with encoder), the value set at P410 determines the
motor flux. Thus ensure correct setting. If this setting is too low, the
motor will lose flux and torque, if too high, the motor running starts to
oscillate at rated speed or even this speed may not be reached. In this
case, decrement P410 or P178 till speed oscillation stops or the rated
speed is reached.

0.00 to 99.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01mH

Value estimated by the Self-tuning routine.

0.000 to 9.999
[ 0.000 ]
0.001s

The setting of P412 determines the gains of the flux regulator (P175
and P176).

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

P412
Lr/Rr Constant (Rotor
Time Constant - Tr)
This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

The value of P412 is estimated by the self-tuning routine for motors up
to 75hp/55kW. For higher ratings, this parameter is set according to
the values for the WEG standard motors (table 6.61 shows typical values
for some motors).
The value of this parameter affects the speed accuracy for the sensorless
vector mode control.
Usually, the self-tuning routine is run when the motor is cold. Depending
on the motor, the value of P412 may vary more or less according to the
motor temperature. Therefore, when running a hot motor, adjust P412
so that the loaded motor speed (measured at the motor shaft with a
tachometer) is the same as that indicated on the drive keypad (P001).
This setting shall be performed at the half of the rated speed.
For P202=4 (vector with encoder control), if the setting of P412 is incorrect
the motor will lose torque. In this case, set P412 so that the motor
current (P003) reaches the lowest value at the half of the rated speed
and with a steady load.
In the sensorless vector control the value of the parameter P175 will be
limited in the range: 3,0 ≤ P175 ≤ 8.0.

217

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Typical TR values for WEG standard motors:
TR (s):
Number of poles

Motor Power
cv-hp / kW

2

4

6

8

(50Hz/60Hz) (50Hz/60Hz) (50Hz/60Hz) (50Hz/60Hz)
2 / 1.5

0.19 / 0.14

0.13 / 0.14

0.1 / 0.1

0.07 / 0.07

5 / 3.7

0.29 / 0.29

0.18 / 0.12

- / 0.14

0.14 / 0.11

10 / 7.5

- / 0.38

0.32 / 0.25

0.21 / 0.15

0.13 / 0.14

15 / 11

0.52 / 0.36

0.30 / 0.25

0.20 / 0.22

0.28 / 0.22

20 / 15

0.49 / 0.51

0.27 / 0.29

0.38 / 0.2

0.21 / 0.24

30 / 22

0.70 / 0.55

0.37 / 0.34

0.35 / 0.37

- / 0.38

50 / 37

- / 0.84

0.55 / 0.54

0.62 / 0.57

0.31 / 0.32

100 / 75

1.64 / 1.08

1.32 / 0.69

0.84 / 0.64

0.70 / 0.56

150 / 110

1.33 / 1.74

1.05 / 1.01

0.71 / 0.67

- / 0.67

200 / 150

- / 1.92

- / 0.95

- / 0.65

- / 1.03

300 / 220

- / 2.97

1.96 / 2.97

1.33 / 1.30

-/-

350 / 250

-/-

1.86 / 1.85

- / 1.53

-/-

500 / 375

-/-

- / 1.87

-/-

-/-

Table 6.61 - Typical TR values for some WEG standard motors.

P413 (1)
TM Constant
(Mechanical Time
Constant)

0.00 to 99.99
[ 0.00 ]
0.01s

The setting of P413 determines the gains of the speed regulator (P161
and P162).
When P408 = 1 or 2, observe the following:
- If P413 = 0, then the TM constant will be obtained as a function of the
motor inertia (memory stored value).

This parameter is shown on the
display(s) only when
P202 = 3 or 4
(Vector Control)

- If P413 > 0, then the value of P413 will not be changed during the selftuning routine.
Sensorless vector control (P202=3):
When the value of P413 (obtained from the self-tuning routine) provides
unsuitable gains for the speed regulator, modify this parameter to better
adjust the speed regulator gains;
The value of P161, provided by the self-tuning routine or through the
changing of P413, will be limited in the range: 6,0 ≤ P161 ≤ 9,0.
The value of P162 varies according to the value of P161.
In case it is needed to increase more these gains, set them directly at
P161 and P162.
Note: Values of P161 > 12,0 may cause oscillations in the torque current
(iq) and in the speed.
Vector with encoder control (P202=4):
The value of P413 is estimated by the self-tuning routine when P408 = 3
or 4. In case it is not possible to estimate it, the setting shall be performed
manually. (Refer to P161/P162).

218

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.5

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PARAMETERS P500 to P699

6.5.1 PID Regulator

The CFW-09 is fitted with the PID regulator that can be used for closed loop
process control. This function acts as a proportional, integral and derivative
regulator, superimposed on the normal inverter speed control.
The speed will be changed in order to maintain the process variable (the
variable that should be controlled - for instance: water level of a container) at
the desired value, set in the setpoint.
This regulator can control, for example, the flow in a piping system through
the flow feedback to the analog input AI2 or AI3 (selected via P524), and the
flow reference set at P221 or P222 - AI1, when the inverter drives the motor of
a pump that circulates the fluid through this piping system.
Other application examples: level control, temperature control,
dosing control, etc.

6.5.2 Description

The function of the PID regulator is activated by setting P203 to 1.
Figure 6.50 shows the block diagram of the Academic PID regulator.
The transference function in the frequency domain of the Academic PID
regulator is:

y ( s ) = Kp e( s )[1 +

1
+ sTd ]
sTi

Substituting the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient,
we will obtain an approximate value for the discrete (recursive) transfer equation
shown below:

y (kTa ) = y (k − 1)Ta + Kp[(e(kTa ) − e(k − 1)Ta ) +
+ Kie(k − 1)Ta + Kd (e(kTa ) − 2e(k − 1)Ta + e(k − 2)Ta )]
where:
Kp (Proportional Gain): Kp = P520 x 4096;
Ki (Integral Gain)
: Ki = P521 x 4096 = [Ta/Ti x 4096 ];
Kd (Differential Gain) : Kd = P522 x 4096 = [Td/Ta x 4096].
Ta = 0,02sec(sampling period of the PID Regulator).
SP* : reference, has 13 bits max. (0 to 8191).
X : process variable (or controlled), read at AI2 or AI3, has 13 bits maximum;
y(kTa): current PID output, has 13 bits maximum;
y(k-1)Ta: previous OPID output;
e(kTa): current error [SP*(k) – X(k)];
e(k-1)Ta: previous error [SP*(k-1) – X(k-1)];
e(k-2)Ta: error of the two previous samplings [SP*(k-2) – X(k-2)];
The feedback signal must be sent to the analog inputs AI2' and AI3' (See
figure 6.29 and 6.30).

NOTE!
When using the PID function P233 must be set to 1, otherwise the minimum
speed (P133) will be added to the PID feedback via AI2.

219

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

The setpoint can be defined:
Keypad: parameter P525.
Analog inputs AI1’, AI2’, AI3’, AI4’, (AI1’+ AI2’)>0, (AI1’+ AI2’), Multispeed,
Serial, Fieldbus and PLC.

NOTE!
When P203=1, do not use the reference via EP (P221/P222=7).
When the PID function (P203=1) is set:
The following parameters are automatically changed: P223=0 (always forward),
P225=0 (JOG disabled), P226=0 (always forward), P228=0 (JOG disabled),
P237=3 (PID process variable) e P265=15 (Manual/Automatic).
The JOG Function and the direction of rotation function remain disabled. The
Enabling and Start/Stop controls are defined in P220, P224 and P227.
The digital input DI3 is programmed automatically for the function Manual/
Automatic (P265=15), according to table 6.61:

DIx

Operating Mode

0 (0V)

Manual

1 (24V)

Automatic

Table 6.62 - DIx Operating Mode

The change between Manual/Automatic can be realized by one of the digital
inputs DI3 to DI8 (P265 to P270).
Parameter P040 indicates the value of the Process Variable feedback) in the
chosen scale/unit. This parameter can be selected as monitoring variable
(see Item 4.2.2), provided P205=6. To prevent the saturation of the analog
feedback input during the regulation “overshoot”, the signal must vary between
0V to 9.0V [(0 to 18) mA / (4 to 18) mA]. The adaptation between the setpoint
and the feed back can be realized by changing the gain of the selected analog
input as feedback (P238 for AI2 or P242 for AI3). The Process Variable can
also be displayed at the outputs AO1 to AO4 provided they were programmed
at P251, P253, P255 or P257. The same is valid for the PID setpoint.
The outputs DO1, DO2 and RL1 to RL3 can be programmed (P275 to P277,
P279 or P280) to the functions of the Process Variable > VPx (P533) and
Process Variable < VPy (P534).
When the setpoint is defined by P525 (P221 or P222=0), and if it is changed
from manual to automatic, following setting P525=P040 is performed
automatically, provided the parameter P536 is active. In this case, the
commutation from manual to automatic is smooth (there is no abrupt speed
oscillation).
In case of function “Stop Logic” is active (P211=1) and P224=0, P224 is
automatically changed to the option “Digital Input (DIx)” (P224=1).
In case of function “Stop Logic” is active (P211=1) and P227=0, P227 is
automatically changed to the option “Digital Input (DIx)” (P227=1).
220

Obs 2

Obs 1

Feedback P524
See Figures 6.29 and 6.30

AI3'

AI2'

Setpoint (SP)
See Figure 6.25

P525

Setpoint Definition
(reference of the process variable)

P526

-

Enable

+

P520

Academic PID

P040

Enable

Academic PID

P521

P522

P221/P222=1 to 11
(Analog Inputs, Multispeed, Serial, Fieldbus,
PLC, PID Setpoint)

Obs2:

P523

P221/P222=0
(Keypad PID Setpoint)

Obs1:

+
+

+

P133, P134

P527

DI3
(P265=15)

PID Action Type

1=Reverse

0=Direct

Reference
(See Figure 6.25)

Speed
Reference
(See Figure
6.25)

Automatic
(DIx Closed)

Manual
(DIx Open)

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.48 - Block diagram of the PID Regulator Function

221

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

P520
PID Proportional
Gain

0.000 to 7.999
[ 1.000 ]
0.001

P521
PID Integral Gain

0.000 to 7.999
[ 0.043 ]
0.001

P522
PID Differential
Gain

0.000 to 3.499
[ 0.000 ]
0.001

P523
PID Ramp Time

0.0 to 999
[ 3.0 ]
0.1s (<99.9s)
1s (>99.9s)

Description / Notes
Some examples of initial settings of the PID Regulator Gains and PID
Ramp Times for some applications mentioned in Item 6.5.1, are shown
in table 6.63.

Derivative
P522
0.000

0.037

0.000

3.0

0 = Direct

1

0.043

0.000

3.0

0 = Direct

1

0.037

0.000

3.0

0 = Direct

2
1

0.004
See Note

0.000
0.000

3.0
3.0

See Note
See Note

Proportional
P520
1
Pressure pneumatic
system
1
Flow pneumatic
system
Pressure hydraulic
system
Flow hydraulic
system
Temperature
Level

PID Ramp
Action Time
Time
P527
P523
3.0
0 = Direct

Gains
Integral
P521
0.043

Magnitude

Table 6.63 - Suggestions for gain settings of the PID regulator

Obs:
For temperature and level control, the action type will depend on the
process. For instance, in the level control, when the inverter drives the
motor that removes fluid from a tank, the action will be contrary as
when the inverter drives the motor that fills a tank and thus the fluid level
increases and the inverter should increase the motor speed to lower
the fluid level, otherwise the inverter action that drives the pump motor
to pump fluid into the tank will be direct.
In case of level control, the setting of the integral gain will depend on the
time required to fill the tank from the minimum acceptable level up the
desired level, in the following conditions:
i.

For the direct action, the time should be measured by considering
the maximum input flow and the minimum output flow.

ii.

In the inverse action, the time should be measured by considering
the minimum input flow and the maximum output flow.

The equation to calculate an initial value for P521 (PID Integral Gain) as
a function of the system response time, is presented below:
P521 = 0.02 / t
t=time (seconds)

P524
Selection of the
PID Feedback

0,1
[0]
-

It selects the feedback input (Process Variable) of the PID regulator:
P524

AIx

0

AI2 (P237 to P240)

1

AI3 (P241 to P244)

Table 6.64 - Feedback selection

222

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
After the feedback input has been chosen, you must set the input function
selected at P237 (to AI2) or P241 (to AI3).
Feedback Type:
The PID action Type described above considers that the variable feedback
signal increases when the process variable also increases (direct
feedback). This is the most common used feedback type.
When the process variable feedback decreases when the process variable
increases (inverse feedback), It is required to program the selected
analog input for the PID (AI2 or AI3) as inverse reference: P239=2 [(10
to 0)V/(20 to 0)mA] or P239=3 [(20 to 4)mA]. When the feedback is
through AI2 and P243=2 [(10 to 0)V/(20 to 0)mA] or P243=3 [(20 to
4)mA] when the feedback is through AI3. When this setting is not present,
PID does not operate correctly.

P525
Keypad PID Setpoint

0.0 to 100
[ 0.0 ]
0.1%

It provides the setpoint via the
and
keys for the PID Regulator
(P203=1) provided that P221=0 (LOC) or P222=0 (REM) and the inverter
is in the Automatic mode. If it has been set to Manual Mode, the speed
reference is given by P121.
The value of P525 is maintained at the last set value (backup), even
when inverter is disabled or enabled with [P120 = 1 (Active)].
Once PID is in Automatic mode, the Setpoint value for PID regulator is
entered into the CFW09 via any reference set by P221 (LOCAL mode)
or P222 (REMOTE mode). Particularly, most of general PID applications
uses the setpoint via the AI1 [P221=1 (LOC) or P222=1(REM)] or via
the
and
keys [P221=0 (LOC) or P222=0(REM)]. Refer to
Figure 6.48 Block Diagram of the PID Regulator.”

P526
Process Variable
Filter

0.0 to 16.0
[ 0.1 ]
0.1s

P527
PID Action Type

0,1
[0]
-

It sets the time constant of the Process Variable Filter.
Generally a 0.1 will be a suitable value, excepting the process variable
signal has a too high noise level. In this case, increase this value
gradually by checking the result.

It defines the control action type:
P527

Action Type

0

DIRECT

1

REVERSE

Table 6.65 - PID action type

223

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Select according to the process
Motor Speed

Process Variable

Select

INCREASE

INCREASE
DECREASE

DIRECT
REVERSE

Table 6.66 - PID action selection

Process requirement:
PID action type: the PID action should be selected as direct, when it is
required to increase the motor speed in order to increase the process
variable. Otherwise, select the inverse.
Example 1 - Direct: pump driven by frequency inverter and filling a tank,
where PID regulates the level. To increase the level (process variable) it
is required to increase the flow and consequently, the motor speed.
Example 2 - Inverse: Fan driven by frequency inverter and cooling a cooling
tower, with PID controlling its temperature. When the temperature (process
variable) should be increased, the cooling effect should de reduced by
reducing the motor speed.

P528
Process Variable
Scale Factor

1 to 9999
[ 1000 ]
1

P528 and P529 define the way the Process variable (P040) will be shown.
P529 defines how many digits are indicated after the decimal point.
P528 must be set according to the equation below:

P529
Decimal Point of
Process Variable

0 to 3
[1]
-

P528 =

F. S. V. Indication Process x (10)P529
Gain (AI2 or AI3)

where:
F. S. V. Indication Process is the full scale value of the Process Variable,
corresponding to 10V (20mA) at the Analog Input (AI2 or AI3) used as
feedback.

Example 1: (Pressure Transducer 0 to 25 bar - Output 4 to 20 mA)
- Desired indication: 0 to 25 bar (F. S.)
- Feedback Input: AI3
- Gain AI3=P242=1.000
- Signal AI3=P243=1 (4 to 20mA)
- P529=0 (no digit after decimal point)
P528 =

224

25 x (10)0
= 25
1.000

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit

Description / Notes
Example 2 (values are factory standards):
- Desired indication: 0.0% to 100.0% (F. S.)
- Feedback Input: AI2
- Gain AI2=P238=1.000
- P529=1 (one number after decimal point)
P528 =

P530
Eng. Unit
Proc. Var. 1

32 to 127
[ 37 (%) ]
-

P531
Eng. Unit
Proc. Var. 2

32 to 127
[ 32 ( ) ]
-

P532
Eng. Unit
Proc. Var. 3

32 to 127
[ 32 ( ) ]
-

100.0 x (10)1
= 1000
1.000

These parameters are only useful, if the inverter is fitted with HMI with
LCD display.
The Engineering Unit of the Process Variable is formed by three
characters, that are used for the indication of P040. P530 defines the
left character, P531 defines the central character and P532 defines the
right character.
Possible characters to be chosen:
Characters corresponding to the ASCII code from 32 to 127.
Examples:
A, B, ... , Y, Z, a, b, ... , y, z, 0, 1, ... , 9, #, $, %, (, ), *, +, ...
Examples:
-

P533
Value of Proc. Var. X

0.0 to 100
[ 90.0 ]
0.1%

P534
Value of Proc. Var. Y

0.0 to 100
[ 10.0 ]
0.1%

To indicate “bar”:

-

To indicate “%”:

P530=”b” (98)

P530=”%” (37)

P531=”a” (97)

P531=” “ (32)

P532=”r” (114)

P532=” “ (32)

Used in the functions of the Digital/Relay Outputs:
V. Pr. > VPx and V. Pr. < VPy aiming signaling/alarm.
Full scale percentual values of the Process Variable:

(P040 =

(10)P529
x100%)
P528

225

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Parameter
P535
Wake Up Band

Range
[Factory Setting]
Unit
0 to 100
[0]
1%

P536 (1)

0,1

Automatic Set of

[0]

P525

Description / Notes
The value of this parameter is used along with P212 (Condition to Leave
Zero Speed Disable), providing additional condition to leave zero speed
disable, that is, error of PID > P535. See P211 to P213.
When the setpoint of the PID regulator is by HMI (P221/P222 = 0) and
P536 is zero (active) by commutating from manual to automatic, the
process variable value will be loaded at P525. In this way do you prevent
PID oscillations during the commutation from “Manual” to “Automatic”.

P536

Action Type

0

Active

1

Inactive

Table 6.67 - Automatic Set of P525

P537
Hysteresis for the
Set Point =
Process Variable

0 to 100
[1]
1%

When the Set Point value is equal to the Process Variable and it is
within the range defined by the hysteresis value (set at parameter P537),
the digital or relay output set to the option Set Point = Process Variable
(SP=PV) is activated and remains in this condition until the process
variable reaches a value outside of the hysteresis range (refer to figure
6.39 v).

NOTE!
This function is enabled only in the automatic mode and when
P203=1.

P538
Hysteresis VPx/VPy

226

0.0 to 5.0
[ 1.0 ]
0.1%

It is used in functions of the digital and relay outputs:
Process Variable > VPx and Process Variable < VPy

CHAPTER

7

DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
This Chapter assists the user to identify and correct possible faults that
can occur during the CFW-09 operation. Guidance on Preventive
Maintenance is also provided.

7.1 FAULTS AND POSSIBLE
CAUSES

FAULT
E00
Output
Overcurrent

E01
Overvoltage (Ud)

E02
Undervoltage (Ud)

When a fault is detected, the inverter is disabled and the Fault Code is
displayed on the readout in the EXX form, where XX is the actual Fault
Code. (ie. E01).
To restart the inverter after a fault has occurred, the inverter must be reset.
The reset can be made as follows:
Disconnecting and reapplying AC power (power-on reset);
By pressing the key
(manual reset);
Automatic reset through P206 (auto-reset);
By digital input: DIx=12 (P265 to P270).
The table below defines each Fault Code, explains how to reset the fault
and shows the possible causes for each Fault Code.

RESET
Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)

POSSIBLE CAUSES

)

Short-circuit between two motor phases;
Short-circuit between breaking resistor cables;
Inertia of the load too high, or acceleration ramp too short;
Transistor module shorted;
Improper setting of regulation and/or configuration
parameter(s);
P169 to P172 set too high.
Power Supply voltage too high, check Ud in P004:
220-230V Models - Ud > 400V
380-480V Models - Ud > 800V
500-600V and 500-690V Models with power supply between
500V and 600V - Ud > 1000V
500-690 V models with power supply between 660V and 690V
and 660-690V models - Ud > 1200V
Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short.
P151 or P153 set too high.
Power Supply voltage too low, DC Link check Ud in P004:
220-230V power supply - Ud < 223V
380V power supply - Ud < 385V
400-415V power supply - Ud < 405V
440-460V power supply - Ud < 446V
480V power supply - Ud < 487V
500-525V power supply - Ud < 532V
550-575V power supply - Ud < 582V
600V power supply - Ud < 608V
660-690V power supply - Ud < 699V
Phase loss at the input;
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 105A and 130A/220-230V,
86A to 600A/380-480V and 44A to 79A/500-600Vsee Section 3.2.3);
Pre-charge contactor defective;
P296 set to a voltage higher than the power supply voltage.

Table 7.1 - Faults and possibles causes

227

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

FAULT

RESET

E03
Input Undervoltage/
Phase loss (1)

Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)

E04
Inverter
Overtemperature
or Pre-charge
Circuit
Defective (2) (3)

Power-on
Manual reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx (Digital Input)

POSSIBLE CAUSES

)

)

Power Supply voltage is too low, check Power Supply voltage:
220-230V Models - Power Supply < 154V
380-480V Models - Power Supply < 266V
500-600V and 500-690V Models - Power Supply < 361V
660-690V Models - Power Supply < 462V
Phase loss at the inverter input.
Activation Time: 2.0s
Ambient temperature too high (>40°C) and/or output
current too high; or ambient temperature < -10ºC;
Blowers locked or defective (3)
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 105A and 130A/220-230V,
86A to 600A/380-480V and 44A to 79A/500-600Vsee Section 3.2.3);
Problem with the supply voltage - voltage sag or interruption
(phase loss) - last for more than 2 seconds and with the
phase loss detection disabled (P214=0);
Signal with inverted Polarity at Analog inputs AI1/AI2.

E05
Inverter / Motor
Overload
Ixt Function

P156, P157 and P158 set too low for the motor being used;
Motor is under an actual overload condition.

E06
External Fault

Any DIx (DI3 to DI7) programmed for external fault detection
(P265 to P270 set to 4 – No Ext Flt) is open (not connected
to + 24V);
Terminal block XC12 on the control board CC9 is not
properly connected.

E07
Encoder Fault
(Valid only if
P202 = 4 - Vector
with Encoder)

Miswiring between encoder and terminal block XC9
(optional board EBA/EBB). Refer to Section 8.2;
Encoder is defective.

E08
CPU Error
(watchdog)
E09
Program Memory
Error (Checksum)
E10
Error in the
Copy Function
E11 (7)
Ground Fault

Electrical noise.

Contact WEG
(Refer to Section 7.3)

Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx

Memory with corrupted values.

)

A bid to copy the HMI parameters to the inverter with
different Software version.

Short-circuit between one or more output phases and
ground;
Motor cable capacitance to ground is too high.
Table 7.1 - Faults and possibles causes (cont.)

228

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

FAULT

RESET

E12
Braking Resistor
Overload

E13
Incorrect encoder
sense of rotation
(for P202 = 4 Encoder), with
P408=runs to Imr

Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx

Load inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short;
Load on the motor shaft too high;
P154 and P155 programmed incorrectly.

)

Do not reset this fault and
restart without first correcting
the direction of either
the encoder or of the motor.

Cables U, V, W to motor are inverted;
Encoder channels A and B are inverted;
Encoder mounted in wrong position.
Note: This fault can only occur during Self-tuning.

E15
Motor Phase
Loss

Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx

E17
Overspeed
Fault

Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx

E24
Programming
Error (5)

POSSIBLE CAUSES

Bad contact or broken wiring between motor and inverter;
Incorrect value programmed in P401;
Vector control without orientation;
Vector control with encoder, encoder wiring or connection to
motor is inverted.

)

When the effective overspeed exceeds the value of
P134+P132 longer than 20ms.

)

It is automatically reset
when the incompatible
parameters are correctly
programmed.

Incompatible parameters were programmed. Refer to
Table 4.2.

E31
Keypad (HMI)
Connection Fault

It is automatically reset when
HMI communication with
inverter is restablished.

Keypad cable misconnected;
Electrical noise in the installation (electromagnetic
interference).

E32
Motor
Overtemperature

Power-on
Manual Reset (Key
Auto-reset
DIx

Motor is under an actual overload condition;
Duty cycle is too high (too many starts/stops per minute);
Ambient temperature is too high;
Motor thermistor.miswiring or short-circuit (resistance <
100Ω) at the terminals XC4:2 and 3 of the optional board
XC4:2 and 3 of the optional board EBA or at the
terminals XC5:2 and 3 of the optional board EBB.
P270 programmed to 16 unintentionally, with EBA/EBB
board not installed and/or motor thermistor not connected;
Motor in locked rotor condition.

(4)

E33
Speed without
Control (8)

)

Power-on

Overweight;

Manual Reset (Key

)

Brake Failure.

)

limitation for a period longer than allowed.

Auto Reset
DIx (Digital Input)

E34

Power-on

The load was too heavy and the CFW-09 operated at torque

Long Period at

Manual Reset (Key

Torque Limitation (9)

Auto Reset
DIx (Digital Input)

Failure on the brake opening caused the CFW-09 to operate at
torque limitation for a period longer than allowed.

Contact WEG

Memory error or any internal inverter circuit defective.

E41
Self Diagnosis

(Refer to Section 7.3)

Fault
Table 7.1 - Faults and possibles causes (cont.)

229

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

FAULT
E70
Internal DC
Supply Under
Voltage (6)
E71
Watchdog error
for the PLC board

RESET
Power-on
Manual Reset (key
Auto-reset
DIx

POSSIBLE CAUSES

)

Power-on
Manual Reset (key

Phase loss at the R or S input.
Auxiliary circuit fuse blown (only valid for 500-690V and 660-690V
models - see figure 3.7 f) g)).
When the PLC board stops communicating with the CFW-09

)

for more than 200ms.

Auto-reset
DIx
Table 7.1 - Faults and possibles causes (cont.)

Notes:
(1) E03 Fault can occur only with:
- 220-230V Models with rated current equal or higher than 45 A;
- 380-480V Models with rated current equal or higher than 30 A;
- 500-600V Models with rated current equal or higher than 22 A;
- 500-690V Models;
- 660-690V Models;
- P214 set to1.
(2) In case of E04 Fault due to inverter overtemperature, allow the inverter
to cool before trying to reset it. The E04 fault code can also indicate a
failure in the pre-charge circuit. But this is valid only for:
- 220-230V Models with rated current equal or higher than 70 A;
- 380-480V Models with rated current equal or higher than 86A.
- 500-690V Models with rated current equal or higher than 107A;
- 660-690V Models with rated current equal or highter than 1000A.
The failure in the pre-charge circuit means that the pre-charge contactor
sizes up to 130A/220-230V, 142A/380-480V and 79A/500-600V) or precharge thyristor (sizes above 130A/220-230V, 142A/380-480V, 500-690V
and 660-690V) is not closed, thus overheating the pre-charge resistors.
(3) For:
- 220-230V Models with rated current equal or higher than 16 A;
- 380-480V Models with rated current equal or higher than 13A, and
equal or lower than 142A;
- 500-600V Models with rated current equal or higher than 12A, and
equal or smaller than 79A;
E04 Fault can also be caused by internal airflow overtemperature.
In this case, check the electronics blower.
(4) When E32 is displayed due to motor overtemperature, please allow the
motor to cool down before restarting the inverter.
(5) When an incompatible parameter is programmed, a Fault Message –
E24 - will be displayed and the LCD display will show a Help Message
by indicating the Cause and how to correct the fault status.
(6) Only for models 107A to 472A/500-690V and 100A to 428A/660-690V.
(7) Long motor cables (longer than 100m (330ft)) can cause excessive
capacitance to ground. This can cause nuisance E11 ground fault trips
immediately after the inverter has been enabled.

230

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

SOLUTION:
Reduce the switching frequency (P297).
Connect a load reactor in series with the motor supply line. Refer to
Section 8.8.
(8) This error occurs when the comparison [N = N*] is greater than the
maximum admissible error (set at P292) for a period longer than that set at
P351. When P351=99.9 the detection logic for the error E33 is disabled.
This error is only active in vector modes (P202=3 or 4).
(9) If the CFW-09 remains at torque limitation for a period longer than the value
set at P352 the drive will trip with an error code E34. When P352=999 the
detection logic for the error E34 is disabled. This error is only active in
vector modes (P202=3 or 4).

NOTE!
When a fault occurs the following steps take place:
E00 to E08, E10, E11, E12, E13, E15, E17, E32, E33, E34 and E71:
- “No Fault” relay drops “out”;
- PWM pulses are stopped;
- The LED display indicates the fault code;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- The “ERROR” LED flashes;
- The following data is stored in the EEPROM:
- Speed reference via Keypad or EP (Electronic Potentiometer), if the
function “Reference Backup” is active (P120 set to 1 – On);
- Fault code;
- The status of the I x t function (motor overload);
- The status of the powered time (P042) and Enabled Time (P043).
E09:
- Does not allow inverter operation.
E24:
- Indicates the code on the LED display plus and description on the LCD display;
- It blocks the PWM pulses;
- It doe nor permit motor driving;
- It switches OFF the relay that has been programmed to “Without Error”;
- It switches ON the relay that has been programmed to “With Error”.
E31:
- The inverter continues to operate normally;
- It does not accept the Keypad commands;
- The fault code is indicated on the LED display;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- E31 is not stored in the fault memories (P014 to P017 and P060 to P065)
E41:
- Does not allow inverter operation;
- The fault code is indicated on the LED display;
- The LCD display indicates the fault code and description;
- The “ERROR” LED flashes.

231

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Indication of the inverter status LEDs:
Led
Error

Led
Power

Description
Inverter is powered up and is ready
A fault has been detected.
The FAULT LED flashes, indicating the number
of the Fault Code
Exemple:

(Flashing)

E04
2.7s

1s

Note: If the fault E00 occurs, the ERROR LED
is ON continuously.

7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM

POINT TO BE

CORRECTIVE ACTION

CHECKED
Motor does not run

Incorrect Wiring

1. Check the power and control connections. For example the digital inputs DIX
programmed for Start/Stop, General Enable and No External Fault must be
connected to +24V. For factory default programming, XC1:1 (DI1) must be
connected to +24V(XC1:9) and XC1:10 connected to XC1:8.

Analog Reference

1. Check if the external signal is properly connected.

(if used)

2. Check the status of the speed potentiometer (if used).

Incorrect Programming

1. Check if the parameters are properly programmed for the
application;

Fault

1. Check if the inverter is not disabled due to a Fault condition
(Refer to table above).
2. Check if there is a short-circuit between terminals XC1:9 and
10 (short-circuit at 24Vdc power supply).

Motor Stall

1. Reduce the motor load.
2. Increase P169/P170 or P136/P137.
Table 7.2 - Troubleshooting

232

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM
Motor speed
varies (oscillates)

Motor speed too
high or too low

POINT TO BE
CHECKED

CORRECTIVE ACTION

Loose Connections

1. Disable the inverter, switch OFF the supply voltage and tighten
all connections.
2. Check if all internal connection are titghtened.

Speed
Potentiometer

1. Replace the speed potentiometer.

Variation of the
external analog
reference

1. Identify the cause of the variation.

Parameters not set
correctly (for P202=3 or 4)

1. See Section 6, parameters P410, P412, P161, P162,
P175 and P176.

Programming error
(reference limits)

1. Check if the contents of P133 (Min. Speed) and P134 (Max.
Speed) are according to the motor and the application.

Signal of the
reference control

1. Check the control signal level of the reference.
2. Check the programming (gains and offset) in P234 to P247.

Motor Nameplate

1. Check if the used motor meets the application requirements.
Data

Motor does not
reach rated speed or
it starts to oscillate
at rated speed for
P202= 3 or 4 - Vector
Display OFF

1. Reduce P180 (set to 90 to 99%).

Connection of the
Keypad

1. Check the Keypad connections to the inverter.

Power Supply voltage

1. The power supply voltage must be within the following ranges:
220-230V power supply: - Min: 187V
- Max: 253V
380-480V power supply: - Min: 323V
- Max: 528V
500-600V power supply: - Min: 425V
- Max: 660V
660-690V power supply: - Min: 561V
- Max: 759V
1. Replace the fuse(s)

Blown Fuse(s)
Motor does not enter
the field weakening
range
(for P202= 3 or 4)
Motor speed too
low and P009 = P169
or P170 (motor with
torque limitation),
for P202 = 4 vector with encoder

1. Set P180, between 90% and 99%

Encoder signals or
power connections

Check the signals A - A, B - B according to figure 8.7. If this
connections are correct invert two output phases, for instance
U and V. Refer to Figure 3.9.

Table 7.2 - Troubleshooting (cont.)

233

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

7.3 CONTACTING
WEG

NOTE!
When contacting WEG for service or technical assistance, please have the
following data on hand:
Inverter Model;
Serial number, manufacturing date and hardware revision, as indicated
on the inverter nameplate (Refer to Section 2.4);
Software Version (Refer to Section 2.2);
Information about the application and inverter programming.

7.4 PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
DANGER!
Always disconnect the power supply voltage before touching any component
of the inverter.
Even after switching OFF the inverter, high voltages may be present. Wait 10
minutes to allow complete discharge of the power capacitors.
Always connect the equipment frame to a suitable ground (PE) point.

ATTENTION!
Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
Never touch the components or connectors directly. If this is unavoidable, first
touch the metallic frame or use a suitable ground strap.

Never apply a high voltage test on the inverter!
If this is necessary, contact WEG.

To avoid operation problems caused by harsh ambient conditions, such as
high temperature, moisture, dirt, vibration or premature aging of the components,
periodic inspections of the inverter and installations are recommended.
COMPONENT
Terminal blocks, connectors

PROBLEMS

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

Loose screws

Tighten them

Loose connectors
Blowers

(1)

/ Cooling

System

Blowers are dirty

Clean them

Abnormal acoustic noise

Replace the blower

Blower is not running
Abnormal vibration
Printed circuit boards
Power module

(3)

/

Dust in the air filters

Clean or replace them

Dust, oil or moisture accumulation

Clean them

Smell

Replace them

Dust, oil or moisture accumulation, etc.

Clean them

power connections

Connection screws are loose

Tighten them

DC Bus Capacitors (2)

Discoloration / smell / electrolyte

Replace them

leakage
Safety valve is expanded or broken
Deformation
Power resistor

Discoloration

Replace it

Smell

Table 7.3 - Periodic Inspections after Start-up

234

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:
(1) It is recommended to replace the blowers after each 40,000 hours of
operation;
(2) Check the capacitors every six months. It is recommended to replace
them after five years of operation.
(3) If the inverter is stored for long periods, we recommend to power it up once
a year during 1 hour. For 220-230V and 380-480V models apply supply
voltage of aprox. 220Vac, three-phase or single-phase input, 50 or 60 Hz,
without connecting motor at output. After this energization, wait 24 hours
before installing it. For 500-600V, 500-690V and 660-690V models use the
same procedure applying a voltage between 300V and 330Vac to the inverter input.

7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions

When necessary clean the CFW-09 following the instructions below:
Cooling system:
Remove AC power from the inverter and wait 10 minutes;
Remove all dust from the ventilation openings by using a plastic
bush or a soft cloth;
Remove dust accumulated on the heat sink fins and from the blower
blades with compressed air;
Electronic Boards:
Remove AC power form the inverter and wait 10 minutes;
Remove all dust from the printed circuit boards by using an anti-static
soft brush or remove it with an ionized compressed air gun;
If necessary, remove the PCBs from the inverter;
Always use a ground strap.

235

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

7.5 SPARE PART LIST
Models 220-230V
Name

6

7

10

1

1

1

Types (Ampéres)
13 16 24
Units per Inverter

28

45

5000.5275

Fan 0400.3681 Length 255 mm (60x60)

5000.5292

Fan 0400.3679 Length 165 mm (40x40)

5000.5267

Fan 0400.3682 Length 200 mm (80x80)

2

5000.5364

Fan 0400.3679 Length 230 mm (40x40)

1

5000.5305

Fan 2x04003680 (60x60)

Fuse

0305.6716

Fuse 6.3X32 3.15A 500V

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024

HMI-LCD

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CC9 - 00

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.00

S41509929

Interface Board with the HMI

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DPS1.00

S41512431

Driver and Power Supply Board

CRP1.00

S41510960

Pulse Feedback Board

1

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

1

1

P06 - 2.00

S41512296

Power Board P06-2.00

1

P07 - 2.00

S41512300

Power Board P07-2.00

P10 - 2.00

S41512318

Power Board P10-2.00

P13 - 2.00

S41512326

Power Board P13-2.00

P16 - 2.00

S41512334

Power Board P16-2.00

P24 - 2.00

S41512342

Power Board P24-2.00

P28 - 2.00

S41512350

Power Board P28-2.00

P45 - 2.00

S41510587

Power Board P45-2.00

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI-LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNET Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Fans

236

Especification

Item No

1
1

1

1

1

1

1
1

1
1

1

1

1

1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Models 220-230V
Name

Especification

Item No

54

Precharge

035502345

Cont.CWM32.10 220V 50/60 Hz

Contactors

035502394

Cont.CWM50.00 220V 50/60 Hz

0301.1852

Vitrified wire Resistor 20R 75 W

5000.5267

Fan 0400.3682 Length.200 mm

2

5000.5127

Fan 0400.3682 Length 285 mm

1

5000.5208

Fan 0400.3683 Lenght 230mm (120x120)

5000.5364

Fan 0400.3679 Length. 230mm (40x40)

5000.5216

Fan 0400.3683 Length 330mm

0400.2547

Fan 220V 50/60Hz

0305.6716

Fuse 6.3x32 3.15A 500V

0305.5604

Ret Fuse 0.5A 600V FNQ-R1

Precharge Resistor

Fan

Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD

1

1

Types (Ampéres)
70
86 105 130
Units per Inverter
1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

1

CC9.00

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

1

1

1

1

LVS1.01

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41510927

Board LVS1.01

CFI1.00

S41509929

Interface Board with the HMI

1

DPS1.00

S41512431

Power Supplies and Firing Board

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

1

DPS1.01

S41512440

Driver and Power Supply Board

*P54 - 2.00

S41510552

Power Board P54-2.00

1

P54 - 2.01

1

S41511443

Power Board P54-2.01

*P70 - 2.00

S41511354

Power Board P70-2.00

1

P70 - 2.01

1

S41511451

Power Board P70-2.01

*P86 - 2.00

S41510501

Power Board P86-2.00

1

P86 - 2.01

1

S41511460

Power Board P86-2.01

*P105 - 2.00

S41511362

Power Board P105-2.00

1

P105 - 2.01

1

S41511478

Power Board P105-2.01

*P130 - 2.00

S41510439

Power Board P130-2.00

P130 - 2.01

1

S41511486

Power Board P130-2.01

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

1

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNET Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

Current Transformer

0307.2495

Current transformer 200A/100mA

2

2

* Only the types specified with braking (DB)

237

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Models 380-480V
Name

Fans

Fuse

238

Especification

Item No

3.6

4

Type (Ampéres)
5.5 9
13 16
Units per Inverter

1

1

1

24

30

5000.5275

Fan 0400.3284 Length 190 mm (60x60)

5000.5305

Fan 2x0400.2423 150/110 mm (60x60)

1

1

5000.5292

Fan 0400.3679 Length 165 mm (40x40)

1

1

5000.5283

Fan 2x0400.3681 (135/175) mm (60x60)

5000.5259

Fan 0400.3682 Length 140 mm (80x80)

2

5000.5364

Fan 0400.3679 Length 230 mm (40x40)

1

1

1
1

0305.6716

Fuse 6.3x32 3.15A 500V

CC9.00

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

HMI-CFW09-LCD

1

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.00

S41509929

Interface Board with HMI

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DPS1.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41512431

Driver and Power Supply Board

CRP1.01

S41510820

Pulse Feedback Board

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

P03 - 4.00

S41512369

Power Board P03-4.00

P04 - 4.00

S41512377

Power Board P04-4.00

P05 - 4.00

S41512385

Power Board P05-4.00

P09 - 4.00

S41512393

Power Board P09-4.00

P13 - 4.00

S41512407

Power Board P13-4.00

P16 - 4.00

S41512415

Power Board P16-4.00

P24 - 4.00

S41512423

Power Board P24-4.00

P30 - 4.00

1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

S41509759

Power Board P30-4.00

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Opcional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

1

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277
S03051269

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNET Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Models 380-480V
Especification

Type (Ampéres)
60
70 86 105 142
Units per inverter
1
1
1

Name

Item No

Precharge Contactor

035502394

Contactor CWM50.10 220V 50/60 Hz

0307.0034

Transformer 100 VA

0307.0042

Transformer 300 VA

0301.1852

Vitrified wire Resistor 20R 75 W

5000.5267

Fan 0400.3682 Length.200 mm (80x80)

5000.5208

Fan 0400.3683 Length 230 mm (120x120)

1

1

5000.5216

Fan 0400.3683 Length 330mm (40x40)

1

1

5000.5364

Fan 0400.3679 Length230 mm (40x40)

1

1

0400.2547

Fan 220V 50/60Hz

0305.5604

Ret. Fuse 0.5A 600V FNQ-R1

0305.5663

Ret. Fuse 1.6A 600V

Precharge Transfor
Precharge Resistor

Fans

Fuse

38

45

1

1
1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

1

2

0305.6716

Fuse 6.3x32 3.15A 500V

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CC9.00

S41509651

Controle Board CC9.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.00

S41509929

HMI Interface Board

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DPS1.00

S41512431

Driver and Power Supply Board

1

1

DPS1.01

S41512440

Driver and Power Supply Board

1

1

1

1

1

LVS1.00

1

1

1

2

2

1

1

S41510269

Voltage Selection Board

CB1.00

S41509996

Board CB1.00

CB3.00

S41510285

Board CB3.00

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

1

*P38-4.00

S41511753

Power Board P38-4.00

1

P38-4.01

S41511370

Power Board P38-4.01

1

*P45-4.00

S41509805

Power Board P45-4.00

1

P45-4.01

S41511389

Power Board P45-4.01

1

*P60-4.00

S41511338

Power Board P60-4.00

1

P60-4.01

S41511397

Power Board P60-4.01

1

*P70-4.00

S41509970

Power Board P70-4.00

1

P70-4.01

S41511400

Power Board P70-4.01

1

*P86-4.00

S41511346

Power Board P86-4.00

1

P86-4.01

S41511419

Power Board P86-4.01

1

*P105-4.00

S41509953

Power Board P105-4.00

1

P105-4.01

S41511427

Power Board P105-4.01

1

*P142-4.00

S41510056

Power Board P142-4.00

1

P142-4.01

S41511435

Power Board P142-4.01

1

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

1

1

1

239

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Especification

Item No

Name

38

45

Type (Ampéres)
60
70 86 105 142
Units per inverter

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CB7D.00

S41513136

Board CB7D.00

1

1

CB7E.00

S41513134

Board CB7E.00

1

1

CB4D.00

S41513058

Board CB4D.00

1

1

1

CB4E.00

S41513107

Board CB4E.00

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNET Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Current Trasformer

0307.2495

Current transformer 200A/100mA

2

2

2

*Only for the types specified with braking (DB)

Models 380-480V
Type (Ampéres)
Name

Especification

Item Nº

180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600
Units per inverter

0303.7118

IGBT Module 200A 1200V

0298.0001

IGBT Module 300A 1200V - (EUPEC)

0303.9315

IGBT Module 300A 1200V

6

6

417102497

Inverter Arm 361A - EP

3

3

417102498

Inverter Arm 450A - EP

417102499

Inverter Arm 600A - EP

417102496

InverterArm 600A

6

6

0298.0016

Thyristor-Diode Module TD330N16

3

3

0303.9986

Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16

0303.9994

Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16

0298.0003

Thyristor-Diode Module SKKH 250/16

3

3

3

0307.0204

Transformer of Fan and SCR Firing Pulse 250VA

1

1

1

Transformer

0307.0212

Transformer of Fan and SCR Firing Pulse 650VA

1

1

Precharge Resistor

0301.9250

Vitrified Wire Resistor 35 R 75 W

6

6

6

8

8

Rectifier Bridge

0303.9544

Three-Phase Rectifier Bridge 35A 1400V

1

1

1

1

Electrolytic Capacitor

0302.4873

Electrolytic Capacitor 4700uF/400V

8

12

12

18

6431.3207

Centrifugal Fan 230V 50/60Hz

1

1

1

3

0305.5663

Ret. Fuse 1.6A 600V

2

2

2

0305.6112

Ret. Fuse 2.5A 600V

IGBT Module

Inverter Arm

Thyristor-Diode Module

Precharge

Fan
Fuses

6
6

6
9

12

12

3

3

12

12

3

3

1

1

1

10

10

10

1

1

1

1

18

24

30

30

3

3

3

3

3

9

3

2

2

2

2

2

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DPS2.00

S41510897

Driver and Power Supply Board DPS2.00

1

1

1

1

1

DPS2.01

S41511575

Driver and Power Supply Board DPS2.01

1

1

1

3

3

CC9.00

CRG2.00

S41512615

Gate Resistor Board CRG2X.00

CRG3X.01

S41512618

Gate Resistor Board CRG3X.01

CRG3X.00

S41512617

Gate Resistor Board CRG3X.00

CIP2.00

S41513217

CIP2A.00 Board

CIP2.01

S41513218

CIP2A.01 Board

240

3

3

3

3

3
3

1
1

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Type (Ampéres)
Especification

Item Nº

Name

180 211 240 312 361 450 515 600
Units per inverter

CIP2.02

S41513219

CIP2A.02 Board

CIP2.03

S41513220

CIP2A.03 Board

CIP2.04

S41513221

CIP2A.04 Board

CIP2.52

S41513228

CIP2A.52 Board

CIP2.53

S41513229

CIP2A.53 Board

CIP2.54

S41513230

CIP2A.54 Board

SKHI23MEC8

S41511532

Board SKHI23/12 for MEC8

SKHI23MEC10

S41511540

Board SKHI23/12 for MEC10

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

KMR-CFW09
CFI1.01

1
1
1
1
1
1
3

3

3
3

3

3

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNETBoard (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2
2

2

0307.2509
Current Transducers 0307.2550
0307.2070

Current Transformer 500A/250mA
Current Transformer 5000A/1A LT SI
Current Transformer 1000A/200mA LT 100SI

2

2

2

Models 500-600V
Name

Especification

Item No

Types (Ampéres)
2.9 4.2
7
10 12
Units per Inverter

14

1

5000.5291

Fan 0400.3217 Comp. 145mm (40x40)

5000.5435

Fan 2x400.3284 290/200mm (60x60)

CC9.00

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

CIF1.00

S41509929

Interface Board with HMI

CRP2.00

S41512862

Pulse Feedback Board

P02-6.00

S41512855

Power Board P02-6.00

1

P04-6.00

S41512856

Power Board P04-6.00

P07-6.00

S41512857

Power Board P04-6.00

P10-6.00

S41512858

Power Board P10-6.00

P12-6.00

S41512859

Power Board P12-6.00

P14-6.00

S41512860

Power Board P14-6.00

Fans

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1
1
1
1
1

241

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Especification

Item No

Name

Types (Ampéres)
2.9 4.2
7
10 12
Units per Inverter

14

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

CIF1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNet Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

Models 500-600V
Name

242

Especification

Item No

Types (Ampéres)
22
27
32
Units per Inverter

Fans

5000.5267

Fan 0400.2482 Comp. 150mm (80x80)

3

3

3

Fuse

0305.6716

Fuse 6.3x32 3.15A 500V

1

1

1

CC9.00

S41509651

Control Board CC9.00

1

1

1

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

CIF1.00

S41509929

Interface Board with HMI

1

1

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035

Kit KML

1

1

1

DPS4.00

S41512864

Driver and Power Supply Board

1

1

1

P22-6.01

S41512867

Power Board P22-6.01

1

P22-6.00

S41512866

Power Board P22-6.00

1

P27-6.01

S41512869

Power Board P27-6.01

1

*P27-6.00

S41512868

Power Board P27-6.00

1

P32-6.01

S41512872

Power Board P32-6.01

*P32-6.00

S41512871

Power Board P32-6.00

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

CIF1.01

S41510226

Interface Board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1
1

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Models 500-600V
Name

Especification

Item No

Types (Ampéres)
22
27
32
Units per Inverter

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNet Board (Optional)

1

1

1

* Only for types specified with braking (DB).

Models 500-600V
Name

Item No

Precharge Contactor

Especification

Types (Ampéres)
44 53 63
79
Units per Inverter

035506138
PrechargeTransform. 0299.0160
Precharge Resistor
0301.1852

Contactor CWM50.00 220V 50/60Hz

1

1

1

1

Preload Transformer

1

1

1

1

Vetrified Wire Resistor 20R 75W

1

1

1

1

Fan

0400.2547

Fan 220V 50/60Hz

1

1

1

1

0305.6166

Fuse 14x51mm 2A 690V

2

2

2

2

S417102024

HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

S41509651

Control Board CC9

1

1

1

1

S41509929

HMI Interface Board

1

1

1

1

S41512966

Driver and Power Supply Board DPS5.00

1

1

1

1

S41512990

Voltage Selection Board LVS2.00

1

1

1

1

S41512986

Board CB5D.00

S41413063

CB5E.00 Board

S41413081

CB5E.01 Board
1

Fuse
HMI-CFW09-LCD
CC9
CFI1.00
DPS5.00
LVS2.00
CB5D.00
CB5E.00
CB5E.01
KML-CFW09

1
1

1
1

S417102035

Kit KML

*P44-6.00

S41512968

Power Board P44-6.00

1

P44-6.01

S41512969

Power Board P44-6.01

1

S41512973

Power Board P53-6.00

1

S41512974

Power Board P53-6.01

1

S41512975

Power Board P63-6.00

1

S41512976

Power Board P63-6.01

1

S41512977

Power Board P79-6.00

*P53-6.00
P53-6.01
*P63-6.00
P63-6.01
*P79-6.00
P79-6.01

1

1

1

1

S41512978

Power Board P79-6.01

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023

HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036

Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41510226

HMI Interface Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01
EBA1.01
EBA1.02
EBA1.03

1

243

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Item No

Name
EBB.04
EBB.05
EBC1.01
EBC1.02
EBC1.03
SCI1.00

Types (Ampéres)
44 53 63
79
Units per Inverter

Especification

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNet Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

DC Link Inductor

0299.0156

DC Link Inductor 749 µH

1

DC Link Inductor

0299.0157

DC Link Inductor 562 µH

DC Link Inductor

0299.0158

DC Link Inductor 481µH

0299.0159

DC Link Inductor 321µH

DC Link Inductor

1
1
1

* Only for types specified with braking (DB).

Models 500-690V
Name

Especification

Item No

107 147 211

Types (Ampéres)
247 315 343 418 472

Units per inverter
IGBT Module

0298.0008

IGBT Module 200A 1700V

0298.0009

IGBT Module 300A 1700V

6
3

6

S417104460 Inverter Arm 247A – EP

6

9

12

3

S417104462 Inverter Arm 343A – EP

3

S417104463 Inverter Arm 418A – EP

3

S417104464 Inverter Arm 472A – EP

3

0303.9978

Thyristor-Diode Module TD250N16

0303.9986

Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16

0303.9994

Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16

Rectifier Bridge

0298.0026

Rectifier Bridge 36MT160

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Precharge Resistor

0301.9250

Vitrified Wire Resistor 35R 75W

6

6

6

8

8

8

8

10

64313207

Centrifugal Fan 230V 50/60Hz

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

0302.4873

Electrolytic Capacitor 4700uF/400V

9

12

12

18

18

18

0302.4801

Electrolytic Capacitor 4700uF/400V

18

27

0305.6166

Fuse2A 690V

2

2

2

0305.6171

Fuse 4 690V

Thyristor-Diode
Module

Fan
Electrolytic Capacitor

Fuse

244

12

3

S417104461 Inverter Arm 315A – EP
Inverter Arm

9

3

3

3

3

3

3
3
3

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

3
3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024 HMI LCD

1

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035 Kit KML

1

1

CC9

S41509651

Control Board CC9

1

DPS3

S41512834

Driver and Power Supply Board DPS3.00

1

CRG7

S41512951

Gate Resistor Board CRG7.00

3

CRG6

S41512798

Gate Resistor Board CRG6.00

FCB1.00

S41512821

Board FCB1.00

FCB1.01

S41512999

Board FCB1.01

FCB2

S41513011

Board FCB2.00

1

1

1

CIP3

S41512803

Board CIP3.00

1

1

1

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

Item No

Especification

107 147 211

Types (Ampéres)
247 315 343 418 472

Units per inverter
RCS3

S41512846

Rectifier Snubber Board RCS3.00

S41512836

Signal Interface Board CIS1.00

S41512883

Signal Interface Board CIS1.01

S41512884

Signal Interface Board CIS1.02

S41512885

Signal Interface Board CIS1.03

S41512886

Signal Interface Board CIS1.04

S41512887

Signal Interface Board CIS1.05

S41512888

Signal Interface Board CIS1.06

S41512889

Signal Interface Board CIS1.07

GDB1.00

S41512963

Gate Driver Board GDB1.00

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023 HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036 Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Funcion Expancion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNet Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CIS1

3

3

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Models 660-690V
Name

IGBT Module

Item No

Especification

0298.0008

IGBT Module 200A 1700V

0298.0009

IGBT Module 300A 1700V

Types (Ampéres)
100 127 179 225 259 305 340 428
Units per Inverter
6
3

6

S417104460 Inverter Arm 225A – EP

6

9

12

12

3

S417104461 Inverter Arm 259A – EP
Inverter Arm

9

3

S417104462 Inverter Arm 305A – EP

3

S417104463 Inverter Arm 340A – EP

3

S417104464 Inverter Arm 428A – EP

3

0303.9978

Thyristor-Diode Module TD250N16

0303.9986

Thyristor-Diode Module TD425N16

0303.9994

Thyristor-Diode Module TD500N16

Rectifier Bridge

0298.0026

Rectifier Bridge 36MT160

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Precharge Resistor

0301.9250

Vitrified Wire Resistor 35R 75W

6

6

6

8

8

8

8

10

Thyristor-Diode
Module

3

3

3

3

3

3
3
3

245

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Name

Fan
Electrolytic Capacitor

Fuse

Types (Ampéres)
100 127 179 225 259 305 340 428
Units per Inverter

6431.3207

Centrifugal Fan 230V 50/60Hz

1

1

1

3

3

3

0302.4873

Electrolytic Capacitor 4700uF/400V

9

12

12

18

18

18

0302.4801

Electrolytic Capacitor 4700uF/400V

0305.6166

Fuse 2A 690V

2

2

2

0302.6171

Fuse 4 690V

3

3

18

27

2

2

2

2

2

HMI-CFW09-LCD

S417102024 HMI LCD

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KML-CFW09

S417102035 Kit KML

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CC9

S41509651

Control Board CC9

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DPS3

S41512834

Driver and Power Supply Board DPS3.00

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CRG7

S41512951

Gate Resistor Board CRG7.00

3

3

3

3

CRG6

S41512798

Gate Resistor Board CRG6.00

S41512821

Board FCB1.00

S41512999

Board FCB1.01

FCB2

S41513011

Board FCB2.00

1

1

1

CIP3

S41512803

Board CIP3.00

1

1

1

RCS3

S41512846

Rectifier Snubber Board RCS3.00

S41512890

Signal Interface Board CIS1.08

S41512891

Signal Interface Board CIS1.09

S41512892

Signal Interface Board CIS1.10

S41512893

Signal Interface Board CIS1.11

S41512894

Signal Interface Board CIS1.12

S41512895

Signal Interface Board CIS1.13

S41512896

Signal Interface Board CIS1.14

S41512897

Signal Interface Board CIS1.15

GDB1.00

S41512963

Gate Driver Board GDB1.00

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

HMI-CFW09-LED

S417102023 HMI LED (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

KMR-CFW09

S417102036 Kit KMR (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

CFI1.01

S41510226

Interface board with HMI (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.01

S41510110

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.02

S41511761

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBA1.03

S41511770

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.01

S41510200

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.02

S41511788

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.03

S41511796

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.04

S41512671

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBB.05

S41512741

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.01

S41513174

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.02

S41513175

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

EBC1.03

S41513176

Function Expansion Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

SCI1.00

S41510846

RS-232 Module for PC (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Modbus RTU

S03051277

Anybus-DT Modbus RTU Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Profibus DP

S03051269

Anybus-S Profibus DP Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

DeviceNet

S03051250

Anybus-S DeviceNet Board (Optional)

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

FCB1

CIS1

246

Especification

Item No

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

8

CHAPTER
CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

This Chapter describes the optional devices that are available for the CFW-09
and the accessories that may be necessary in specific applications. Options
include the Expanded I/O Boards (EBA/EBB), LED-only Keypad, Remote
Keypad and Cables, Blank Cover, RS-232 PC Communication kit, The
accessories comprise: Encoder, Line Reactor, DC Bus Choke, Load Reactor
and RFI filter, boards for Fieldbus communication, kit for extractable assembling,
NEMA 4X/IP56 line, HD and RB and PLC board line.

8.1 I/O EXPANSION
BOARDS

The I/O expansion boards expand the function of the CC9 control board. There
are four different I/O expansion boards available and their selection depends
on the application and extended functions that are required. The four boards
cannot be used simultaneously. The difference between EBA and EBB option
boards is in the analog inputs/outputs. The EBC1 board is used for the encoder
connection. The EBE board is for RS-485 and motor PTC. A detailed description
of each board is provided below.

8.1.1 EBA
(I/O Expansion Board A)

The EBA board can be supplied in different configurations, combining some
specific features. The available configurations are show on table 8.1.

Included Features

EBA Board models - Code
EBA.01
EBA.02
EBA.03
A1
A2
A3

Power supply for incremental encoder:
isolated internal 12V source, differential input;

Available

Not available

Not available

Buffered encoder output signals: isolated input signal repeater, differential
output, available to external 5V to 15V power supply;

Available

Not available

Not available

Analog differential input (AI4): 14 bits (0.006% of the full scale range),
bipolar: -10V to +10V, (0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20)mA programmable;

Available

Not available

Available

2 Analog outputs (AO3/AO4): 14 bits (0.006% of the range [±10V])), bipolar:
-10V to + 10 V, programmable;

Available

Not available

Available

Isolated RS-485 serial port.

Available

Available

Not available

Digital Input (DI7): isolated, programmable, 24V;

Available

Available

Available

Digital Input (DI8) for special motor thermistor (PTC) function: actuation
3.9kΩ,release 1.6kΩ

Available

Available

Available

2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs (DO1/DO2): 24V, 50mA,
programmable;

Available

Available

Available

Table 8.1 - EBA board versions and included features

NOTE!
The use of the RS-485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard
RS-232 input - they can not be used simultaneously.

247

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Factory Default Function

Terminal XC4

PTC

RL ≥ 500 Ω

RL ≥ 500 Ω

1

NC

2

DI8

3

DGND (DI8)

4

DGND

5

DO1

6

COMMOM

7

DO2

8

24 Vdc

9

DI7

10
11
12

SREF
A-LINE
B-LINE

13

AI4 +

Not connected
Motor Thermistor Input 1 - PTC1 (P270=16
see figure 6.33). As DI normal see P270 figure 6.34.
Motor Thermistor Input 2 - PTC2 (P270=16
see figure 6.33). As DI normal P270 figure 6.34.
0V reference of the 24Vdc source
Transistor output 1: Not Used

Transistor Output 2: Not Used
Power Supply for the digital inputs/
outputs

Reference for RS-485
RS-485 A-LINE (-)
RS-485 B-LINE (+)

Analog input 4: Frequency Reference
Program P221=4 or P222=4

rpm

A

AI4 -

15

AGND

16

AO3

17

AGND

18

AO4

19

+V

20

COM 1

Actuation 3k9Ω Release:1k6Ω
Min. resistance: 100Ω
Reference to DGND (DI8) though a
249Ω resistor.
Grounded via a 249Ω resistor
Isolated, open collector, 24Vdc, 50mA
Max., required board (RL) ≥ 500Ω

Common point for Digital Input DI7
and Digital Outputs DO1 and DO2

Isolated Digital Input: Not used

14

Specifications

Isolated, open collector, 24Vdc, 50mA
Max. required board (RL) ≥ 500Ω
24Vdc ± 8%. Isolated,
Capacity: 90mA
Min. high level: 18Vdc
Max. low level: 3Vdc
Max. Voltage: 30Vdc
Input Current.: 11mA @ 24Vdc
Isolated RS-485 serial Port
Differential analog input programmable
on P246: -10V to +10V
or (0 to 20)mA / (4 to 20)mA
lin.: 14bits (0.006% of full scale range)
Impedance: 40kΩ [-10V to +10V]
500Ω [(0 to 20)mA / (4 to 20)mA]
Analog outputs signals:
-10 V to +10 V
Scales: see P255 and P257.
lin.: 14bits (0.006% of ± 10V range)
Required board (RL) ≥ 2kΩ

0V Reference for Analog Output
(internally grounded)
Analog output 3: Speed
0V Reference for Analog Output
(internally grounded)
Analog Output 4: Motor Current
Avaliable to be connected to an external External power supply: 5V to 15V
Consumption: 100 mA @ 5V
power supply to energise the encoder
Outputs not included.
repeater output (XC8)
0V reference of the external power supply
Figure 8.1 – XC4 Terminal Block description (EBA Board complete)

ENCODER CONNECTION: Refer to Section 8.2.
INSTALLATION
The EBA board is installed on the CC9 control board, secured with spacers
and connected via terminal blocks XC11 (24V*) and XC3.

NOTE!
For the CFW-09 Size 1 Models (6A, 7A, 10A and 13 A/220-230V and 3.6A,
4A, 5.5A and 9 A/380-480V) the plastic cover must be removed to install the
EBA board.
Mounting Instructions:
1. Set the board configuration via S2 and S3 dip switches (Refer to Table 8.2);
2. Carefully insert terminal block XC3 (EBA) into the female connector XC3
of the CC9 control board.
Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector;
248

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

3. Press on the EBA board (near XC3) and on the left top edge until complete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer;
4. Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided;
5. Plug XC11 connector of the EBA board to the XC11 connector of the
(CC9) control board.

EBA BOARD

CUTOUT

CUTOUT

Figure 8.2 - EBA Board layout

EBA BOARD

CC9 Board

M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque

Figure 8.3 - EBA Board installation procedure

249

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Switch

Function

S2.1
S3.1
S3.2

AI4 – Speed reference
RS-485 B-LINE (+)
RS-485 A-LINE (-)

OFF
(Standard)
(0 to 10) V

(0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20)mA

Without termination

With termination (120Ω)

ON

Obs.: Both S3.1 and S3.2 switches must be set for the same option (ON or OFF).
Note: For Size 1 models the CFI1 board (interface between the CC9 control board and the
HMI) must be removed to clear access to these switches.
Table 8.2 a) - EBA board selector switches configurations

Trimpot
RA1
RA2
RA3
RA4

Function
AO3 – Offset
AO3 – Gain
AO4 – Offset
AO4 – Gain

Factory default function
Motor Speed
Motor Current

Table 8.2 b) - Trimpots configurations EBA board

NOTE!
The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC4 (EBA ),
following the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board
CC9 (Refer to Section 3.2.6).

8.1.2 EBB
(Expansion I/O Board B)

The EBB board can be supplied in different configurations, combining the
features included. The available configurations are show table 8.3.

EBA Board models - code
EBB.02
EBB.03
EBB.04
B2
B3
B4*
Not
Available
Available
available

EBB.05
B5
Not
available

Available

Not
available

Not
available

Available

Not
available

Available

Not
available

Available

Available

Not
available

Available

Not
available

Available

Available

Available

Isolated RS-485 serial port.

Available

Not
available

Not
available

Available

Digital Input (DI7): isolated, programmable, 24V;

Available

Available

Available

Available

Digital Input (DI8) for special motor thermistor function
(PTC): actuation 3.9kΩ,release 1.6kΩ

Available

Available

Available

Available

Not
available

2 isolated Open Collector transistor outputs (DO1/DO2):
24V, 50mA, programmable;

Available

Available

Available

Available

Not
available

Included Features
Power supply for incremental encoder:
isolated internal 12V source, differential input;
Buffered encoder output signals: isolated input signal
repeater, differential output, must use to external 5V to
15V power supply;
Analog input (AI3): 10 bits, isolated, unipolar, (0 to 10)V,
(0 to 20)mA/(4 to 20)mA, programmable;
2 Analog outputs (AO1’/AO2’): 11 bits (0.05% of full
scale), unipolar, isolated (0 to 20) mA/(4 to 20) mA,
programmable;

EBB.01
B1
Available

Not
available
Not
available

* Board with 5 V souce for the encoder.
Table 8.3 – EBB board versions and included features

NOTE!
The use of the RS-485 serial interface does not allow the use of the standard
RS-232 input - they can not be used simultaneously.
The functions analogic outputs AO1’ and AO2’ are identical to the AO1/AO2
outputs of the control board CC9.
250

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Terminal XC5

PTC
R L ≥ 500Ω

Factory Default Function

1

NC

2

DI8

3

DGND (DI8)

4

DGND

5

DO1

6

COMMOM

7

DO2

8

24 Vdc

9

DI7

10

SREF

11

A-LINE

RS-485 A-LINE (-)

12

B-LINE

RS-485 B-LINE (+)

13

AI3 +

R L≥ 500Ω

Not Connected
Motor Thermistor Input 1 - PTC1 (P270=16
see figure 6.33). As DI normal see P270
figure 6.34.
Motor Thermistor Input 2 - PTC2 (P270=16
see figure 6.33). As DI normal see P270
figure 6.34.
0V reference of the 24 Vdc source
Transistor Output 1: Not used

Transistor Output 2: Not Used
Power Supply for the digital inputs/
outputs
Isolated digital input: Not Used

Referenced to DGND* trough a
249Ω resistor
Grounded via a 249Ω resistor
Isolated, open collector, 24Vdc, 50mA
Max. required board (RL) ≥ 500Ω

Isolated, open collector, 24Vdc, 50mA
Max. required board (RL) ≥ 500Ω
24Vdc ± 8%. Isolated,
Capacity: 90mA
Min. high level: 18Vdc
Max. low level: 3Vdc
Max. Voltage: 30Vdc
Input Current.: 11mA @ 24Vdc

Reference for RS-485

14

AI3 -

15

AGNDI

16

AO1 I

17

AGNDI

0V Reference for analog Output

18

AO2 I

Analog Output 2 : Motor Current

19

+V

Avaliable to be connected to an external
power supply to energise the encoder
repeater output (XC8)

20

COM 1

0V reference of the external power supply

A

Actuation: 3.9kΩ Release:1.6kΩ
Min: resistance: 100Ω

Commom point for Digital Input DI7
and Digital Outputs DO1 and DO2

Analog Input 3: Frequecy Reference
Program P221=3 or P222=3

rpm

Specifications

0V Reference for Analog Speed
Analog Output 1: Speed

Isolated RS-485 serial port

Isolated analog input programmable on
P243: (0 to 10)V or (0 to 20)mA/(4 to
20)mA lin.: 10 bits (0.1% of full scale
range) Impedance: 400kΩ (0 to 10)V
500Ω [(0 to 20)mA/(4 to 20)mA]
Isolated analog Outputs signals:
(0 to 20)mA / (4 to 20)mA
Scales: see P251 and P253
lin.: 11bits (0.5% of full scale range)
Required board (RL) ≤ 600Ω

External power supply: 5V to 15V,
consumption: 100 mA @ 5V
Outputs not included.

Figure 8.4 - XC5 Terminal Block description (complete EBB board)

ATTENTION!
The isolation of the analog input AI3 and the analog outputs AO1I and AO2I is
designed only to interrupt the ground loops. Do not connect these inputs to
high potentials.
ENCODER CONNECTION: Refer to Section 8.2.
INSTALLATION
The EBB board is installed on the CC9 control board, secured with spacers
and connected via Terminal blocks XC11 (24V) and XC3.

NOTE!
For the CFW-09 Size 1 Models (6A, 7A, 10A and 13A / 220-230V and 3.6A,
4A, 5.5A and 9A / 380-480V) the plastic cover must be removed to install the
EBB board.
251

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Mounting Instructions:
1. Set the board configuration via S4, S5, S6 and S7 dip switches (Refer to
Table 8.4 a) );
2. Carefully insert terminal block XC3 (EBB) into the female connector
XC3 of the CC9 control board. Check that all pins fit in the XC3 connector;
3. Press on the EBB board (near XC3) and on the left top edge until complete insertion of the connector and plastic spacer;
4. Secure the board to the metallic spacers with the screws provided;
5. Plug XC11 connector of the EBB board to the XC11 connector of the
(CC9) control board.

EBB BOARD

CUTOUT

CUTOUT

Figure 8.5 - EBB Board Layout

EBB BOARD

CC9 BOARD

M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque

Figure 8.6 - EBB Board Installation Procedure

252

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Switch
S4.1
S5.1 and S5.2
S6.1 and S6.2
S7.1 and S7.2

Function
AI3 – Speed reference
AO1 - Speed
AO2 – Motor Current
RS-485 B-Line (+)
RS-485 A-Line (-)

OFF
(0 to 10) V*

ON
(0 to 20) mA or (4 to 20) mA

(0 to 20) mA**

(4 to 20) mA*

Without termination*

With termination (120Ω)

*Factory default
Obs.: Each group of switches must be set for the same option (ON or OFF for both).
Ex.: S6.1 and 6.2 = ON.
**Factory default
When the outputs are set to (0 to 20) mA, it may be necessary to readjust the full scale.
Note: For Size 1 models the CFI1 board (interface between the CC9 control board and the HMI) must
be removed to clear access to these switches.
Table 8.4 a) - EBB board selector switches configurations

Trimpot
RA5

Function
AO1 – Full scale adjustment

Factory default function
Motor Speed

RA6

AO2 – Full scale adjustment

Motor Current

Table 8.4 b) - Trimpots configurations EBB board

NOTE!
The external signal and control wiring must be connected to XC (EBB), following
the same recommendations as for the wiring of the control board CC9 (Refer
to Section 3.2.6).

8.1.3 EBE

Please download from www.weg.net the EBE Board Quick Guide.

8.2

For applications that require high-speed accuracy, the actual motor speed
must be fed back via motor-mounted incremental encoder. The encoder is
connected electrically to the inverter through the XC9 (DB9) connector of the
Function Expansion Board - EBA or EBB and XC9 or XC10 to EBC.

INCREMENTAL
ENCODER

8.2.1 EBA/EBB Boards

When the board EBA or EBB is used, the selected encoder should have the
following characteristics:
Power supply voltage: 12 Vdc, less than 200 mA current draw;
2 quadrature channels (90º) + zero pulse with complementary outputs
(differential): signals A, A, B, B, Z and Z;
“Linedriver” or “Push-Pull” output circuit type (level 12V);
Electronic circuit isolated from encoder frame;
Recommended number of pulses per revolution: 1024 ppr;
For mounting the encoder on the motor, follow the recommendations bellow:
Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft (use a flexible coupling
without torsional flexibility);
Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically
isolated from the motor (min. Spacing: 3 mm (0.119 in));
Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation or
backlash;
The electrical connections must be made with shielded cable, maintaining a
minimum distance of about 25 cm (10 in) from other wires (power, control
cables, etc.). If possible, install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit.

253

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

At start-up, program Parameter P202 – Type of Control = 4 (Vector with
Encoder) to operate the motor with incremental encoder speed feedback.
For more details about Vector Control operation refer to Chapter 5.
The Expanded I/O Boards EBA and EBB are provided with externally powered,
isolated encoder output signals.
Connector XC9

Encoder Connector***
A

A

H

A

B

B

I

B

C

Z

J

red

Z

D

+VE

F

COM

E

3

A

blue
yellow

2

A

1

B

green
grey

9

B

8

Z

Descripition

Encoder Signals
12V
differential
(88C20)

pink

7

Z

white

4

+VE

Power Supply*

brown

6

COM

0V Reference**

5

NC

Ground

cable shield

G

CFW-09 EBA or EBB Board
Encoder

Max. Recommended lenght: 100m (300ft)

Connector XC9 (DB9 - Male)

* Power supply voltage 12Vdc / 220mA for encoder
** Referenced to ground via 1µF in parallel with 1kΩ
*** Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar. For other encoder modules,
check the correct connection to meet the required sequence.
Figure 8.7 – Encoder Cable

NOTE!
The max. permitted encoder frequency is 100 kHz.
Sequence of the encoder signals:
B

t
CFW-09 EBA or EBB Board

A

t
Motor running clockwise.

5

1
Connector XC8 (DB9 Female)
9

6

*For on external power supply: 5V to 15V
Consumption: 100 mA @ 5V, outputs not included.
Note.: Optionally, the external power supply can also be connected via:
XC4:19 and XC4:20 (EBA) or
XC5:19 and XC5:20 (EBB)
NOTE!
There is no internal power
supply for XC8 at EBA or EBB board.

Connector XC8
3

A

2

A

1

B

9

B

8

Z

7

Z

4

+V*

6

COM 1*

5

Figure 8.8 – Encoder signals repeater output

254

Descrition
Encoder Signals

Line Driver
differential
(88C30)
Average high level
current: 50 mA

Power Supply*
0 V Reference
Ground

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.2.2 EBC1 Board

When the board EBC1 is used, the selected encoder should have the following
characteristics:
Power Supply Voltage: 5 V to 15 V;
2 quadrature channels (90º) with complementary outputs (differential):
Signals A, A, B and B;
”Linedriver” or “Push-Pull” output circuit type (with identical level as the
power supply voltage);
Electronic circuit isolated from the encoder frame;
Recommended number of pulse per revolution: 1024 ppr;
INSTALLATION OF THE EBC BOARD
The EBC board is installed directly on the control board CC9, fixed by means
of spacers and connected through the XC3 connector.

NOTE!
For installation in the models of size 1, remove the lateral plastic cover of the
product.
Mounting instructions:
1. Insert carefully the pins of the connector XC3 (EBC1) into the female
connector XC3 of the control board CC9. Check if all pins of the connector
XC3 fit exactly;
2. Press on the board center (near to XC3) until the connector is inserted
completely.
3. Fix the board to the 2 metallic spacers by means of the 2 bolts;

Figure 8.9 - EBC Board Layout

EBC1 BOARD

CC9 BOARD

M3 x 8 Screw
1Nm Torque

Figure 8.10 - EBC1 Board Installation Procedures

255

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

CONFIGURATIONS
Expansion
Board
EBC1.01

Power
Supply
External 5V

Encoder
Voltage
5V

EBC1.02
EBC1.03

External 8 to 15V
Internal 5V
Internal 12V

8 to 15V
5V
12V

Customer
Action
Commutate switch S8 to ON, see
figure 8.9
None
None
None

Table 8.5 - EBC1 board configuration

NOTE!
The terminals XC10:22 and XC10:23 (see figure 8.9), should be used only for
encoder supply, when encoder power supply is not coming from DB9
connection.
MOUNTING OF THE ENCODER
For mounting the encoder on the motor, follow the recommendations below:
Couple the encoder directly to the motor shaft (use a flexible coupling
without torsional flexibility);
Both the shaft and the metallic frame of the encoder must be electrically
isolated from the motor. (min. spacing: 3mm (0.119 in));
Use high quality flexible couplings to prevent mechanical oscillation or
backlash;
The electrical connection must be made with shielded cable, maintaining a
minimum distance of about 254 mm (10 in) from other wiring (power, control
cables, etc.). If possible, install the encoder cable in a metallic conduit.
At start-up, program Parameter P202 - type of control - = 4 (vector with
encoder) to operate the motor with speed feedback throug incremental encoder.
For more details about Vector Control operation, refer to Chapter 5.
Connector
Encoder Connector***

26

A

25

A

1

28

B

Encoder Signal

green

9

27

B

(5 to 15V)

Z

8

-

Z

Z

7

-

Z

white

4

21, 22

+VE

Power Supply*

brown

6

23, 24

COM

0V Reference**

5

-

A

B

B

I

B

C
J

G

Description

2

H

E

Signal

3

A

F

XC10

blue
yellow

A

D

red

XC9

+VE
COM
NC

Ground

cable shield
CFW-09 EBC1 Board

Encoder

Max. Recommended lenght: 100m (300 ft)
*

Connector XC9 (DB9 - Male)

External Power Supply Voltage for encoder: 5 to 15 Vdc, consumption = 40 mA plus consumption of the
encoder
** 0V reference of the Power Supply Voltage
*** Valid pin position with encoder HS35B models from Dynapar. For other encoder models, check the
correct connection to meet the required sequence.
Figure 8.11 – EBC1 Encoder Input

256

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!
The Max. permitted encoder frequency is 100kHz.
Sequence of the encoder signals:
B

t

A

t
Motor running clockwise.

8.3 KEYPAD WITH
LED´s ONLY

The CFW-09 standard Keypad (HMI) is provided with LED´s and LCD display.
It can also be supplied with an LED Display only.
In this case the keypad model number is: HMI-CFW-09-LED. It operates in
the same way as the standard keypad, but it does not show the text messages
of the LCD and does not provide the copy function.
The dimensions and the electrical connections are the same as for the standard
keypad. Refer to Section 8.4.

Figure 8.12 - Keypad with LED display only

8.4 REMOTE KEYPAD
AND CABLES

The CFW-09 keypad (both the standard or the LED display only) can be installed
directly on the inverter cover or remotely. If the keypad is installed remotely,
the HMI-09 Frame can be used. The use of this frame improves the visual
aspect of the remote keypad, as well as provides a local power supply to
eliminate voltage drop problems with long cables. It is necessary to use the
frame when the keypad cable is longer than 5 m (15 ft).
The table below shows the standard cable lengths and their part numbers:
Cable Length
WEG Part No
0307.6890
1 m (3 ft)
0307.6881
2 m (6 ft )
3 m (10 ft)
0307.6873
5 m (15 ft)
0307.6865
7.5m *(22 ft)
0307.6857
10 m * (30 ft )
0307.6849
* These cabes require the use of the remote
HMI-09 frame
Table 8.6 - CFW-09 keypad cables

The keypad cable must be installed separately from the power cables, following
the same recommendations as for the CC9 control board (refer to section
3.2.6).
For assembling see details in figure 8.13 and 8.14.
257

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.13 - Standard HMI, remote HMI frame kit and HMI CFW09 – LCD N4 for panel
installation

To meet NEMA 250 and IEC 60529 the HMI can be supplied with two
specific degrees of protection:
a) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD with NEMA 5-IP51 degree of protection.

Keypad Dimensions
23
(0.9)

113
(4.45)

65
(2.56)

19
(0.75)

Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation

Screw M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm

5
(0.2)

18
(0.71)

65
(2.56)

5
(0.2)

Back View

35
(1.43)
2 (0.08)
15
(0.59)

16
(0.63)
103
(4.05) 113
(4.45)

Front View

4.0 (2x)

Figure 8.14 a) - Keypad dimensions in mm (inch) and mounting procedures

258

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

b) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD + remote HMI frame kit with NEMA5-IP51 degree
of protection.
Keypad Dimensions
43
(1.69)
25
(0.984)

175
(6.89)

Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation
4 (5x)

73
(2.874)

74
(2.913)

8
(0.354)

Back View

45
(1.77)
37
(1.456)

Screw
M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm

119
(4.685)

Front View

18
(0.708)

113
(4.45)

112
(4.41)

37
42

(1.456)
(1.653)
84
(3.3)

c) Dimensions of the HMI – CFW09 – LED/LCD-N4 with NEMA 4-IP56 degree of protection.

Keypad Dimensions
43
(1.69)

18
(0.708)

Cutout Dimensions for Panel
Door Installation
8
(0.354)
45
(1.77)
37
(1.456)

Screw
M3x8 (2x)
Torque 0.5Nm

4 (5x)

73
(2.874)

119
(4.685)

Back View

74
(2.913)

175
(6.89)

Front View

25
(0.984)

113
(4.45)

112
(4.41)

37
42

(1.456)
(1.653)
84
(3.3)

Figure 8.14 b) c) - Keypad dimensions in mm (inch) and mounting procedures

259

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Remote HMI connection for distances higher than 10m (30 ft):
key pad (HMI)

HMI

Inverter

Inverter

Insert spacer to connect
the cable to the inverter.
Max. recommended cable length: 10m (30ft)

Connector DB9 - Male

Connector DB9 - Female

Figure 8.15 - Cable for remote keypad connection ≤ 10m
CABLE CONNECTION 5m ≤ (15 ft)
Connector Pin/ Connector Pin/
HMI Side
Inverter Side
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
8
8
9
9
Note: The frame can be used or not.

Signal
+5V
Rx
Tx
GND
+15V
SHIELD

Table 8.7 - Connections for remote keypad
cable up to 5 m (15 ft).
CABLE CONNECTION >5m (>15 ft)
Connector Pin/ Connector Pin/
Signal
HMI Side
Inverter Side
Rx
2
2
Tx
3
3
GND
4
4
+15V
8
8
SHIELD
9
9
Note: The frame must be used.
Table 8.8 - Connections for remote keypad
cable from 7.5 m (22 ft) to 10 m (30 ft).

Remote HMI connection for distances farther than 10m (30 ft):

- Screw
- Do not use nut and washer.

IHM

Inversor

The HMI can be connected to the inverter using a cable length up to 200 m
(600 ft). It is necessary to use an external power supply of 15Vdc, according
to figure 8.16.

GND +15V @ 300mA

External power supply
Figure 8.16 - Cable for remote keypad connection > 10m

260

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Connector Pin/
Inverter Side
2
3
9

CABLE CONNECTION
Connector Pin/
HMI Side
2
3
4
8 (Ext. power supply)
9 (Ext. power supply)

Signal
Rx
Tx
GND
+15V
Shield

Table 8.9 - Pin connection (DB9) for
cable > 10m (32,80 ft ) and ≤ 200 m (656 ft).

8.5 BLANK COVERS

As shown in Figure 8.17, two types of blank covers are available to be used, in
the inverter or in the frame, when the keypad is not in place.

a) CFW-09 Blank Cover
(to be mounted in the frame)

b) CFW-09 Blank Cover with Power
and Error LED’s
(to be mounted in the inverter)

Figure 8.17 a) b) – CFW-09 Blank Covers

8.6 RS-232 PC
COMMUNICATION KIT

The CFW-09 can be controlled, programmed and monitored via an RS-232
Serial Interface. The communication protocol is based on question/response
telegrams according to ISO 1745 and ISO 646 standards, with ASCII characters
exchanged between the inverter and a master (network controller, which can
be a PLC, PC, etc.).The maximum transfer rate is 9600 bps. The RS-232
serial interface is not galvanically isolated from the 0V reference of the inverter electronics, therefore the maximum recommended serial cable length is
10m (30ft).
To implement the serial communication, an RS-232 SERIAL INTERFACE
module has to be added to the CFW-09. This module is installed in place of
the Keypad, making the RS-232 connection (RJ11 connector) available. If the
use of the HMI is also required, the RS-232 module also provides its connection.

261

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.18 - RS-232 module

The RS-232 PC Communication Kit which allows the connection of the CFW09 to a PC via the RS-232 interface is composed of:
RS-232 Serial Interface Module;
3 m (10 ft) Cable for RJ-11 to DB9 connection;
SuperDrive Software for Windows for CFW-09 programming, operation and
monitoring. See hardware and system needs for SuperDrive.
To install the RS-232 PC communication kit, proceed as follows:
Remove the keypad (HMI) from the inverter;
Install RS-232 Serial Interface Module in place of the keypad;
Install the SuperDrive software in the PC. Consult the on-line help or
installation guide;
Use the cable to connect the inverter to the PC;
Follow the SuperDrive software instructions. Consult the on-line help or
installation guide.

8.7 LINE REACTOR /
DC BUS CHOKE

262

Due to the input circuit characteristic, common to all passive front end inverters
available in the market, which consists of a six diode rectifier and capacitor
bank, the input current (drained from the power supply line) of inverters is non
sinusoidal and contains harmonics of the fundamental frequency.
These harmonic currents circulate through the power supply line, causing
harmonic voltage drops which distort the power supply voltage of the inverter
and other loads connected to this line. These harmonic current and voltage
distortions may increase the electrical losses in the installation, overheating
components (cables, transformers, capacitor banks, motors, etc.), as well as
a lowering power factor.
The harmonic input currents depend on the impedance values that are present
in the rectifier input/output circuit. The addition of a line reactor and/or DC bus
choke reduces the current harmonic content, providing the following advantages:
Increased input power factor;
Reduced RMS input current;
Reduced power supply voltage distortion;
Increased life of the DC link capacitors.

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

The Line Reactor and the DC Bus Choke, when properly sized, have practically
the same efficiency in reducing the harmonic currents. The DC Bus Choke
has the advantage of not introducing a motor voltage drop, while the Line
Reactor is more efficient to attenuate power supply voltage transients.
DC Link Inductor equivalent to the line reactor is:
LDC- EQUIVALENT = LAC X

3

NOTE!
The 44A to 79A/500-600V, 107A to 472A/500-690V and 100A to 428A/660690V models have a DC link inductor built in the standard version. It is not
necessary to have minimun supply impedance or add external line inductors
for protecting these models.

8.7.1 Application Criteria

The line reactor or the DC Link Inductor shall be applied when required
impedance is insufficient for limiting the input current peaks, thus preventing
damages to the CFW-09. The minimum required impedances, expressed as
impedance drop in percent are following:
a) For the model with rated current ≤ 130A/220-230V, ≤ 142A/380-480V or ≤
32A/500-600V: drop of 1% for the line voltage;
b) For the model with rated current ≥180A/380-480V: drop of 2% for the line
voltage;
c) For models with rated current ≥ 44A/500-600V or ≥ 107A/500-690V or ≥
100A/660-690V: there is no requirement for the minimum required line
impedance for the CFW-09 protection. These impedances are ensured by
the internal existing DC choke. The same is applicable when DC link
inductor is incorporated into the product (Special Hardware - Code HC or
HV), in the models with currents ≥ 16A/220-230V or ≥ 13A/380-480V and
≤ 240A/380-480V.
As an alternative criteria, a line reactor should be added when the inverter
supply transformer has a rated power higher than indicated below:
CFW-09 Rated Current/
volts
6A to 28A/220-230V
3.6A to 24A/380-480V
2.9A to 14A/500-600V
45A to 130A/220-230V
30A to 142A/380-480V
22A to 32A/500-600V
180A to 600A/380-480V

Transformer
Power [kVA]
125

5 X Inverter Rated Power
2 X Inverter Rated Power

Table 8.10 - Line reactor usage criteria

To determine the line reactor needed to obtain the desired voltage drop,
use equation below:
L=

Voltage Drop [%] x Line Voltage [V]
3 x 2 π Line Freq [Hz] x Rated Cur.[A]

[H]

263

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The electrical installation of an input line reactor is shown on Figure 8.19 a).
For CFW-09 sizes above 16 A/220-230V or 13 A/380-480V, the connection of
a DC Bus Choke is possible. The DC bus choke connection is also possible
in all 2.9A to 32A/500-600V models. Figure 8.19 b) shows this connection.

PE R S T U V W PE

PE

R
S
T
AC Input Disconnect
Fuses
Reactor
Switch
Figure 8.19 a) – Line reactor connection

PE R S T

U V W PE

+UD DCR

DC Bus
Choke
AC Input

Figure 8.19 b) – DC Bus Choke connection

264

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.7.2 DC Link Inductor Built in

The following CFW-09 inverter models, can be fitted with an inductor at the DC
Link already incorporated into the product:
Models ≥ 16A/220-230V, Models ≥ 13A/380-480V and Models ≤ 240A/380480V.
To request the inverter with an inductor already assembled, please add the
code “HC” (for inverter operating at constant torque) or “HV” (for inverter operating
with variable torque) in the model CFW-09, in the option field “Special Hardware”
(see Item 2.4).
NOTE!
Remember that the operation at higher currents than the rated current in variable
Torque mode is not possible with all inverter types (see Item 9.1.2 and Item
9.1.3). Thus the HV option is only possible with the types that can be operated
in that situation.

CFW-09 with DC link inductor

Sizes 2 to 8

Dimensions mm (inch)
Model

L

H

P

B

Size 2

160

120

105.5

-

(6.30)

(4.72)

(4.15)

153

137

134

(6.02)

(5.39)

(5.27)

180

172

134

(7.08)

(6.77)

(5.27)

265

193.5

134

(10.43)

(7.57)

(5.27)

265

212.5

159

(10.43)

(8.36)

(6.25)

325

240

221.5

80.5

(12.79)

(9.44)

(8.72)

(3.16)

Size 3
Size 4
Size 5
Size 6-7
Size 8

-

Table 8.11 - CFW-09 with DC link inductor
dimensions.

265

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The use of a three-phase load reactor, with an approximate 2% voltage drop
decreases the dv/dt (voltage rising rate) of the PWM pulses commonly generated
at the inverter output of any AC frequecy converter.
This practice reduces the voltage spikes on the motor windings and leakage
currents that may be generated when long distance cables between inverter
and motor are used.
There are many factors that influence the peak level (Vp) and rise time (tr) of
voltage spikes. Cable type, cable length, motor size, switching frequency and
other variables all affect Vp and dv/dt.
WEG recommends using a load reactor when V supply > 500V, though this is
not always required. WEG, as specialists in both VSD’s and motors are able
to provide an integrated solution. The load reactor value is calculated in the
same way as the line reactor (See item 8.7.1).
If the cables between inverter and motor are longer than 100 m (300 ft), the
cable capacitance to ground may cause nuisance overcurrent (E00) or ground
fault (E11) trips. In this case it is also recommended to use a load reactor.

8.8 LOAD REACTOR

PE R

S

T

U V W PE

AC
Input
Load reactor near
the inverter

Figure 8.20 – Load reactor connection

8.9 RFI FILTER

266

The installation of frequency inverters requires certain care in order to prevent
electromagnetic interference (EMI). This interference may disturb the operation
of the inverter itself or other devices, such as, electronic sensors, PLCs,
transducers, radio equipment, etc.
To avoid these problems, follow the installation instructions contained in this
Manual. Never install electromagnetic noise generating circuits such as input
power and motor cables near analog signal or control cables.
Care should also be taken with the radiated interference, by shielding the
cables and circuits that tend to emit electromagnetic waves and cause
interference.
The electromagnetic interference can also be transmitted through the power
supply line. This type of interference is minimized in the most cases by
capacitive Radio Frequency Filters (common and differential mode) which are
already installed inside the CFW-09. However, when inverters are installed in
residential areas, the installation of an external additional filter may be required.
In this case contact WEG to select the most suitable filter type.

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Driving Panel

CFW-09
Conduit or
shielded cable

Filter

MOTOR

Supply
Line
PE

PE

Earth

install it as near as
possible the
inverter

Motor
Earth
(Frame)

Figure 8.21 – RFI Filter connection

Instructions for the RFI filter installation:
Install the inverter and the filter on a metallic grounded plate as near
to each other as possible and ensure a good electrical contact between
the grounded plate and the inverter and filter frames;
If the cable between inverter and filter is longer than 30 cm (12 in), use a
shielded cable and ground each shield end on the grounded mounting plate.

NOTE!
Installations that must meet the European standards, see item 3.3.

8.10 DYNAMIC BRAKING

The amount of braking torque that can be generated when a motor is controlled
by an inverter, without dynamic braking or any other braking schemes, varies
from 10% to 35% of the motor rated torque.
During the deceleration process, the kinetic energy of the load is regenerated
into the inverter’s DC Link. This energy loads up the capacitors increasing the
DC Link voltage. When this energy is not fully dissipated, it may generate a
DC Link overvoltage trip (E01).
To obtain higher braking torque, the use of Dynamic Braking, where the excess
regenerated energy is dissipated in an external resistor, is recommended .
The Dynamic Braking is used in cases where short braking times are required
or where high inertia loads are driven.
For Vector Control modes the “Optimal Braking” feature can be used and in
many cases eliminate the need for Dynamic Braking. Refer to Chapter 6,
Parameter P151.

NOTE!
If dynamic braking will be used, set P151 to its maximum value.

8.10.1 DB Resistor Sizing

For a precise sizing of the dynamic braking resistor, application data, such
as: deceleration time, load inertia and braking duty cycle must be considered.
The RMS current capacity of the inverter’s dynamic braking transistor must
also be taken into account, as well as its maximum peak current, which
defines the minimum resistance value (ohms) of the braking resistor. Refer to
Table 8.12.
The DC Link voltage level at which dynamic braking is activated is defined by
the Parameter P153 – Dynamic Brake Level.

267

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The braking resistor is defined according to the deceleration time, load inertia
and resistive torque. In most cases a resistor with an ohmic value indicated on
Table 8.12 and a power rating of 20% of the driven motor can be used.
Use Wire type resistors with suitable insulation to withstand the instantaneous
current peaks.
For critical applications with very short braking times, high inertia loads (Ex:
centrifuges) or with very short and frequent duty cycles, contact WEG, to define
the most suitable resistor.
Maximum

CFW-09 Model
Power Supply
Voltage [V]

Rated
Current [A]

39

1.3

7 and 10

15

6.1

27

20

8.8

10

2.2

22

4.0 - 12

24

26

10.1

13

2.5

15

6.0 - 10

38

14.4

18

3.2

10

10 - 8

45

17.4

22

4.2

8.6

10 - 8

54

95

42.4

48

10.8

4.7

35 - 3

70 and 86

28
45

10

3.9

120

47.5

60

11.9

3.3

50 - 1

105 and 130

180

71.3

90

17.8

2.2

95 - 3/0

3.6 and 4

6

3.6

3.5

1.2

100

2.5 - 14

5.5

8

5.5

4

1.4

86

2.5 - 14

9 and 13

16

10.0

10

3.9

39

4.0 - 12

24

15.6

14

5.3

27

6.0 - 10

34

20.8

21

7.9

18

10 - 8

48

34.6

27

10.9

15

10 - 8

78

52.3

39

13.1

8.6

25 - 4

120

80.6

60

20.1

5.6

50 - 1

86 and 105

180

126.4

90

31.6

3.9

95 - 3/0

142

250

168.8

125

42.2

2,7

120 - 4/0

6

4.3

3.5

1.5

120

2.5 - 14

8

6.4

4

1.6

100

2.5 - 14

16

12.0

10

4.7

47

4.0 - 12

24

19.0

14

6.5

33

6.0 - 10

34

25.4

21

9.7

22

10 - 8

48

41.5

27

13.1

18

10 - 8

38 and 45

78

60.8

39

15.2

10

25 - 4

60 and 70

120

97.9

60

24.5

6.8

50 - 1

86 and 105

180

152.3

90

38.1

4.7

95 - 3/0

142

250

206.3

125

51.6

3.3

120 - 4/0

2.9 and 4.2

8.33

12

4.2

2.08

120

2.5 - 14

7

10

10

5

2.5

100

2.5 - 14

10

12.2

12.81

6.1

3.05

82

2.5 - 14

12

14,71

20.83

7.4

3.68

68

4.0 - 12

14

14.71

15.3

7.4

3.68

68

2.5 - 14

337.5

33.33

16.67

15

95 - 3/0

24
30
38 and 45

3.6 and 4
5.5
9 and 13
16

500-525
and
575-600

0.97

13 and 16

60 and 70

440-460
and
480

(1)

Power Wiring
(BR, -UD, +UD)
mm² - AWG

Prated
[kW] (3)

2.5 - 14
2.5 - 14

16
380
and
400-415

Current [A]

[kW] (3)

Minimum
recommended
resistor
[ohms]

RMS Braking
Current [A] (2)

5
7

6

220-230

Pmax

Braking

24
30

22, 27 and 32

66.67

44 and 53

100

225

50

25

10

95 - 3/0

63 and 79

121.95

184.5

61

30.49

8.2

95 - 3/0

Table 8.12 - Recommended Braking Resistor

268

(1) The maximum current can be determined by:
Imax = Value set at P153[V] / Resistor Ohms

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

(2) The RMS braking current can be calculated by
Irms = Imax .

tbr[min]
5

Where tbr corresponds to the sum of the braking

times during the most severe 5 minute cycle.
(3) Pmax and Prated are the maximum peak and rated powers that the braking
chopper can deliver. The resistor power must be sized according to the
application braking duty cycle.

8.10.2 Installation

Connect the braking resistor between the +UD and BR power terminals
(refer to section 3.2.1);
Make this connection with a twisted pair. Run this cable separately from
any signal or control wire;
Size the cable cross section according to the application, considering
the maximum and RMS current;
If the braking resistor is installed inside the inverter panel, consider the
heat dissipated by the resistor when defining the panel ventilation;
Set Parameter P154 to the Ohms value of the DB resistor and Parameter
P155 to the resistor power rating in kW.

DANGER!
The CFW-09 provides an electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor
to avoid overheating. The braking resistor and the transistor can be damaged if:
They are not properly sized;
Parameters P153, P154 and P155 are not properly set;
The line voltage exceeds the maximum allowed value.
The electronic thermal protection provided by the inverter, if properly
programmed, protects the DB resistor in case of overloads not expected during
normal operation, but it does not ensure protection in case of a dynamic
braking circuit failure.
In this case the only guaranteed method to avoid burning the resistor and
eliminate risk of fire is the installation of a thermal overload relay in series with
the resistor and/or the installation of a thermostat on the resistor body, wiring
it in a way to disconnect the inverter power supply is case of overheating, as
shown below:
CFW-09

Contactor
or
Circuit Breaker
Power
Supply

BR

Control Power
Supply

+UD

Overload
Relay

Thermostat
Braking
Resistor
Figure 8.22 – Braking resistor connection

NOTE!
Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct
Current during the DC-Braking process.
269

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.10.3 Dynamic Braking module - In the CFW-09 220-230V or 380-480V types with currents higher or equal to
180A, dynamic braking uses the DBW-01 external braking module. For 500DBW-01 and DBW-02
690V and 660-690V with currents higher or equal 100A, dynamic braking
uses the DBW-02 external braking module.

Supply Voltage
[V]

380-480V

500-690V /
660-690V

Power Wiring
(BR, -UD,+UD)
mm2 (AWG)

Module

Max. Braking
Current
A (1)

RMS Braking
Current
A (2)

180A

DBW010165D21802SZ

200

165

4

70 (2/0)

211A

DBW010240D21802SZ

320

240

2.5

120 (250 MCM)

240A

DBW010240D21802SZ

320

240

2.5

120 (250 MCM)

312A

DBW010300D21802SZ

400

300

2

2x50 (2x1/0)

361A

DBW010300D21802SZ

400

300

2

2x50 (2x1/0)

450A

DBW010300D21802SZ

400

300

2

2x50 (2x1/0)

515A

DBW010300D21802SZ

400

300

2

2x50 (2x1/0)

600A

DBW010300D21802SZ

400

300

2

2x50 (2x1/0)

100A/107A

DBW020210D5069SZ

250

210

4.8

120( 250MCM)

127A/147A

DBW020210D5069SZ

250

210

4.8

120 (250MCM)

179A/211A

DBW020210D5069SZ

250

210

4.8

120 (250MCM)

225A/247A

DBW020210D5069SZ

250

210

4.8

120 (250MCM)

259A/315A

DBW020300D5069SZ

400

300

3

2x50 (2x1/0)

305A/343A

DBW020300D5069SZ

400

300

3

2x50 (2x1/0)

340A/418A

DBW020380D5069SZ

500

380

2.5

2x120 (2x250MCM)

428A/472A

DBW020380D5069SZ

500

380

2.5

2x120 (2x250MCM)

Inverter

Braking

Types

Minimum
Resistor
Ω (3)

Table 8.13 - Inverter and corresponding DBW

(1)The max. current can be calculated by:
Imax= set value at P153[V]/value of the resistor [ohms].
(2)The rms braking current can be calculated by:
Irms = Imax .

tbr[min]

where tbr corresponds to the sum of the braking
5
actuation times during the most severe 5-minute cycle.
(3)The minimum resistor value of each shown model has been calculated
so the braking current does not exceed the maximum current specified
in table 8.13.
For this, following parameters have been considered
- DBW-01: rated line voltage = 480V.
- DBW-02: rated line voltage = 690V.
- Factory Standard Value of P153.
HOW TO SPECIFY THE DBW TYPE:
DBW-01

0165

D

2180

1

S

Z

WEG Braking
Module:
DBW-01

Rated Output Current:
220 to 480V:
0165=165A
0240=240A
0300=300A
0210=210A
0380=380A

DC Supply
at Input

Input Supply Voltage:
2180=210 to
800 Vdc

Fan Supply Voltage:
1=110V rms
2=220V rms

Standard

Code End

DBW-02

270

5069=500 to
1200 Vdc

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.10.3.1

DBW-01 and DBW-02
Identification Label

Hardware Revision

DBW Type
Rated Output

Serial Number

Front View

WEG Item No

Manufacturing Date

A - View

A

Figure 8.23 - Identification Label

8.10.3.2 Mechanical Installation

The environmental operating conditions of the DBW are the same as of the
CFW-09 inverter (see item 3.1.1).
For panel installation, provide an additional airflow of 120 CFM (57 L/s) for
cooling of the braking module.
When installing module, provide free spaces around the module, as shown in
Figure 8.24, where A=100mm (4 in), B=40mm (1.57 in) and C=130mm (5.12 in).

Figure 8.24 - Free Spaces for Cooling

271

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Check the other recommendations for the CFW-09 inverter installation, since
from the mechanical viewpoint, the module is compatible with CFW-09 frame
size 3.
External dimensions and mounting holes are according to Figure 8.25.

Dimension A
mm (in)

DBW-01
252 (9.92)

DBW-02
277 (10.91)

Figure 8.25 - Dimensional Drawing of DBW-01 and DBW-02 - mm (inch)

Figure 8.26 - Installation procedures for the DBW-01 and DBW-02 on surface

272

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Air Flow
Figure 8.27 - DBW-01 and DBW-02 Positioning

The DBW-01 and DBW-02 can also be installed with a through surface mounting
kit as described in item 8.11. In this case, use the available installation kit,
which contains the respective installation supports. Figure 8.28 shows the
mounting cutouts.

Figure 8.28 - Cutout dimensions in air duct - Dimensiones mm (inch)

Table 8.14 shows the weights of the different DBW-01 types.
Type

Fastening Screw

Weigth Kg

DBW-01 165

14.2

DBW-01 240

13.8
13.4

DBW-01 300
DBW-02 210

M6

Degree of
Protection

IP20

14.2

DBW-02 300

13.8

DBW-02 380

13.4

Table 8.14 - Mechanical Data of the DBW-01 and DBW-02

273

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.10.3.3 Installation/Connection

Location of the power connections is shown in Figures 8.29, 8.30 and 8.31.

X7
+UD

BR

-UD
Figure 8.29 - Connection location

Figure 8.30 - Power terminals

o

t

M
1~
X7
1

2

3

4

Figure 8.31 - X7 Terminal block

274

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Supply the fan of the braking module with the suitable supply voltage (110 V
or 120 V rms) at X7:1,2 connector (see Figure 8.32). The fan has a requires a
current of about 0.14A. The terminals 3 and 4 of the terminal bock X7 are the
NC-contact of a thermostat that must be installed for the thermal protection of
the braking module. This protection must be installed external to the braking
module (see Figure 8.32); in this example, the relay is connected to DI3 (XC1:3,9
of the board CC9) and the parameter P265 is programmed as Without External
Error (P265=4).

o

t

M
1~

X7
1

2

3

4

Figure 8.32 - Example of Thermal Protection

Connect the +UD grounding of the braking module to the +UD terminal of the
inverter;
Connect the -UD grounding of the braking module to the -UD terminal of the
inverter;
The control connection between the CFW-09 and the braking module is made
through a cable (0307.7560). One end of this cable is connected to the XC3
connector that can be found at the CRG4 board (see figure 8.33 ) in the braking
module. The other end of this cable is connected to a DB9 connector that is
fastened to a metallic support at the side of the control board in the CFW-09.

XC3

Figure 8.33 -Location of the XC3 connector

275

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.34 shows the connection of the braking module to the inverter, as
well as the connections of the resistor to the braking module. It shows also
the inclusion of a thermal relay and a thermostat in contact with the resistor
body, thus ensuring its thermal protection. The connection cables between
the inverter and the module and between the module the braking resistor
must be dimensioned according to the thermal braking cycle.
CFW-09
DBW-01/02

Thermal
Protection
XC1: 9.3
P265 = 4

Cable 2.3m
0307.7560

XC3

XC3

Contactor
R
S
T

Supply
Network

Fan
110 or 220V

Thermal
Relay
Fan
110 or 220V
DIx (CC9)
No External
Fault

Thermostat

Braking
Resistor

Control
Supply
Figure 8.34 - Connections between the DBW, the CFW-09 and the Braking Resistor

NOTE!
Through the power contacts of the bimetallic overload relay circulates Direct
Current during the DC-Braking process.
The DBW-02 has a duplicated XC3 connector (A and B). The XC3B is for
connecting other DBW-02 module for parallel operation. It is possible to
connect up to 3 DBW-02 modules in parallel. The interconnecting cable
should be limited to 2 meters maximum cable lenght.

8.11 THROUGH SURFACE
MOUNTING KIT

The kit for through surface mounting is composed of metallic supports that
must be mounted on the rear of the CFW-09 frames 3 to 8 to allow through
surface mounting. For further information refer to Section 3.1.3, Figure 3.4 and
Table 3.4. Degree of protection is NEMA 1/IP20.

8.12 FIELDBUS

CFW-09 can be connected to fieldbus networks allowing it's control and
parameter setting. For this purpose you need to include an optional electronic
board according to the desired Fieldbus standard: Profibus-DP, DeviceNet or
Ethernet/IP.

276

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!
The chosen Fieldbus option can be specified in the suitable field of the CFW09 coding.
In this case the CFW-09 will be supplied with all needed components already
installed in the product. For later installation you must order and install the
desired Fieldbus kit (KFB).

8.12.1 Installation of the
Fieldbus kit

The communication board that forms the Fieldbus Kit is installed directly onto
the CC control board, connected to the XC140 connector and fixed by spacers.

NOTE!
Follow the Safety Notices in Chapter 1
If a Function Expansion Board (EBA/EBB) is already installed, it must
be removed provisionally. For the frame size 1 you must remove the
lateral plastic cover of the product.
1. Remove the bolt from the metallic spacer near to the XC140 (CC9)
connector.
2. Connect carefully the pin connector of the Fieldbus board to the female
connector XC140 of the CC9 control board. Check the exact
coincidence of all pins of the XC140 connector (Figure 8.35).

Board Devicenet
Board Profibus-DP

Section AA

Board CC9

A
A

M3x8 Bolt
Torque 1Nm

Figure 8.35 - Installation of the Electronic Board of the Fieldbus

277

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

3. Press the board near to XC140 and on the lower right edge until the
connector and the plastic spacer is inserted completely;
4. Fix the board to the metallic spacer through the bolt (except ModBus RTU);
5. Fieldbus Connector:
Sizes 1 and 2 (Models up to 28A):
- Fix the Fieldbus connector to the inverter frame by using the 150 mm (5.9 in)
cable (see figure 8.36).

Figure 8.36 - Fastening of the Fieldbus connector

278

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Sizes 3 to 10 - (models up to 30A):
- Connect the Fieldbus connector to the metallic “L” by using the 150mm
(5.9 in).
- Fasten the set to the metallic support palte of the control board (see
8.37).

Figure 8.37 - Fastening of the Fieldbus connector

6. Connect the other cable end of the Fieldbus connector to the electronic
Fieldbus board, as shown in Figure 8.38.

DEVICENET

PROFIBUS - DP

Figure 8.38 - Connection to the Fieldbus board

279

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.12.2 Profibus-DP

Introduction
The inverter that is fitted with the Profibus-DP Kit operates in slave mode,
allowing the reading/writing of their parameters through a master. The inverter
does not start the communication with other nodes, it only answers to the
master controls. A twisted pair of copper cable realizes the connection of the
Fieldbus (RS-485) allowing the data transmission at rates between 9.6kbits/s
and 12Mbits/s. Figure 8.39 show a general view of a Profibus-DP network.

PROFIBUS DP
Master

Personal
Computer with
Configuration
Software

RS-232

DP

PROFIBUS DP
slave node #1

PROFIBUS DP
slave node #n
PROFIBUS DP
slave node #2

Figure 8.39 - Profibus-DP network

- Fieldbus Type: PROFIBUS-DP EN 50170 (DIN 19245)
Physical Interface
- Transmission means: Profibus bus bar line, type A or B as specified in
EN50170
- Topology: Master-Salve communication
- Insulation: the bus is supplied by DC/DC inverter and isolated galvanically
from remaining electronics and the signals A and B are isolated by means
of optocouplers.
- It allows the connection/disconnection of only one node without affecting
the network.
Fieldbus connector of the inverter user
- Connector D-sub 9 pins - female
- Pins:
Pin

Name

Function

1

Not connected

-

2

Not connected

-

3

B-Line

RxD/TxD positive, according to
specificacition RS-485

4

Not connected

-

5

GND

0V isolated against RS-485 circuit

6

+ 5V

5V isolated against RS-485 circuit

7

Not connected

-

8

A-Line

RxD/TxD negative, according to
specificacition RS-485

9
Frame

Not connected
Shield

Connected to the ground protection (PE)

Table 8.15 - Pin connection (DB9) to the Profibus-DP

280

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Line Termination
The initial and the en points of the network must be terminated with the
characteristic impedance in order to prevent reflections. The DB 9 cable male
connector has the suitable termination. When the inverter is the first or the
last of the network, the termination switch must be set to Pos. “ON”. Otherwise
set the switch to Pos. “OFF”. The terminating switch of the PROFIBUS DP
board must be set to 1 (OFF).
Transfer Rate (baud rate)
The transfer rate of a Profibus-DP network is defined during the master
configuration and only one rate is permitted in the same network. The ProfibusDP board has an automatic baud rate detection and the user does not need to
configure it on the board. The supported baudrates are: 9.6 kbits/s, 19.2 kbits/s,
45.45 kbits/s, 93.75 kbits/s, 187.5 kbits/s, 500 kbits/s, 1.5 Mbits/s, 3 Mbits/s, 6
Mbits/s and 12 Mbits/s.
Node Address
The node address is established by means of two rotating switches on the
electronic Profibus-DP board, permitting the addressing from 1 to 99 addresses.
Looking onto the front view of the board with the inverter in normal position,
the switch at left sets the ten of the address, while the left switch sets the unit
of the address:
Address = (set left rotary switch x 10) + (set right rotary switch x 1)

NOTE!
The node address can not be changed during operation.
Configuration File (GSD File)
Each element of a Profibus-DP network is associated to a GSD file that has
all information about the element. This file is used by program of the network
configuration. Use the file with the extension .gsd stored on the floppy disk
contained in the Fieldbus kit.
Signaling
The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right topside indicating the status of
the Fieldbus according to the table 8.16 and figure 8.40 below:
Color LED

Frequency

Status

Red

2Hz

Fault during the test of the ASIC and Flash ROM

Green

2Hz

Board has not been initialized

Green

1Hz

Board has been initialized and is operating

Red

1Hz

Fault during the RAM test

Red

4Hz

Fault during the DPRAM test

Table 8.16 - Signaling LED of the Fieldbus board status

NOTE!
The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board. The
reset is realized by switching OFF / ON the inverter. If the problem persists,
replace the electronic board.
The electronic board is also fitted with four other bicolor LED´s placed at the
right bottom side, indicating the Fieldbus status according to the Figure below:

281

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Reserved

On-Line

Fieldbus
Diagnostics

Off-Line

Figure 8.40 - LED’s indicating the status of the Profibus-DP network

LED

Color

Function

Fieldbus Diagnostics

Red

Indicates certain faults at the Fieldbus:
Flashing 1Hz - Configuration error: the IN/OUT area size set at board enabling is
different from the size set during the network configuration.
Flashing 2Hz - Error in the User´s Parameter Data: the size/content of the User Parameter
data set at board enabling is different from the size/content set during the network
configuration.
Flashing 4Hz - Enabling error of the Profibus Communication ASIC.
OFF - no problems.

On-Line

Green

Off-Line

Red

Indicates that the board is On-line at the Fieldbus
ON - the board is off-line and the data exchange is not possible.
OFF - the board is not On-line.
Indicates that the board is Off-line at the Fieldbus
ON - the board is off-line and the data exchange is not possible.
OFF - the board is not Off-line.

Table 8.17 - Signaling LED’s indicating the status of the Profibus-DP network

NOTE!
When power is applied to the drive and both on-line and off-line LED’s on the
Profibus DP board keep flashing, then a network address configuration or
installation problem may be present.
Check the installation and the network node address.

NOTE!
Use of the Profibus-DP/related CFW-09 Parameters. See item 8.12.5.

8.12.3 DeviceNet

282

Introduction
The DeviceNet communication is used for industrial automation, mainly for
the control of valves, sensors, input/output units and automation equipment.
The DeviceNet communication link is based on a communication protocol
“broadcast oriented”, the Controller Area Network (CAN). The connection to
the DeviceNet network is realized by means of a shielded cable comprising a
twisted pair and two wires for the external power supply. The baud rate can be
set to 125kbits/s, 250kbits/s or 500kbits/s. Figure 8.41 gives a general view of
a DeviceNet network.

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Controller
Device Net

Other
Devices

Sensor

Motor
Starter

Device
Configuration

Push button
Clusler

Bar Code
Scanner

Input/Output
Devices

Motor
Controller
Drive

Figure 8.41 - DeviceNet Network

NOTE!
The PLC (master) must be programmed to Polled I/O connection.
Fieldbus connector of user of the inverter
- Connector: 5 ways-connector of type plug-in with screwed terminal
(screw terminal)
- Pin:
Pin

Description

Color

1

V-

Black

2

CAN_L

Blue

3

Shield

-

4

CAN_H

White

5

V+

Red

Table 8.18 - Connection of the pins to the DeviceNet

Line Termination
To avoid reflection, the initial and the end points of the network must be
terminated with the characteristic impedance. Thus a 120-ohms/0.5W resistor
must be connected between the pins 2 and 4 of the Fieldbus connector.
baud rate/ Node Address
There are three different baudrates for the DeviceNet: 125kbits/s, 250kbits/s
or 500kbits/s. Choose one of these baudrates by setting the DIP switches on
the electronic board.
The node address is selected through the six DIPswitches on the electronic
board, permitting an addressing from 0 to 63 addresses.

283

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Address

DIP 3 to DIP 8

00

0

000000

250k

01

1

000001

500k

10

2

000010

Reserved

11

baud rate

Address

...

DIP's 1 and 2

125 k

...

baud rate [bits/s]

61

111101

62

111110

63

111111

1

ON

0
1

2 3

4

5

6 7 8

Figure 8.42 - baud rate configuration and addressing to the DeviceNet

Configuration File (EDS File)
Each element of a DeviceNet network is associated to a EDS file, that has all
information about the element. This file is used by program of the network
configuration during its configuration. Use the file with the extension .eds stored
on the floppy disk contained in the Fieldbus kit.
Setting parameter P309 to 4, 5 or 6 selects 2, 4 or 6 input/output words (see
item 8.12.5).
With the assistance of the network configuration software define the number
of words for the device according to the value set on parameter P309. The type
of connection used for data exchange shall be set for “Polled I/O”.

NOTE!
The PLC (master) must be programmed for Polled I/O connection.
Signaling
The electronic board has a bicolor LED at right topside indicating the status of
the Fieldbus according to the table 8.16.

Note:
The red fault indications mean hardware problems of the electronic board. The
reset is realized by switching OFF / ON the inverter. If the problem persists,
replace the electronic board.
The electronic board is also fitted with other four bicolor LED´s placed at the
right bottom side, indicating the DeviceNet status according to Figure 8.43
and Table 8.19:
Reserved

Network Status

Reserved

Module
Network Status

Figure 8.43 - LED’s for status indication of the DeviceNet network

284

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

LED

Color

Description

Module Network Status

ON

Without supply

Module Network Status

Red

Fault not recoverable

Module Network Status

Green

Board operating

Module Network Status

Red
Flashing

Smaller fault

Network Status

Off

Without supply/off line

Network Status

Green

Link operanting, connected

Network Status

Red

Critical fault at link

Green Flashing

On line not connected

Red Flashing

Time out of the connection

Network Status

Network Status

Table 8.19 - Signaling LED’s indicating the DeviceNet status

NOTE!
Use of the DeviceNet /related CFW-09 Parameters. See item 8.12.5.

8.12.4

EtherNet/IP

EtherNet/IP (Industrial Ethernet Protocol) is a communication system proper for
the industrial environment. This system allows application data exchange, timerestricted or critical, between industrial systems. The EtherNet/IP is available for
simple devices such as sensors/actuators as well as for complex devices such
as robots, PLCs, keypads and drives.
The Ethernet/IP application layer protocol is based on the Control and Information
Protocol (CIP) layer that is used in both DeviceNet™ and ControlNet™. The CIP
organizes the devices as collection of objects and defines the methods and
procedures for data access. Furthermore, the Ethernet/IP uses the standard
IEEE 802.3 for the low level layers and the TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols for the
intermediary layers to transport the CIP packets.
Therefore, the infrastructure used by the EtherNet/IP is the same used by the
corporate computer networks (Ethernet). This fact extends considerably the
means of controlling and monitoring the devices connected to the network:
% Availability of application protocols (HTTP, FTP, etc.).
% Integration between the factory floor network and the corporate network.
% It is based on a widely used and accepted standard.
Greater data flow than the standard protocols used for the industrial automation.

285

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Hub or Switch

PLC With EtherNet/IP
(192.168.0.1)
PC
(192.168.0.2)

Inverter
(192.168.0.3)

HMI
(192.168.0.5)

RemoteI I/O
(192.168.0.4)

EtherNet/IP

Figure 8.44 - Example of an EtherNet/IP Network

Fieldbus Connector
- Connector: RJ-45 connector with 8-pin.
- Pinout: two standards for straight-through cables are available: Ethernet:
T-568A and T-568B. The function of each pin is shown in table 1. The
cable to be used with the CFW-09 shall follow one of these two standards.
Furthermore, only one standard shall be used for the cables, i.e., the
connectors of both cable ends shall be crimped according to standard
T-568A or T-568B.
a) RJ-45 Plug - T-568A Standard
12345678
Pino
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Cable Color
White/Green
Green
White/Orange
Blue
White/Blue
Orange
White/Brown
Brown

Signal
TX+
TXRX+
RX-

b) RJ-45 Plug - T-568B Standard
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Cable Color
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown

Signa
TX+
TXRX+
RX-

12345678
12345678

Figura 8.45 a) b) - Straight-Through Ethernet Cables

286

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Line Termination
With the Ethernet 10BASE-T (10Mbps) or 100BASE-TX (100Mbps) the line
termination is already on the communication board and also on any other device
that uses a point-to-point twisted pair cable. Therefore, no additional setting is
needed for the CFW-09.
Communication Bit-rate
The CFW-09 can operate in an Ethernet network at 10Mbps or 100Mbps and
also in half-duplex or full-duplex modes. When operating at 100Mbps in fullduplex mode, the effective rate doubles to 200Mbps. These configurations are
performed through the network configuration and programming software. No board
setting is needed. It is recommended to use the auto-sensing resource.
Configuration File (EDS file)
Each device on an EtherNet/IP network is associated to an EDS file that contains
information about the device operation. The EDS file provided along with the
product is used by the network configuration software.
Indication
The communication board has four two-color LEDs located on the right bottom
corner to indicate the module and the network status.

Link
Activity

1

2

Module
Status

4

3

Network
Status

Figure 8.46 - Indication LEDs for the status of the EtherNet/IP network

LED

Color

Function

Link

Green

On: the module is connected to another device on the network (typically a hub or
switch).
Off: the module is not connected to another device.

Module Status

Green or Red

Steady Off: No power applied o the module.
Steady Green: The module is operating correctly.
Flashing Green: the module has not been configured.
Flashing Red: A minor recoverable error has been detected.
Steady Red: A major internal error has been detected.
Flashing Green/Red: The module is performing a power on self-test.

Network Status

Green or Red

Steady Off: The module has no power or no IP address has been assigned.
Steady On: the module has at least one established Ethernet/IP connection.
Flashing Green: There are no Ethernet/IP connections established to the module.
Flashing Red: One or more of the connections in which this module is the target has
timed out.
Steady Red: The module has detected that its IP address is already in use.
Flashing Green/Red: The module is performing a power on self-test.

Activity

Green

Flashing: indicates that a packet has been received and/or transmitted.

287

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!
The communication board that comes with the product has been developed
by the HMS Industrial Networks AB company. Therefore, the network
configuration software will not recognize the product as the CFW-09 variable
frequency drive, but as the “Anybus-S EtherNet/IP” at the “Communication
Adapter”. The differentiation among several CFW-09 drives will be based
on the device address on the network.
Related errors
The EtherNet/IP uses the same error codes as the other Fieldbus protocols,
i.e., E29 and E30.
E29: Fieldbus communication is off.
E30: Communication board is off.
For detailed information refer to the item 8.12.5.3.

NOTE!
The drive will indicate E29 only when the connection with the master is
lost. The drive will not indicate this error while no connection has been
established.
Control and Monitoring through the WEB
The EtherNet/IP communication board has an HTTP server internally. This
means that the communication board can serve HTML pages. In such a
way, it is possible to configure network parameters, control, and monitor
the CFW-09 drive through a WEB browser installed in a computer connected
to the same network of drive. Use the same read/write variables of the drive
to perform these operations (refer to items 8.12.5.1 and 8.12.5.2).

NOTE!
For the first WEB access use the factory default username and password.
Username: web
Password: web

Figure 8.47 - Open window when accessing the CFW-09 through the WEB

288

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.48 - Control and Monitoring window when accessing the CFW-09 through the WEB

NOTE!
It is necessary to have a PC with an Ethernet card connected to the same network
of the CFW-09 and a WEB browser (MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla/Firefox.
Configurations
Follow the steps below to operate the CFW-09 in an EtherNet/IP network.
1) Install the KFB-EN kit into the CFW-09 variable frequency drive.
2) At parameter P309 select the EtherNet/IP protocol and the number of input/
output words, P309 = 7, 8 or 9.
3) Connect the RJ-45 plug of the Ethernet cable to the drive and make sure that
the Link LED is ON (LED 1).
4) Open your WEB browser and type the drive address on the network. The
factory default value is ‘http://192.168.0.1’. Make sure that JavaScript and cookies
are enabled in the WEB browser.
The data access is protected by username and password. The CFW-09 has the
following factory default values: Username: web Password: web

289

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

5)

At the ‘Configuration’ tab of the WEB page shown in figure X set, if needed,
the ‘Network Parameters’. Set also the value of parameter P309.
6.1) If the drive address on the network belongs to the reserved range
‘192.168.0.X’, it is possible to use the DIP-switches of the communication
board for addressing purposes. In this case, the DIP-switch represents the
binary value of the last byte in the IP address.
Example:
12 3 4 5 678
ON
(MSB)

(LSB)

The DIP-switch is set to 00010100 (20 in decimal format).
Thus, the drive address on the network is 192.168.0.20.
6.2) If the drive has an IP address out of the default range (192.168.0.X),
deactivate the hardware addressing by setting the DIP-switches to zero
(00000000).
6.3) If the network addressing is performed through a DHCP server, select the
box ‘DHCP enabled’ and set the DIP-switches to zero (00000000).
7) Click on the button ‘STORE CONFIGURATION’ to save the new settings.
Restart the CFW-09
Access to the communication board
The communication board supports FTP and Telnet services. In such a way, it is
possible to upload/download files to/from the board and also access the file
system in an interactive way.
In order to use these services follow the steps below:
- Open a MS-DOS command window.
- Type the desired service (FTP or Telnet) followed by the IP address or hostname
of the CFW-09 on the network.
- Entre com: Nome do usuário: user Senha: user
Examples:
Telnet session for the CFW-09 with IP address 192.168.0.4.

FTP session for the CFW-09 whit IP address 192.168.0.4.
290

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Security and access passwords
The file system of the communication board has two security levels for the user:
admin and normal.
It is only permitted to connect in the normal mode. In this case, the users are
restricted to the directory ‘user\’, where it is possible to create or delete files
and/or folders. The accounts for normal users are defined in the file ‘sys_pswd.cfg’
that is located under directory ‘user\pswd\’. Each line of the file has a pair
‘login:password’ that corresponds to a user account.
In order to change the file containing the user accounts, create, with the
assistance of a simple text editor, a file that contains in each line a pair
‘login:password’. A colon shall separate the two words. Notice that no password
cryptography is available, i.e., the login and the password are completely visible.
After creating/modifying the user accounts, transfer via FTP the file ‘sys_pswd.cfg’
to the directory ‘user\pswd\’.
Example of file transfer through FTP:

NOTE!
The CFW-09 that comes from the factory has a normal user account:
Username: user
Password: user
Users of the normal security level are restricted to the directory ‘\user’.
291

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

In addition to the access control for the file system, there is also an access
control for the HTML pages of the communication board. The file containing
the access passwords is located under the directory ‘user\pswd’, and it is
named ‘web_accs.cfg’. As in the previous case, each line of the
‘web_accs.cfg’ file represents an access account. In order to change the
user accounts for the HTML pages, create a text file with the same name
(‘web_accs.cfg’) and insert in each line of this file a pair ‘login:password’ for
the users with access permission. After that, transfer this new file through
FTP to the communication board, exactly as in the previous case.

NOTE!
It is strongly recommended to change all passwords of the EtherNet/IP
communication board after the start-up of the device. The new passwords
will be effective only after powering down and up the CFW-09.

NOTE!
When the drive returns from the offline state the output values are reset.

8.12.5 Use to the Fieldbus/
Related Parameters
of the CFW-09

There are two main parameters: P309 and P313.
P309 - defines the used standard Fieldbus (Profibus-DP, DeviceNet)
and the number of variables (I/O) exchanged with the master (2, 4 or 6).
The parameter P309 has the following options:
0 = Inactive,
1 = Profibus DP 2 I/O,
4 = DeviceNet 2 I/O,
2 = Profibus DP 4 I/O,
5 = DeviceNet 4 I/O,
3 = Profibus DP 6 I/O,
6 = DeviceNet 6 I/O,
(for Profibus-DP),
(for Device Net).
P313 - defines the inverter behavior when the physical connection with
the master is interrupted and/or the Fieldbus board is inactive (E29/E30).
- The parameter P313 has the following options:
0 = Disables the inverter by using the Start/Stop controls via deceleration
ramp.
1 = Disables the inverter by using the General Enabling, stop by inertia.
2 = The inverter status is not changed.
3 = The inverter goes to Local mode.
4 = The drive changes to Local mode keeping the commands and the
reference.

8.12.5.1

Variables Read
from the Inverter

1 - Logical Status of the inverter,
2 - Motor speed,
For the option P309 = 1or 4 (2I/O) - read 1 and 2,
3 - Status of the Digital Inputs(P012)
4 - Parameter Status,
For the option P309 = 2 or 5 (4I/O) - it reads 1, 2, 3 and 4,
5 - Torque current (P009),
6 - Motor current (P003),
For the option P309 = 3 or 6 (6I/O) - it reads 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
1. Logical Status (E.L.):
The word that defines the E.L. is formed by 16 bits, being 8 bits of high
order and 8 bits of low order. It has the following construction:

292

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

High-Order Bits - they indicate the status of the associated function
EL.15 - Active error: 0 = No, 1 = Yes;
EL.14 - PID Regulator 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic;
EL.13 - Undervoltage : 0 = Without, 1 = with;
EL.12 - Local/Remote Control: 0 = Local, 1 = Remote;
EL.11 - JOG Control: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active;
EL.10 - Direction of rotation: 0 = Counter-Clockwise, 1 = Clockwise;
EL.09 - General Enabling: 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled;
EL.08 - Start/Stop: 0 = Stop, 1 = Start.
Low-Order Bits - they indicate the error code number, (i.e. 00, 01, ... ,09, 11(0Bh),
12(0Ch), 13(0Dh), 24(18h), 32(20h) and 41(29h) ). See Item 7.1- Faults and
Possible Causes.
2. Motor Speed:
This variable is shown by using the 13-bit resolution plus signal. Thus the rated
value will be equal to 8191(1FFFh)(clockwise rotation) or -8191(E001h) (counterclock wise rotation) when the motor is running at synchronous speed (or base
speed, for instance 1800rpm for IV-pole motor, 60Hz).
3. Status of the Digital Inputs:
Indicates the content of the Parameter P012, where the level 1 indicates active
input (with +24V) , and the level 0 indicates the inactive input (with 0V). See Item
6.1-Access and Read Parameter. The digital inputs are so distributed in this
byte:
Bit.7 - DI1 status
Bit.3 - DI5 status
Bit.6 - DI2 status
Bit.2 - DI6 status
Bit.5 - DI3 status
Bit.1 - DI7 status
Bit.4 - DI4 status
Bit.0 - DI8. status
4. Parameter Content:
This position permits to read the inverter parameter contents that are selected at
Position 4. Number of parameter to be read from the “Variables Written in the
Inverter”. The read values will have the same order as described in the product
Manual or shown on the HMI .
The values are read without decimal point, when it is the case. Examples:
a) HMI displays 12.3, the read via Fieldbus will be 123,
b) HMI displays 0.246, the read via Fieldbus will be 246.
There are some parameters which representation on the 5 segment display can
suppress the decimal point when the values are higher than 99,9. These
parameters are: P100, P101, P102 , P103, P155, P156, P157, P158, P169 (for
P202=0,1,2 and 5), P290 and P401.
Example:
Indication on the 7 segment display: 130.,
Indication on the LCD display LCD : 130.0, the read value via
Fieldbus is: 1300.
The read of the Parameter P006 via Fieldbus has the following meaning:
0 = ready;
1 = run;
2 = Undervoltage;
3 = with fault, except E24 to E27.
5. Torque Current:
This position indicates de P009 Parameter content, disregarding the decimal
point. A lowpass filter with a time constant of 0.5 s filters this variable.
293

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

6. Motor Current:
This position indicates de P003 Parameter content, disregarding the decimal
point. A lowpass filter with a time constant of 0.3 s filters this variable.

8.12.5.2

Variables Written The variables are written in the following order:
in the Inverter

1 - Logical Control,
2 - Motor speed reference,
for option P309 = 1 or 4 (2I/O) - it writes in 1 and 2;
3 - Status of the Digital Outputs;
4 - Number of the Parameter to be read,
for option P309 = 2 or 5 (4I/O) - it writes in 1, 2, 3 and 4;
5 - Number of the Parameter to be changed;
6 - Content of the Parameter to be changed, selected in the previous position,
for option P309 = 3 or 6 (6I/O) - it writes in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
1. Logical Control (C.L.):
The word that defines the C.L. is formed by 16 bits, being 8 bits of high orders
and 8 bits of low orders and having the following construction:
High-Order Bits - they select the function that shall be driven when the bit is set
to 1.

CL.15 CL.14 CL.13 CL.12 CL.11 CL.10 CL.09 CL.08 -

Inverter fault reset;
Without function;
To save the changes of the parameter P169/P170 in the EEPROM;
Local/Remote control;
Jog control;
Direction of rotation;
General enabling;
Start/Stop.

Low-Order Bits - they determine the status that is wanted for the function selected
in the high-order bits.
CL.7 - Inverter fault reset: always it varies from 0 → 1, an inverter reset is caused,
with the presence of faults (except E24, E25, E26 e E27).
CL.6 - no function / STOP detection. It is not necessary to activate the
correspondent upper bit (refer to the description of parameter P310);
CL.5 - To save P169/P170 in the EEPROM: 0 = to save, 1 = to not save;
CL.4 - Local/Remote control: 0 = Local, 1 = Remote;
CL.3 - Jog control: 0 = Inactive, 1 = Active;
CL.2 - Direction of rotation: 0 = counter-clockwise, 1 = clockwise;
CL.1 - General enabling: 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled;
CL.0 - Start/Stop: 0 = Stop, 1 = Start.

NOTE!
The inverter will execute only the command indicated in the low-order bit, when
the corresponding high-order bit has the value 1 (one). When the high-order bit
has the value 0 (zero), the inverter will disregard the value of the corresponding
low-order bit.

294

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!
CL.13:
The function to save the changes of the parameters content in EEPROM occurs
usually when the HMI is used. The EEPROM admits a limit number of writings
(100 000). In the applications where the speed regulator is saturated, but the
torque control is desired, you must change the current limitation value at P169/
P170 (valid for P202=3 and 4). In this torque control condition, check if P160
(control type) = 1 (Regulator for torque control). When the network Master is
writing in P169/P170 continuously, avoid to save the changes in the EEPROM,
by setting:
CL.13 = 1 and CL.5 = 1
To control the functions of the Logical Control, you must set the respective
inverter parameters with the Fieldbus option.
a) Local/Remote selection - P220;
b) Speed reference - P221 and/or P222;
c) Direction of rotation - P223 and/or P226;
d) General Enabling, Start/Stop - P224 and/or P227;
e) Jog Selection - P225 and/or P228.
2. Motor Speed Reference
This variable is shown by using 13-bit resolution. Hence, the reference value for
the motor synchronous speed will be equal to 8191 (1FFFh).
This value shall be used just as a base speed to calculate the desired speed
(reference speed).
For example:
1) 4-poles motor , 60Hz, synchronous speed = 1800rpm and reference
speed = 650 rpm
1800 rpm - 8191
650 rpm - X
X = 2958 = 0B8Eh
This value 0B8Eh shall be written in the second word which represents motor
speed reference (according to item 8.12.5.2).
2) 6-poles motor, 60Hz, synchronous speed = 1200rpm and reference
speed=1000rpm.
1200 rpm - 8191
1000 rpm - X
X = 4096 = 1AAAh
This value 1AAAh shall be written in the second word which represents motor
speed reference (according to item 8.12.5.2).

NOTE!
It is possible to use values higher than 8191 (1FFFh) when it is desired to have
values higher than the motor synchronous speed, since the maximum speed
reference set for the drive is respected.
3. Status of the Digital Outputs:
It allows changing the status of the Digital Outputs that are programmed for the
Fieldbus in the Parameters P275 to P280.
The word that defines the status of the digital outputs is formed by 16 bits, having
the following construction:
High-order bits: define the output that shall be controlled when set to 1,
bit.08 - 1= control of the output DO1;
bit.09 - 1= control of the output DO2;

295

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

bit.10 - 1= control of the output RL1;
bit.11 - 1= control of the output RL2;
bit.12 - 1= control of the output RL3;
Low-order bits: define the status desired for each output,
bit.0 - output status DO1: 0 = output inactive, 1 = output active;
bit.1 - output status DO2: ditto;
bit.2 - output status RL1: ditto;
bit.3 - output status RL2: ditto;
bit.4 - output status RL3: ditto.
4. Parameter Number to be Read:
Through this position you can read any inverter parameter.
You must enter the number corresponding to the desired parameter and its
content will be displayed in Position 4 of the “Read Inverter Variables”.
5. Number of the Parameter to be changed:
(Parameter Content Changing)
This position works jointly with Pos. 6 below.
If no Parameter change is desired, you have to enter in this position the code
999.
During the changing process you must:
1) Maintain in Position 5. The code 999;
2) Change the code 999 by the parameter number you want to change;
3) If no fault code (24 to 27) is displayed in the E.L., replace the code number by
the code 999, to end the change.
The change can be checked through the HMI or by reading the parameter content.

NOTES!
1) The control change from scalar control to vector control will not be accepted
if any of the parameters P409 to P413 is set to zero. This must be effected
through the HMI.
2) Do not set P204=5, since P309=Inactive in the factory setting.
3) The desired content must be maintained by the master during 15.0 ms.
Only after this time you can send a new value or write another parameter.
6. Content of the Parameter to be changed, selected at Position 5.
(Number of the Parameter to be changed)
The format of the values set at this position must be as described in the Manual, but the
value must be written without the decimal point, when the case.
When Parameters P409 to P413 are changed, small content differences can
occur, when the value sent via Fieldbus is compared with the value read at Position
4 (“Parameter Content”), or with the value read via HMI. This is due the truncation
(rounding off) during the reading process.

8.12.5.3

Fault Indications

During the read/write process via Fieldbus the following variable indications in
the Logical Status can occur:
Indications in the Logical Status variable:
E24 - Parameter changing only permitted with disabled inverter.
- Parameter setting fault (see Item 4.2.3).
E25 - Caused by:
- Read Parameter inexistent, or
- Write Parameter inexistent, or
- Write in P408 and P204

296

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

E26 - The desired content value is out of permitted range.
E27 - Caused by:
a) The function selected in the Logical Control is not enabled for the
Fieldbus, or
b) The control of the Digital Output is not enabled for the Fieldbus, or
c) The parameter write is read-only.
The fault indication described above will be removed from the Logical
Status when the desired action is sent correctly. Except for E27 (case (b)),
which reset is via write in the Logical Control.
Example: supposing that no digital output is programmed for Fieldbus, thus
when in position 3. the word 11h is written, the inverter answer indicating
E27 in E.L.. To remove this indication from E.L., you must:
1) write zero in Pos. 3.(since no DO is programmed for Fieldbus);
2) change the variable of the logical control, to remove from E.L. the E27
indication.
The removal of the fault indication from E.L. described above, can also be
realized by writing the code 999 in Pos. 5. of the “Variables written in the
Inverter”. Except for the fault E27(in the cases (a) and (b)),
which reset is realized only through the writing in the Logical Control, as
above exemplified.

NOTE!
The faults E24, E25, E26 and E27 do not cause any change in the inverter
operation status.
HMI displays:
E29 - Fieldbus is inactive
- This display appears when the physical connection of the inverter to the
Master is interrupted.
- You can program in Parameter P313 the action that the inverter shall
execute when the fault E29 is detected.
- When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed, the E29 Fault indication is
removed from the display.
E30 - Fieldbus Board is inactive
This fault is displayed when:
1) P309 is programmed different than Inactive, without Fieldbus board in
the XC140 connector of the CC9 control board; or
2) The Fieldbus board is inserted, but is defective; or
3) The Fieldbus board is inserted, but the standard programmed at P309 is
not equal to the standard of the used board.
You can program in Parameter P313 which action the inverter will
perform when E30 is detected.
When the PROG key of the HMI is pressed, the E30 Fault indication is
removed from the display.

8.12.5.4

Addressing of the
CFW-09 Variables
in the Fieldbus
Devices

The variables are arranged in the memory of the Fieldbus device, starting at
the address 00h, both for writing and reading. The address differences are
corrected by the protocol and by communication board.
The way the variables are arranged at each address in the memory of the
Fieldbus depends on the equipment that is used as Master. For instance: in
the PLC A the variables are arranged as High and Low, and in the PLC B the
variables are arranged as Low and High.

297

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION

8.13.1 Introduction

The basic objective of the serial communication is the physical connection of
inverters in a configured equipment network, as shown below:

Master

Slave 1
(Inverter)

Slave 2
(Inverter)

PC, PLC, etc.

Slave n
(Inverter)
n ≤ 30

The inverters possess a control software for the transmission/reception of
data through the serial interface, to facilitate the data reception sent by the
master and the sending of data requested by the same.
The transfer rate is 9600 bits/s, following a exchange protocol, question/answer
type by using ASCII characters.
The master is able to realize the following operations related to each inverter:
- IDENTIFICATION
network number;
inverter type;
software version.
- CONTROL
general enabling/disabling;
enabling/disabling by ramp;
direction of rotation;
speed reference;
local/remote
JOG
error RESET.
- STATUS RECOGNITION
ready;
Sub;
run;
local/remote;
fault;
JOG;
direction of rotation;
setting mode after Reset to Factory Setting
setting mode after changing the scalar control mode to vector mode.
self-tuning

298

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

- PARAMETERS READING
- CHANGE OF PARAMETERS
Typical examples of network use:
PC (master) for parameterization of one or several inverters at the same
time;
SDCD monitoring inverter variables;
PLC controlling the operation of an inverter in an industrial process.

8.13.2 Interfaces Description

The physical connection between the inverters and the network master is
performed according to one of the standards below:
a. RS-232 (point-to-point, up to 10m);
b. RS-485 (multipoint, galvanic isolation, up to 1000m);

8.13.2.1 RS-485

This interface allows the connection of up to 30 inverters to a master (PC,
PLC, etc), attributing to each inverter an address (1 to 30) that must be set.
In addition to these 30 addresses, there are two other addresses to perform
special tasks:
Address 0: any network inverter is inquired, independently of its address.
Only one inverter can be connected to the network (point-to-point) in
order to prevent short- circuits in the line interface.
Address 31: a control can be transmitted to all inverters in the network
simultaneously, without acceptance recognition.
List of addresses and corresponding ASCII characters
ADDRESS
(P308)

CHAR

ASCII
DEC

HEX

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
]
\
[
^
_

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
54
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F

Table 8.20 - ASCII characters

299

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Other ASCII characters used in protocol.

CODE

ASCII
DEC

HEX

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
=
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
NAK

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
61
02
03
04
05
06
21

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3D
02
03
04
05
06
15

Table 8.21 - ASCII characters used in protocol.

The connection between the network participants is performed through a pair
of wires. The signal levels are according to STANDARD EIA RS-485 with
differential receivers and transmitters. Expansion boards of the types EBA.01,
EBA.02 or EBB.01 (see Items 8.1.1 and 8.1.2).
When the master is fitted with only a serial interface - standard RS-232, you
must apply a level conversion module from RS-232 to RS-485.

8.13.2.2 RS-232

In this case we have the connection of a master to an inverter (point-to-point).
Data can be changed in a bi-directional way, but not simultaneous (HALF
DUPLEX).
The logical levels meet STANDARD EIA RS-232C that determines the use of
balanced signals.
In this case, one wire is used for transmission (TX), one for reception (RX) and
one for return (0V) .This configuration is a three-wire economy model. (Refer
to section 8.6)

8.13.3 Protocol Definitions

This itens describe the protocol used for serial communication.

8.13.3.1 Used Terms

300

Parameters: are those existing in the inverters whose visualization or
alteration is possible through the HMI interface.
Variables: are values that have specific inverter functions and that can
be read and, in some cases, modified by the master.
Basic variables: are those that can be accessed only through the serial
interface.

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM:
INVERTER
BASIC
VARIABLES

SERIAL CONECTION

VARIABLES

PARAMETERS

8.13.3.2

Parameters/Variables
Resolution

MASTER

During the parameter reading/changing the decimal point is disregarded in the
values received with the telegram, excepting the Basic Variables V04 (Reference
via Serial) and V08 Motor Speed) that are standardized in 13 bits (0 to 8191).
For instance:
Writing: if the purpose is to change the content of P100 to 10.0s, you
must send 100 (disregarding the decimal point);
Reading: If we read 1387 in P409, the value is 1.387( (the decimal point
is disregarded);
Writing: to change the content of V04 to 900 rpm, we must send:
V04 = 900 x

8191
= 4096
P208

Supposing P208=1800 rpm
Reading: If we read 1242 inV08, this value is given by:
V08 = 1242 x

P208
= 273 rpm
8191

Supposing P208=1800 rpm

8.13.3.3

Characters
Format

1 start bit;
8 information bits [they codify text characters and transmission characters,
removed from the 7 bits code, according to ISO 646 and complemented
for even parity (eighth bit)];
1 stop bit;
After the start bit, follows the less significant bit:
START
Start
bit

8.13.3.4 Protocol

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

8 bits of information

B6

B7

B8

STOP
Stop
bit

The transmission protocol meets Standard ISO 1745 for data transmission in
code. Only text characters sequences without header are used .
The errors monitoring is made through transmission related to the parity of the
individual 7 bit characters, according to ISO 646. The parity monitoring is
made according to DIN 66219 (even parity).
The master uses two types of messages:
301

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

READING TELEGRAM: for inquiring of the inverter variable content;
WRITING TELEGRAM: to change inverter variable content or to send
controls to the inverters.

NOTE!
No transmission between two inverters is possible. The master has the bus
access control.
Reading Telegram
This telegram allows the master receive from the inverter the content
corresponding to the inquiry code. In the answer telegram the inverter transmits
the data requested by the master.
1) Master:
EOT

ADR

ENQ
CODE

2) Inverter:
ADR

STX

=

xH

xH

xH

xH

ETX

VAL
(Hexadecimal)

CODE
TEXT

Format of the reading telegram:
EOT: control character of End of Transmission;
ADR: inverter address (ASCII@, A, B, C, to ) (ADdRess);
CODE: address of the 5-digit variable coded in ASCII;
ENQ: control character ENQuiry (enquiry);
Format of the inverter answer telegram:
ADR: 1 character - inverter address;
STX: control character - Start of TeXt;
TEXT: consists in:
CODE: address of the variable;
“ =”: separation of character;
VAL: 4 digits value (HEXADECIMAL);
ETX: control character - End of TeXt;
BCC: CheCksum Byte- EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX
(excluded) and ETX (included).

NOTE!
In some cases there can be an inverter answer with:
ADR NAK see item 8.13.3.5

302

BCC

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Writing Telegram
This telegram sends data to the inverters variables. The inverter answers by
indicating if the data have been accepted or not.
1) Master:
EOT

ADR

STX

=

xH

xH

xH

xH

ETX

BCC

VAL
(Hexadecimal)

CODE
TEXT

2) Inverter:
ADR NAK

or

ADR ACK

Format of the writing telegram:
EOT: control character of End Of Transmission;
ADR: inverter address;
STX: control character of Start of TeXt;
TEXT: consists in:
CODE: variable address;
“ =”: separation character;
VAL: 4 HEXADECIMAL digit value ;
ETX: control character of End of TeXt;
BCC: Byte of CheCksum - EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytes between STX
(excluded) and ETX (included).
Format of the inverter answer telegram:
Acceptance:
ADR: inverter address;
ACK: ACKnowledge control character;
No acceptance:
ADR: inverter address;
ACK: ACKnowledge control character;
That means that the data were not accepted and the addressed variable
continues with its old value.

8.13.3.5

Execution and
Telegram Test

The inverters and the master test the telegram syntax.
The answers for the respective verified conditions are defined as follows:
Reading telegram:
no answer: with wrong telegram structure, control characters received
incorrectly or wrong inverter address;
NAK: CODE corresponding to the variable does not exist or there is only
writing variable;
TEXT: with valid telegrams;

303

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Writing telegram:
No answer: with wrong telegram structure, control characters received
incorrectly or wrong inverter address;
NAK: code corresponding to the variable does not exist, wrong BCC
(checksum byte), only reading variable, VAL out of the allowed range for
the respective variable, operation parameter out of the alteration mode;
ACK: with valid telegrams;
The master should maintain, between two variable transmissions to the
same inverter, a waiting time that is compatible with the used inverter.

8.13.3.6

Telegram Sequence

In the inverters, the telegrams are processed in determined time intervals.
Therefore, a pause larger than the sum of the times Tproc + Tdi + Ttxi cit should
be guaranteed, between two telegrams addressed to the same inverter (see
item 8.13.6).

8.13.3.7

Variable Code

The field designated with CODE contains the parameter address and the
basic variables formed by 5 digits (ASCII characters) as follows:

CODE

X

X

X

X

X
Number of the basic variable
Equipment number:
"8" = CFW-09
"9" = any inverter
Especificator:
0 = basic variables
1 = P000 a P099
2 = P100 a P199
3 = P200 a P299
4 = P300 a P399
5 = P400 a P499
6 = P500 a P599
7 = P600 a P699
Equal to zero (0)

8.13.4 Telegram Examples

Change of the min. speed (P133) to 600 rpm in the inverter 7.

1) Master:
EOT

G

STX

0

2

8
NMIN Code

Address 7

2) Inverter:
G

304

ACK

3

3

=

0H

2H

NMIN=600=258H

5H

8H

ETX

BCC

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Reading of output current from the inverter at address 10
(supposing that the same was at 7,8A at the moment of the enquiry).
1) Master:
EOT

J

0

1

8

0

3

ENQ

0

3

=

Code P003
addr. 10

2) Inverter:
J

STX

0

1

8
Code P003

0H

0H

4H

EH

ETX

BCC

78
P003=4EH= =7.8A
10

addr.
10

NOTE!
Values sent and received via serial interface are always integer values. It
is necessary to know the parameter resolution in order to read the correct
value. (Ex. Real Current Value =7.8A ⇔ Received Value = 78)

8.13.5

Variables and Errors
of the Serial
Communication

8.13.5.1

Basic Variables

V00 (code 00800):
Indication of the inverter type (reading variable)
The reading of this variable allows the inverter type identification. For
the CFW-09 this value is 8, as defined in 8.13.3.7.
V02 (code 00802):
Indication of the inverter state (reading variable)
- Logical status (byte-high)
- Error code (byte-low)
Where:
Logical status:
E L 1 5 E L 1 4 E L 1 3 E L 1 2 E L 11 E L 1 0

EL9

EL8

305

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

EL8:
EL9:
EL10:
EL11:
EL12:
EL13:
EL14 :
EL15:

0 = ramp enabling (run/stop) inactive
1 = ramp enabling
0 = general enabling inactive
1 = general enabling active
0 = reverse
1 = forward
0 = JOG inactive
1 = JOG active
0 = local
1 = remote
0 = without undervoltage
1 = with undervoltage
not used
0 = without error
1 = with error

Inverter
enabled
EL8=EL9=1

Error Code: hexadecimal error number
Ex.:
E00 → 00H
E01 → 01H
E10 → 0AH
V03 (code 00803):
Selection of the Logical Control
Writing variable, whose bits have the following meaning:
BYTE HIGH: desired action mask. The corresponding bit should be set to 1, so
the action happens.
C L 1 5 C L 1 4 C L 1 3 C L 1 2 C L 11

CL10

CL9

MSB

CL8
LSB

- CL8: 1 = enabling ramp (Start/Stop)
- CL9: 1 = general enabling
- CL10: 1 = Forward/Reverse rotation
- CL11: 1 = JOG
- CL12: 1 = Local/Remote
- CL13: not used
- CL14: not used
- CL15: 1 = inverter “RESET”
BYTE LOW: logical level of the desired action.
CL7

CL6

CL5

CL4

CL3

CL2

CL1

MSB

- CL0: 1 = enabling (Start)
0 = disabling by ramp (Stop)
- CL1: 1 = enabling
0 = general disabling (stops by inertia)
- CL2: 1 = forward
0 = reverse
- CL3: 1 = JOG active
0 = JOG inactive
- CL4: 1 = remote
0 = local
306

CL0
LSB

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
CL5: not used
CL6: not used
CL7: the transition in this bit from 0 to 1 causes the inverter “RESET”,
when any error condition is present.
NOTE!
Disabling via Dix has priority over these disabling;
To enable the inverter by the serial it is necessary that CL0=CL1=1 and
that the external disabling is inactive;
If CL0=CL1=0 simultaneously, a general disabling occurs.
V04 (code 00804):
Reference of Frequency given by Serial (reading/writing variable).
It permits sending reference to the inverter provided P221=9 for LOC or
P222=9 for REM. This variable has a 13-bit resolution (see Item 8.13.3.2).
V06 (code 00806):
Status of the Operation Mode (read variable)
EL2
7
MSB

EL2
6

EL2
5

EL2
4

EL2
3

EL2
2

EL2
1

EL2
0
LSB

- EL2.0:1 = in setting mode after Reset for Factory Setting/First Start-up.
The inverter enter in this status as it is energized by the first time or when
the factory setting for the parameters is loaded (P204=5 or 6). In this
mode only the parameters P023, P295, P201, P296, P400, P401, P403,
P402, P404 and P406 can be accessed. If any other parameter is accessed,
the inverter displays E25. For more details, see Item 5.2 - Initial Start-up
- EL2.1:1 = in setting mode after changing the scalar control to vector control
The inverter enters in this operation mode, when the control mode is
changed from scalar control (P202=0, 1) or VVW (P202=5) to vector control
(P202=3 or 4). In this mode only the parameters P023, P202, P295, P296,
P400, P401, P403, P402, P404, P405, P406, P408, P409, P410, P411,
P412 and P413 can be accessed. If any other parameter is accessed, the
inverter displays E25. For more details, see Item 5.3.2 - Start-up Operation
- Type of Control: Vector Sensorless or with Encoder.
- EL2.2:1 = Self-Tuning execution
The inverter enters in this operation mode when P202=3 or 4 and P408 ≠ 0.
For more details about Self-tuning, see Chapter 6 - Detailed Parameter
Description, Parameter 408.
- EL2.3: 1 = in the setting mode after changing the control mode from V/Hz
or Vector controls to VVW.
The drive will enter in this operation mode when the control is changed
from V/Hz (P202=0, 1 or 2) or Vector (P202=3 or 4) to VVW (P202=5).
In this mode only parameters P023, P202, P295, P296, P400, P401, P403,
P402, P404, P406, P407, P399, P408, P409 are accessible. In case of
accessing any other parameter, the drive will trip with an error code E25.
For additional information refer to item 5.3.3 - Start-up - Type of Control:
VVW.
- EL2.4: not used
- EL2.5: not used
- EL2.6: not used
- EL2.7: not used
307

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

V07 (code 00807):
Status of the Operation Mode (read/write variable)
CL2
7

CL2
6

CL2
5

CL2
4

CL2
3

CL2
2

CL2
1

MSB

CL2
0
LSB

- CL2.0: 1 - It exit after reset from the setting mode to factory setting
- CL2.1: 1 - After changing it exit from scalar or VVW control to vector control
- CL2.2: 1 - aborts self-tuning
- CL2.3: 1 - exits the setting mode after changing the control mode from V/Hz
or Vector to VVW
- CL2.4: 1 - not used
- CL2.5: 1 - not used
- CL2.6: 1 - not used
- CL2.7: 1 - not used
V08 (code 00808):
Motor speed in 13 bits (read variable). It permits the reading of the motor
speed with a 13-bit resolution (see Item 8.13.3.2).

8.13.5.2 Examples of Telegrams
with basic variables
Inverter enabling (provided P224=2 to LOC or P227=2 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT

G

STX

0

0

8

0

3

C. L. Code

=

0H

3H

0H

3H

ETX

BCC

0H

4H

ETX

BCC

general enabling=1
ramp enabling=1

add. 7

2) inverter:
G

ACK

Change of the direction of rotation to reverse (provided P223=5 or 6 to
LOC or P226=5 or 6 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT

G

STX

0

0

8
C. L. Code

add. 7

308

0

3

=

0H
reverse

4H

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

2) Inverter:
G

ACK

JOG enabling (provided P225=3 to LOC or P228=3 to REM)
1) Master:
EOT

G

STX

0

0

8

0

3

C. L. Code

=

0H

8H

0H

8H

ETX

BCC

0H

8H

0H

ETX

BCC

JOG active=1

add. 7

2) Inverter:
G

ACK

Fault Reset
1) Master:
EOT

G

STX

0

0

8

0

C. L. Code

3

=

8H
RESET=1

add. 7

2) Inverter:
G

8.13.5.3

ACK

Parameters Related
to the Serial
Communication

Parameter number
P220

Parameter description
Local/Remote selection

P221

Local reference selection

P222

Remote reference selection

P223

Local forward/reverse selection

P224

Local Start/Stop selection

P225

Local JOG selection

P226

Remote forward/reverse selection

P227

Remote Start/Stop selection

P228

Remote JOG selection

P308

Inverter address on the Serial communication network
(range values from 1 to 30)

Table 8.22 - Parameters Related to the Serial Communication

For further information about the parameters above, see Chapter 6 - Detailed
Parameter Description.

309

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.13.5.4 Errors Related to the
Serial Communication

They act as follows:
they do not disable the inverter;
they do not disable defective relays;
they are informed in the word the logical status.
Fault Types
-E22:longitudinal parity fault;
-E24:parameterization fault (when some situation occurs as indicated
in Table 4.2. (parameter incompatibility), - Chapter 4 - Keypad (HMI)
Operation, or when there is a parameter change attempt that cannot
be changed with running motor;
-E25: variable or parameter not existing;
-E26: expected value out of the allowed limits;
-E27: writing attempt in a read only variable or logical control disabled;
-E28: Serial communication is inactive. If the time programmed at P314
has elapsed without the inverter receiving a valid Modbus telegram,
this is displayed by the HMI and the inverter adopts the action
programmed at P313.

NOTE!
If a parity fault is detected during inverter data reception, the telegram will be
ignored.
The same happens when syntax errors occur.
Ex.:
- Code values different from the numbers 0 to 9;
- Separation character different from “ =”, etc.

8.13.6

Times for Read/Write
of Telegrams
MASTER

Tx: (data)

TxD: (data)
INVERTER

RSND (request to send)
tproc

tdi

ttxi

Time (ms)

10

Tdi

5

Ttxi

310

Típical

Tproc
reading

15

writing

3

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.13.7 Physical Connection
of the RS-232 and RS-485
Interface

Network
Master
(PC,CLP)

CFW-09

CFW-09

CFW-09

Board
EBA or
EBB

Board
EBA or
EBB

Board
EBA or
EBB

AB
XC4 1 1 XC5
(EBA) 12 (EBB)
A
B

AB
XC4 1 1 XC5
(EBA) 12 (EBB)
A

RS-485

A
B
Shield
cable

B

A

B

Shield cable

Figure 8.44 - CFW-09 network connection through RS-485 Serial Interface

Notes:
LINE TERMINATION: include line termination (120Ω) at the ends. So set
S3.1/S3.2 (EBA) and S7.1/S7.2 (EBB) to “ON” (see items 8.1.1 and 8.1.2);
GROUNDING OF THE CABLE SHIELD: connect the shielding to the
equipment frame (suitable grounding)
RECOMMENDED CABLE: for balanced shielding.
Ex: AFS series from KMP;
The RS-485 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control
cables in 110/220V.
The reference signal for the RS-485 interface (SREF) shall be used when
the network master is not connected to the system/installation ground.
For instance, if the master is powered from an isolated power supply it is
necessary to ground the power supply reference or carry this reference
signal to the whole system.
In general, it is possible to connect only signals A (-) and B (+), without
connecting the signal SREF.
RS-232 Serial Interface Module
The RS-232 interface is available for the CFW09 through the module presented
in item 8.6.

XC7

5V
0V

RS-232

1

6

2

5

3

4

TX
0V
RX

Figure 8.45 - Description of the XC7 (RJ12) connector

311

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Note:
The RS-232 wiring must be laid separately from the power and control cables
in 110/220V.

NOTE!
You cannot use simultaneously the RS-232 and the RS-485 interface.

8.14 MODBUS-RTU
8.14.1 Introduction in the
Modbus-RTU Protocol

The Modbus protocol has been already developed 1979 firstly. Currently it is a
wide diffused open protocol, used by several manufacturers in different
equipment. The Modbus-RTU communication of the do CFW-09 has been
developed by considering two documents:
1. MODBUS Protocol Reference Guide Rev. J, MODICON, June 1996.
2. MODBUS Application Protocol Specification, MODBUS.ORG, may 8th 2002.
In these documents are defined the format of the messages used by these
elements that are part of the Modbus network, the services (or functions) that
can be made available via network, and also how these elements exchange
the data on the network.
Two transmission modes are defined in the protocol definition: ASCII and RTU.
The transmission modes define the form how the message bytes are
transmitted. It is not permitted to use the two transmission modes on the
same network.

8.14.1.1 Transmission Modes

In the RTU mode each transmitted word has one start bit, eight data bits, 1
parity bit (optional) and 1 stop bit (2 stop bits, if no parity bit is used). Thus the
bit sequence for the transmission of 1 byte is as follows:
Start

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

Parity or Stop

Stop

In the RTU mode each transmitted word has 1 start bit, eight data bits, 1
parity bit (optional) and 1 stop bit (2 stop bits, if parity bit is not used). Thus
the bit sequence for the transmission is as follows:

8.14.1.2

Message Structure
in RTU Mode

The Modbus RTU network operates in Master-Slave system and it can consist
of up to 247 slaves but only one Master. The master always initiates the
communication with a question to a slave and the slave answers the question.
Both messages (question and answer) have the same structure: Address,
Function Code, and CRC. Depending on what is being requested, only the
data field has variable length.

Master Query Message
Address (1 byte)

Address (1 byte)

Function Code (1 byte)

Function Code (1 byte)

Data (n bytes)

Data (n bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)

CRC (2 bytes)
Slave Answer Message

Figure 8.46 - Message Structure

312

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Address:
The master initiates the communication by sending one byte with the address
of the slave to which the message is addressed. The slave with the right slave
address initiates the message with its own address. The master can also
send a message destined to address 0 (zero), which means that the message
is destined to all network slaves (broadcast). In this case no slave will answer
to the master.
Function Code:
This field contains an only byte, where the master specifies the type of service
or the function requested to the slave (read, write, etc.). According to the
protocol, each function is used to access a specific data type. In the CFW-09
all data are available as holding type registers (referenced from the address
40000 or’ 4x’). Besides these registers, the inverter status (enabled/disabled,
with error/no error and the command for the inverter (Start/Stop, Run CW/
CCW, etc.) can be also accessed through the coils read/write functions or the
internal bits (referenced from the address 00000 or ‘0x’ on).
Data Field:
This field has variable length. The format and the content of this field depend
on the used function and transmitted values. This field and the respective
functions are described in item 8.14.3.
CRC:
The last part of the message is the field for checking the transmission errors.
The used method is the CRC-16 (Cycling Redundancy Check). This field is
formed by two bytes, where the least significant byte (CRC-) is transmitted
first and only then the most significant byte is transmitted (CRC+).
CRC calculation is started by loading a 16-bit variable (mentioned from now
on as CRC variable) with FFFFh value. Then following steps are executed with
the following routine:
1. The first message byte (only the data bits - the start bit, parity bit and stop
bit are not used) is submitted to the XOR logic (OR exclusive) with the 8
least significant bits of the CRC variable, returning the result to the CRC
variable,
2. Then the CRC variable is displaced one position to the right, in the direction
of the least significant bit and the position of the most significant bit is
filled out with zero 0 (zero).
3. After this displacement, the flag bit (bit that has been displaced out the
CRC variable) is analyzed, by considering the following:
If the bit value is 0 (zero), no change is made.
If the bit value is 1, the CRC variable content is submitted to XOR
logic with a constant A001h value and the value is returned to the
CRC variable.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the eight displacements have been realized.
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4, by using the next byte message until the whole
message have been processed. The end content of the CRC variable is
the value of the CRC field that is transmitted at the end of the message.
The least significant part is transmitted first (CRC), only then the most
significant part (CRC+) is transmitted.
313

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Times between Messages:
In the RTU mode there is no specific character that indicates the beginning or
the end of a message. Thus the only indication for the beginning or the end of
a new message is the data transmission absence in the network by 3.5 times
the time required for transmission of one data word (11 bits). Thus if a message
is initiated after elapsing of the minimum time required without transmission,
the network elements assume that the received character represents the
beginning of a new message. In similar mode, after this time has elapsed, the
network elements will assume that the message has been ended.
If during the transmission of a message, the time between the bytes is longer
than this minimum required time, the message will be considered invalid,
since the inverter will discard the already received bytes and will mount a new
message with the bytes that are being transmitted.
The table below shows the time for three different communication rates.
T3.5 x

Signal

T3.5 x

Tbetween bytes

Time
T11 bits
Message
Figure 8.47 - Times required during the communication of a message
Communication Rate

T11 bits

T3,5x

9600 kbits/sec

1.146 ms

4.010 ms

19200 kbits/sec

573 µs

2.005 ms

38400 kbits/sec

285 µs

1.003 ms

T11 bits = Time to transmit one word of the message.
Tentre bytes = Time between bytes (can not be longer than T3.5x).
T3.5x
= Minimum interval to indicate the begin and the end of the
message (3.5 x T11bits).

8.14.2

Operation of the
CFW-09 in the
Modbus-RTU
Network

8.14.2.1 Interface RS-232 and
RS-485 description

314

The CFW-09 frequency inverters operate as slaves of the Modbus-RTU network.
The communication initiates with the master of the Modbus-RTU network
requesting a service for a network address. When the inverter is configured to
the corresponding address, it processes the question and answers to the
master as requested.

The CFW-09 frequency inverters use a serial interface for the communication
with the Modbus-RTU network. There are two ways to perform the connection
between the network master and the CFW-09:

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

RS-232:
The interface is used for the point-to-point connection (between a single
slave and the master).
Max. distance: 10 meters.
Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-232C.
Three wires: transmission (TX), reception (RX) and return (0V).
The serial interface RS-232 must be used.
RS-485:
This interface is used for multipoint connection (several slaves and the
master).
Max. distance: 1000 meters (use of shielded cables).
Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-485.
You must use the EBA or EBB expansion board that has interface for the
RS-485 communication.
Note: for connection, see 8.13.7.

8.14.2.2

Inverter
Configuration in the
Modbus-RTU
Network

To ensure a correct communication in the network, you must configure the
inverter address in the network as well as the transfer rate and the existing
parity type, besides the correct physical connection.
Inverter Address in the Network:
The inverter address is defined through the parameter P308.
If the serial communication type (P312) has been configured to ModbusRTU, you may select the addresses from 1 to 247.
Each slave shall have a different address.
The master does not have address.
The slave address must be known, even when connection is made pointto-point.
Transmission Rate and Parity:
Both configurations are defined by parameter P312.
Baud rates: 9600, 19200 or 38400 kbits/sec.
Parity: None, odd parity, even parity.
All slaves and even the network master must use the same baud rate and
parity.

8.14.2.3

Access to the
Inverter Data

All parameters and available basic variables for the CFW-09 can be accessed
through the network:
Parameters: are those set in the inverter and that can be displayed and
changed through the HMI (Human-Machine Interface) (see item 1
Parameters).
Basic Variables: are the internal inverter variables that can be accessed
only through serial interface. For instance, trough these basic variables
you can change the speed reference, read the inverter status, enable or
disable the inverter, etc. (see item 8.13.5.1 - Basic Variables).
Register: nomenclature used to represent both parameters and basic
variables during data transfer.
Internal Bits: bits that are accessed only through the serial interface and
that are used for inverter status controlling and monitoring.
Item 8.13.3.2 defines the resolution of the parameters and variables
transmitted via serial interface.
315

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Available Functions and Response Times:
In the Modbus RTU protocol specification is defined the functions used for
accessing different types of registers described in the specification. In the
CFW-09 both parameters and basic variables are defined as being holding
type registers (referenced as 4x). In addition to these registers, it is also
possible to access the internal controlling and monitoring bits directly
(referenced as 0x).
Following services (or functions) are available in the CFW-09 frequency inverter for accessing these registers:
Read Coils
Description: reading of internal register blocks or coils.
Function code: 01.
Broadcast: not supported
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Read Holding Registers
Description: reading of register blocks of holding type.
Function code: 03.
Broadcast: not supported
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Single Coil
Description: writing in a single internal bit or coil.
Function code: 05.
Broadcast: supported.
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Single Register
Description: writing in a single register of holding type.
Function code: 06.
Broadcast: supported
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Multiple Coils
Description: writing in internal bit blocks or coils.
Function code: 15.
Broadcast: supported
Response time: 5 to 10 ms.
Write Multiple Registers
Description: writing in register blocks of holding type.
Function code: 16.
Broadcast: supported
Response time: 10 to 20 ms for each written register.
Read Device Identification
Description: Identification of the inverter model.
Function code: 43.
Broadcast: not supported.
Response time: 5 a 10 ms.
Note: The Modbus RTU network slaves are addressed from 1 to 247. Master
uses address 0 to send messages that are common to all slaves (broadcast).
Data Addressing and Offset:
The CFW-09 data addressing is realized with an offset equal to zero that
means that the address number is equal to the register number. The parameters
are available from address 0 (zero) on, whilst the basic variables are available
from address 5000 on. In same way, the status bits are made available from
316

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

address 0 (zero) on and the control bits are made available from address
100 on.
Table below shows the addressing of bits, parameters and basic variables:
Parameters
Parameter Number

Endereço Modbus
Decimal

Hexadecimal

P001

1

01h

100

64h
...

...

...

P100

...

00h

...

0

...

P000

Basic Variables
Modbus Address

Number of the
Basic Variable

Decimal

Hexadecimal

5001

1389h

V08

...

1388h

V01

...

5000

...

V00

5008

1390h

Status Bits
Modbus Address
00h

Bit 1

01

01h
...

Hexadecimal

00
...

Decimal

Bit 0
...

Bit Number

Bit 7

07

07h

Commands Bits
Bit Number

Modbus Address
Decimal

Hexadecimal
65h
...

64h

101
...

100

Bit 101
...

Bit 100

Bit 107

107

6Bh

Note: All registers (parameters and basic variables) are considered as
holding type registers, referenced from 40000 or 4x, whilst the bits are
referenced from 0000 or 0x.
The status bits have the same functions of the bits 8 to 15 of the logic
status (basic variable 2). These bits are available only for read, thus any
attempt to write command returns error status to the master.

317

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Status Bits
Function

Bit Number
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7

0 = Ramp enabling inactive
1 = Ramp enabling active
0 = General enabling inactive
1 = General enabling active
0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation
1 = Clockwise direction of rotation
0 = JOG inactive
1 = JOG active
0 = Local Mode
1 = Remote Mode
0 = No undervoltage
1 = With undervoltage
Not used
0 = No fault
1 = With fault

The command bits are available to read and write and they have the same
function of the logic command bits 0 to 7 (basic variable 3), however no requiring
the use of the mask. The basic variable 3 write influences the status of these
bits.
Command Bits
Function

Bit Number
Bit 100
Bit 101
Bit 102
Bit 103
Bit 104

318

Detailed Function
Description

1 = Ramp enable (Start)
0 = General disable
1 = General enable.
0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation
1 = Clockwise direction of rotation
0 = JOG disable
1 = JOG enable
0 = Goes to local mode
1 = Goes to remote mode

Bit 105

Not used

Bit 106

Not used

Bit 107

8.14.3

0 = Ramp disable (Stop)

0 = It does not reset inverter
1 = It resets inverter

This section describes in details the functions that are available in the CFW09 for the Modbus RTU communication. Please note the following during the
message preparation:
Values are always transmitted as hexadecimal values.
The address of one data, the data number and the value of the registers
are always represented through 16 bits. Thus these fields are transmitted
by using two bytes (high and low). To access the bits, and the form to
represent one bit depend on the used function.
The messages, both for enquiry and response, cannot be longer than 128 bytes.
The resolution of each parameter or basic variable is as described in item 8.13.3.2.

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.14.3.1

It reads the content of an internal group of bits that must compulsorily in
a numerical sequence. This function has the following structure for the
read and response messages (the values are always hexadecimal, and
each filed represents one byte):

Function 01 Read Coils

Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Initial bit address (byte high)

Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)

Initial bit address (byte low)

Byte 1

Number of bits (byte high)

Byte 2

Number of bits (byte low)

Byte 3

CRC-

etc to
CRC-

CRC+

CRC+

Each response bit is placed at a position of the data bytes sent by the
slave. The first byte, from the bits 0 to 7, receives the first 8 bits from the
initial address indicated by the master. The other bytes (if the number of
the read bits is higher than 8) remain in the same sequence. If the number
of the read bits is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits of the last byte
should be filled out with 0 (zero).
Example: reading of the status bits for general enable (bit 1) and
direction of rotation (bit 2) of then CFW-09 at the address 1:
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

01h

Function

01h

Initial bit address (byte high)

00h

Byte Count

01h

Initial bit address (byte low)

01h

Status of the bits 1 and 2

02h

Number of bits (byte high)

00h

CRC-

D0h

Number of bits (byte low)

02h

CRC+

49h

CRC-

ECh

CRC+

0Bh

As the number of read bits in the example is smaller than 8, the slave
required only 1 byte for the response. The value of the byte was 02h,
That as binary value will have the form 0000 0010. As the number of read
bits is equal to 2, only the two less significant bits, that have the value 0
= general disable and 1 = direction of rotation are of interest, are of interest.
The other bits, as they did not be requested, are filled out with 0 (zero).

8.14.3.2

Function 03 - Read
Holding Register

It reads the content of a group of registers that must be compulsorily in a
numerical sequence. This function has following structure for the read
and response messages (the values are always hexadecimal values, and
each field represents one byte):

319

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Initial register address (byte high)

Byte Count Field

Initial register address (byte low)

Data 1 (high)

Number of registers (byte high)

Data 1 (low)

Number of registers (byte low)

Data 2 (high)

CRC-

Data 2 (low)

CRC+

etc to
CRCCRC+

Example: Read of the value proportional to the frequency value (P002)
and motor current (P003) of the CFW-09 at address 1:
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

03h

Function

03h

Initial register (byte high)

00h

Byte Count

04h

Initial register (byte low)

02h

P002 (high)

03h

Number of registers (byte high)

00h

P002 (low)

84h

Number of registers (byte low)

02h

P003 (high)

00h

CRC-

65h

P003 (low)

35h

CRC+

CBh

CRC-

7Ah

CRC+

49h

Each register is always formed by two bytes (high e low). For the example,
we have P002 = 0384h, that in decimal number is equal to 900.
As these parameters do not have a decimal place indication, the real
read value is 900 rpm. In the same way we will have a current value P003
= 0035h, that is equal to a 53 decimal. As the current has a decimal
resolution, the read value is 5.3 A.

8.14.3.3

320

Function 05 - Write
Single Coil

This function is used to write a value to a single bit. The bit value is
represented by using two bytes, where FF00h represents the bit that is
equal to 1, and 0000h represents the bit that is equal to 0 (zero). It has
the following structure (the values are always hexadecimal, and each
field represents one byte):
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Bit address (byte high)

Bit address (byte high)

Bit address (byte low)

Bit address (byte low)

Bit value (byte high)

Bit value (byte high)

Bit value (byte low)

Bit value (byte low)

CRC-

CRC-

CRC+

CRC+

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Example: to drive a ramp enable command (bit 100 = 1) of a CFW-09
at the address 1:
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

05h

Function

05h

Bit number (high)

00h

Bit number (high)

00h

Bit number (low)

64h

Bit number (low)

64h

Bit value (high)

FFh

Bit value (high)

FFh

Bit value (low)

00h

Bit value (low)

00h

CRC-

CDh

CRC-

CDh

CRC+

E5h

CRC+

E5h

For this function, the slave response is an identical copy of the query sent by
the master.

8.14.3.4

Function 06 - Write
Single Register

This function is used to write a value to a single register. This function has
following structure (values are always hexadecimal values, and each field
represents one byte):
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Register address (byte high)

Register address (byte high)

Register address (byte low)

Register address (byte low)

Value for the register (byte high)

Value for the register (byte high)

Value for the register (byte low)

Value for the register (byte low)

CRC-

CRC-

CRC+

CRC+

Example: write of the speed reference (basic variable 4) equal to 900 rpm, of a
CFW-09 at address 1. Please remember, that the value for the basic variable 4
depends on the used motor type and that the value 8191 is equal to the rated
motor speed. In this case, we suppose that the used motor has a rated speed
of 1800 rpm, thus the value to be written into the basic variable 4 for a speed of
900 rpm is the halve of 8191, i.e., 4096 (1000h).
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h
06h

Function

06h

Function

Register (high)

13h

Register (high)

13h

Register (low)

8Ch

Register (low)

8Ch

Value (high)

10h

Value (high)

10h

Value (low)

00h

Value (low)

00h

CRC-

41h

CRC-

41h

CRC+

65h

CRC+

65h

For this function, the slave response will be again a copy identical to the request
made by the master. As already informed above, the basic variables are addressed
from 5000, thus the basic variable 4 will be addressed at 5004 (138Ch).

321

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.14.3.5

This function allows writing values for a bit group that must be in numerical
sequence. This function can be also used to write a single bit (the values
are always hexadecimal, and each field represents one byte).

Function 15 - Write
Multiple Coils

Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Initial bit address (byte high)

Initial bit address (byte high)

Initial bit address (byte low)

Initial bit address (byte low)

Number of bits (byte high)

Number of bits (byte high)

Number of bits (byte low)

Number of bits (byte low)

Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)

CRC-

Byte 1

CRC+

Byte 2

-

Byte 3

-

etc to

-

CRC-

-

CRC+

-

The value of each bit that is being sent is placed at a position of the data
bytes sent by the master. The first byte, in the bits 0 to 7, receives the 8
first bits by starting from the initial address indicated by the master. The
other bytes (if the number of inscribed bits is higher than 8) remain in
sequence. If the number of inscribed bits is not a multiple of 8, the remaining
bits of the last byte should be filled in with 0 (zero).
Example: command writing for general enabling (bit 100 = 1), general
enabling (bit 101 = 1) and CWW-direction of rotation (bit 102 = 0), for
a CFW-09 at address 1:

Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

0Fh

Function

0Fh

Initial bit (byte high)

00h

Initial bit (byte high)

00h

Initial bit (byte low)

64h

Initial bit (byte low)

64h

Number of bits (byte high)

00h

Number of bits (byte high)

00h

Number of bits (byte low)

03h

Number of bits (byte low)

03h

Byte Count

01h

CRC-

54h

Bits Value

03h

CRC+

15h

CRC-

BEh

-

-

CRC+

9Eh

-

-

As only three bits are written, the master needed only one byte to transmit
the data. The transmitted values are in the three less significant bits of the
byte that contains the value for the bits. The other bits of this byte remained
with the value 0 (zero).

322

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.14.3.6

Function 16 - Write
Multiple Registers

This function allows writing values to a register group that must be in
numerical sequence. This function can also be used to write a single
register (the values are always hexadecimal values and each field represents
one byte).
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

Initial register address (byte high)

Initial register address (byte high)

Initial register address (byte low)

Initial register address (byte low)

Number of registers (byte high)

Number of registers (byte high)

Number of registers (byte low)

Number of registers (byte low)

Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)

CRC-

Data 1 (high)

CRC+

Data 1 (low)

-

Data 2 (high)

-

Data 2 (low)

-

etc to

-

CRC-

-

CRC+

-

Example: writing of the acceleration time P100 = 1.0s and deceleration
time P101 = 2.0s, of a CFW-09 at the address 20:
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

14h

Slave address

14h

Function

10h

Function

10h

Initial register (byte high)

00h

Initial register (byte high)

00h

Initial register (byte low)

64h

Initial register (byte low)

64h

Number of registers (byte high)

00h

Number of registers (byte high)

00h

Number of registers (byte low)

02h

Number of registers (byte low)

02h

Byte Count

04h

CRC-

02h

P100 (high)

00h

CRC+

D2h

P100 (low)

0Ah

-

-

P101 (high)

00h

-

-

P101 (low)

14h

-

-

CRC-

91h

-

-

CRC+

75h

-

As the two parameters have a resolution of a decimal place for writing of 1.0
and 2.0 seconds, thus the values 10 (000Ah) and 20 (0014h) should be
transmitted.

323

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.14.3.7

Function 43 - Read
Device Identification

Auxiliary function that permits reading of the manufacturer, model and version
of the product firmware. It has following structure.
Query (Master)

Response (Slave)

Slave address

Slave address

Function

Function

MEI Type

MEI Type

Read Code

Conformity Level

Object Number

More Follows

CRC-

Next Object

CRC+

Number of Objects

-

Object Code*

-

Object length*

-

Object Value*

-

CRC-

-

CRC+

*The fields are repeated according to the number of objects.

This function permits reading of three information categories:
Basic, Regular and Extended and each category are formed by a group of
objects. Each object is formed by a sequence of ASCII characters For the
CFW-09 are only available basic information formed by three objects:
Object 00 - VendorName: always ‘WEG’.
Object 01 - ProductCode: formed by the product code (CFW-09), plus the
rated inverter current.
Object 02 - MajorMinorRevision: it indicates the inverter firmware version,
in ‘VX.XX’ format.
The read code indicates which information categories are being read and if
the objects are accessed individually of by sequence.
In the example, the inverter supports 01 (basic information in sequence), and
04 (individual access to the objects).
The other fields for the CFW-09 have fixed values.
Example: read o basic information in sequence, starting from object 00, of a
CFW-09 at address 1:
Response (Slave)

Query (Master)
Value

Field

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

2Bh

Function

2Bh

Field

324

Value

MEI Type

0Eh

MEI Type

0Eh

Read Code

01h

Read Code

01h

Object Number

00h

Conformity Level

51h

CRC-

70h

More Follows

00h

CRC+

77h

Next Object

00h

-

-

Number of Objects

03h

-

-

Object Code

00h

-

-

Object Length

03h

-

-

Object Value

‘WEG’

-

-

Object Code

01h

-

-

Object Length

0Eh

-

-

Object Value

‘CFW-09 7.0A’

-

-

Object Code

02h

-

-

Object Length

05h

-

-

Object Value

‘V2.09’

-

-

CRC-

B8h

-

-

CRC+

39h

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

In the example the Object Value has not been represented as hexadecimal
value, but with corresponding ASCII characters.
For instance, for the object 00, the ´WEG‘ value has been transmitted as
being three ASCII characters, that as hexadecimal have the values 57h (W),
45h (E) and 47h (G).

8.14.4 Communication Errors

Errors can occur during the message transmission on network, or in the
content of the received messages. Depending on the error type, inverter may
answer or not to the master:
When the master sends a message to an inverter configured at determined
network address, the inverter will not response if:
Error in the parity bit.
Error the CRC.
Time out between transmitted bytes (3.5 times the time required for
the transmission of a 11-bit word).
In the case of a successful reception of the message, the inverter can detect
problems and send a error message to the master indicating the problem that
has been verified:
Invalid function (error code = 1): the requested function has not been
implemented for the inverter.
Invalid data address (error code = 2): the data address (register or bit)
does not exist.
Data value invalid (error code = 3): this error occurs in the following
conditions:
- Value is out of permitted range.
- Writing in data that cannot be changed (only read register, or register
that does not allow changing with enabled inverter or bits of logic status).
- Writing in function of the logic command that has not been enabled
via serial interface.

8.14.4.1

When any error occurs in the message content (not during the data transfer),
the slave must return a message indicating the error type that occurred. The
errors that may occur in the CFW-08 during the message processing are
errors relating to invalid function (code 01), invalid data address (code 02) and
invalid data value (code 03).
The messages sent by the slave have following structure:

Error Messages

Response (Slave)
Slave address
Function Code
(with most significant bit to 1)
Error code
CRCCRC+

Master requests from the slave at address 1 to write parameter 89
(inexistent parameter):

325

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Query (Master)

326

Response (Slave)

Field

Value

Field

Value

Slave address

01h

Slave address

01h

Function

06h

Function

86h

Register (high)

00h

Error Code

02h

Register (low)

59h

CRC-

C3h

Value (high)

00h

CRC+

A1h

Value (low)

00h

CRC-

59h

CRC+

D9h

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.15 KIT KME (for Extractable
Mounting)

The kit KME enables the mounting of CFW-09 inverter in the sizes 8, 8E, 9,10
and 10E (models 361A to 600A/380-480V, 107A to 472A/500-690V and 100A
to 428A/660-690V) in the panel in an extractable form. The inverter is mounted
in the panel like a sliding drawer, thus making easier the assembling and
maintenance works. When requesting this kit, please specify the following:
Item

Description

Notes
Size 10 - 450A to 600A/380-480V and

417102521 KIT KME - CFW-09 M10/L=1000 Size 10E - 247A to 472A/500-690V and
255A to 428A/660-690V
Panel width= 1000mm (39.37in)
417102520 KIT KME - CFW-09 M9/L=1000
417102522 KIT KME - CFW-09 M9/L=800

Size 9 - 312A to 361A/380-480V
Panel width= 1000mm (39.37in)
Size 9 - 312A to 361A/380-480V
Panel width= 800mm (31.50in)
Size 8 - 211A to 240A/380-480V and

417102540 KIT KME - CFW-09 M8/L=600

Size 8E - 107A to 211A/500-690V and
100A to 179A/660-690V
Panel width= 600mm (23.62in)
Size 8 - 211A to 240A/380-480V

417102541 KIT KME - CFW-09 M8/L=800

Size 8E - 107A to 211A/500-690V and
100A to 179A/660-690V

Lifting support set

Panel width= 800mm (31.50in)

Note: Please see drawings in item 9.4.

Guide base of the KIT-KME for
panel mounting

M8x20 hexagon
socket-head screw

Panel support

Lateral guides for the car
Figure 8.48 - Mounting of the KIT-KME on the inverter

327

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.16 CFW-09 SHARK
NEMA 4X

In applications that need a Drive with a higher protection enclosure, the
CFW-09 SHARK NEMA 4X is indicated. The NEMA 4X provides protection
against dust, dirt and splashing or hose-directed water.

Figure 8.49 - CFW-09 Shark Nema 4X

The SHARK NEMA 4X is the CFW-09 standard with a stainless steel
enclosure. The models are:
CFW 09 0006 T 2223
CFW 09 0007 T 2223
CFW 09 0010 T 2223
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW
CFW

09
09
09
09
09
09
09

0016
0003
0004
0005
0009
0013
0016

T
T
T
T
T
T
T

2223
3848
3848
3848
3848
3848
3848

Size 1 *
Size 2 *
Size 1 *

Size 2 *

* The Shark Drive dimensions are distinct from the standard CFW-09 Drive,
so, the Sizes 1 and 2 from the Shark Drive are different from the Sizes 1 and
2 of the standard CFW-09.

8.16.1

Enclosure
Specifications

NEMA Type 4X indoors;
NEMA Type 12 indoors;
IP 56;
Other specifications are same to the standard CFW-09 and are explained
along this manual.

8.16.2

Mechanical
Installation

The Drive comes covered by a plastic film. Remove this sheet before starting
the installation.
Install the drive in an environment that does not exceed Type 4 / 4X / 12
limitations.
Install the Drive on a flat surface, in the vertical position;
External dimensions and mounting holes are according to figures 8.50 and
8.51.

328

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Cable glands for
control cable
(3x) ∅ Min=10.0
∅ Max=14.0

110 (4.33)
A

24.60
(0.97)

13.00
(0.51)

7.20 (0.28)
M6

14.30
(0.56)

Cable glands
for fan wiring

B

7.20 (0.28)
M6

90 (3.54)
122 (4.80)
159 (6.25)
205 (8.07)
216 (8.50)
221 (8.70)

Cable glands for
power cable
(3x) ∅ Min=13.0
∅ Max=18.0

R12
16.00
(0.63)

62 (2.44)
80 (3.14)
107 (4.21)
123 (4.84)
146 (5.74)
167 (6.57)
184 (7.24)
Air Flow
Outlet

200 (7.87)

A

12.5 (0.49)

335 (13.19)

308 (12.12)

360 (14.17)

234 (9.21)

Air Flow
Inlet

B

Figure 8.50 - Mechanical data – Size 1, Dimensions mm (in)

110 (4.33)

Cable glands for
power cable
(3x) ∅ Min=13.0
∅ Max=18.0

A

R12
129 (5.08)
161 (6.34)
172 (6.77)
199 (7.83)
216 (8.50)

7.20 (0.28)
M6

14.30
(0.56)

13.00
(0.51)

90 (3.54)
122 (4.80)
159 (6.25)
205 (8.07)
216 (8.50)
221 (8.70)

Cable glands
for fan wiring

B
7.20 (0.28)
M6

24.60
(0.97)

Cable glands for
control cable
(3x) ∅ Min=10.0
∅ Max=14.0

16.00
(0.63)

238 (9.37)
Air Flow
Outlet

385 (15.15)

230 (9.05)

366 (14.40)

410 (16.14)

280 (11.02)

Air Flow
Inlet

Figure 8.51 - Mechanical data – Size 2, Dimensions mm (in)

329

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.16.3

Electrical
Installation

The electrical installation is the same as CFW-09 standard. Refer to Chapter
3, item 3.2 to make a correct electrical installation.

NOTE!
To assure the NEMA 4X total protection, it is necessary to use correct cables.
It is recommended to use armored multi-core cables. For example, one tetrapolar armored cable for Power supply (R,S,T) plus grounding, and another
tetra-polar armored cable for output (motor) connection.
The wire sizing and fuses are presented in table 3.5, Chapter 3.

Figure 8.52 - Tetra-polar armored cable

The control and power wiring access to the Drive is through the cable glands.
All the cable glands come with a gasket inside. To make the electrical
installation it is necessary to remove the gasket from the cable gland and
then pass the armored multi-core cable in the cable gland.
After doing the electrical connection and arrange the cables properly, tight
the cable glands to assure that the cable is very strongly fastened. The
recommended torque is 2N.m (0.2kgf.m).
The control wiring has to be made by armored multi-core cables too. It is
necessary to use this type of cables to guarantee total closing after cable
glands tightening. Check the maximum and minimum diameter of the cables
supported by the Cable Glands in figures 8.50 and 8.51.

8.16.4

Closing the Drive

To guarantee NEMA 4X degree of protection, it is very important to close
correctly the Drive after doing the electrical installation. Please follow these
instructions:
After the electrical installation is completed and the cable glands tightened,
close the frontal cover (certify that the flat cable that interconnects the HMI to
the control card is correctly connected) by tightening each screw a little at a
time, until total tightening.
The gaskets provide the protection of the electronic parts of the SHARK drive.
Any problem with them can cause problems with the protection degree.
Opening and closing the drive many times reduces the gaskets lifetime. It is
recommended to do this no more than 20 times. If problems are detected on
the gaskets, we recommend changing the failed gasket immediately.
Certify that the door gasket is on its correct position at the moment you will
close the Drive.
Certify that the door screw gaskets are perfect on the moment you are ready
to close the drive.
All these recommendations are very important to become a successful
installation.

330

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!
Do not remove the gaskets inside the cable glands, which were not used.
They are necessary to guarantee NEMA 4X protection.

8.16.5

How to Specify

8.17

CFW-09 SUPPLIED
BY THE DC LINK –
LINE HD

8.18

CFW-09 RB
REGENERATIVE
CONVERTER

To specify a NEMA 4X Drive, it is necessary to include the term “N4” in the
field “Enclosure Degree of Protection” according to the CFW-09 specification
in Chapter 2, item 2.4 (CFW-09 Identification). Remember that the NEMA 4X
line is only up to 10HP.
The CFW-09HD inverter line, supplied by DC link, has the same installation,
mechanical, programming and performance characteristics as the Standard
CFW-09 line;
Up to size 5, an HD inverter is required to make the supply through the DC
link. In this case is sufficient to supply a standard inverter through the DC
link with an external pre-charge circuit.
The models of size 6 and larger are fitted with an internal pre-charge
circuit and have internal changes;
For more detail, refer please to the Addendum of the CFW-09 Frequency
Inverter Manual of the CFW-09HD line – supplied by DC Link. (See
www.weg.com.br).
There are two problems associated to a conventional drive with diode bridge at
the input: harmonics injection to the network and braking of loads with high
inertia, or that un at high speeds and require short braking times. The harmonic
injection to the network happens with any type of load. The braking problems
appear with loads such as sugar centrifuges, dynamometers, cranes and
winders. The CFW-09 converter with RB option (Regenerative Braking) is
WEG solution for these problems. Figure 8.53.
Shows the main components of a drive with CFW-09 RB.

Input Reat.
Supply
Motor

Filter

Figure 8.53 - Simplified diagram of a driving with CFW-09 RB

331

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

As shown in the Figure 8.53, CFW-09RB unit is fitted with a capacitor bank
and a IGBT’s bridge.
Externally is mounted a network reactance and a capacitive filter.
By switching the IGBT’s bridge, the energy can be transferred in a controlled
way from the network to the capacitor bank. One van say that by means of
the switching process, the CFW-09RB emulates a resistive load. There is
also a capacitive filter to prevent the bridge switching interferes in other network
loads. To complete this drive, the use of a CFW-09HD is required that drives
the motor and its load. This drive is shown in Figure 8.53 by the second de
IGBT’s bridge. Figure 8.54 a) shows wave shapes of the CFW-09 RB input
voltage and current, when the motor at the drive output is operating normally.

Voltage

Current

Time
Figure 8.54 a) - Functioning during operation as motor

Figure 8.54 b) shows the wave shapes of the CFW-09 RB input voltage and
current, when the motor at the drive output is submitted to a braking process.

Voltage
Current

Time
Figure 8.54 b) - Functioning during the braking process

For more details, refer to the CFW-09 RB Regenerative Converter Manual.
(See www.weg.com.br).

332

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-09 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.19

PLC BOARD

The PLC1 and PLC2 boards allow the CFW-09 drive to have PLC function,
speed reference and positioning modules. This board is optional and is
incorporated internally into the CFW-09.
Both boards cannot be used simultaneously with the EBA, EBB or EBC
boards.
The PLC1 cannot be used with fieldbus boards.
The PLC2 can have fieldbus board mounted.
Technical Characteristics
Positioning with trapezoidal and “S” profile (absolute and relative);
Homing (machine zero search);
Programming in Ladder language through the WLP Software, Timers,
Contactors, Coils and Contacts;
RS-232 with Modbus RTU protocol;
Real-time clock;
Availability of 100 parameters that may be set by the user through the
Software or via HMI;
CAN interface with CANopen and DeviceNet protocols;
Master/Slave function (ElectronicGear Box);
It has own 32 bits CPU with flash memory.
Position 1
(t0 to t2)

Speed

Position 3
(t5 - t12)

V1

V3
t2

t3

t4

Time

t5

t1

t6

t7

t8

t9

t10

t11

t12

V2
Position 2
(t2 to t5)
Figure 8.55 - Trajectory example by using the PLC board

Input/Output

Technical Specification
PLC 1
Quantities
Description
Quantities
24Vdc bipolar

9

PLC 2
Description
24 Vdc bipolar

Digital inputs

9

Relay outputs

3

Transistorized outputs

3

Encoder power supply

1

Analog output

-

-

2

12 bits (-10 V to +10 V or
(0 to 20) mA)

Analog input

-

-

1

14 bits (-10 V to +10 V or
(-20 to 20) mA)

-

-

1

Motor PTC isolated input

250 Vac/3 A ou
250 Vdc/3 A
24 Vdc/500 mA
15 V

3
3
2

250Vac/3 A or
250Vdc/3 A
24 Vdc/500 mA
5 to 24 V

Motor PTC isolated input

Note: For more details, see please the PLC Board Manual. The manual download may be effected from
the site: www.weg.com.br.

333

CHAPTER

9

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
This Chapter describes the technical specifications (electrical and mechanical)
of the CFW-09 inverter series.

9.1 POWER DATA
9.1.1 Power Supply
Specifications

Operating voltage range:
220-230V, 380-480V and 660-690V models: -15% to +10%.
500-600V models up to 32 A: -15% of rated input voltage up to 690V.
500-600V models higher or equal to 44A:
- for power supplies = 500V, 525V or 575V: ±15%;
- for power supply = 550V: -15% to +20%;
- for power supply = 600V: -15% to +10%.
500-690V models:
- for power supplies = 500V, 525V or 575V: ±15%;
- for power supply = 550V: -15% to +20%;
- for power supply = 600V: -15% to +10%;
- for power supplies = 660V or 690V: -15% to +10% (*1).
*1 - When a line voltage higher than 600V (rated value) supplies the 500-690V
models, it is necessary to derate the output current as stated in item 9.1.5.

NOTE!
For models that have rated voltage selection jumper (as described in item
3.2.3) the rated input voltage is defined by its position.
In all models, P296 parameter shall be set to the rated input voltage.
When input voltage is lower than motor rated voltage the motor power will be
reduced.
Other AC input specifications:
Frequency: 50/60Hz (± 2 Hz).
Phase Unbalance ≤ 3% of rated phase to phase input voltage.
Overvoltage Category III (EN 61010/UL 508C).
Transient voltages according to Category III.
Minimum line impedance:
1% voltage drop for models with rated current up to 130A/220-230V, up to
142A/380-480V and up to 32A/500-600V.
2% voltage drop for 380-480V models with rated current 180A and above.
500-600V models with current higher or equal to 44A/500-600V and all 500690V and 660-690V models do not require minimum line impedance, because
they have an internal DC link inductance.
See item 8.7.1 guidelines.
Power-up:
10 ON/OFF cycles per hour maximum.

334

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.1.2

220-230V Power Supply

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)
Power (kVA)

6/

7/

10/

13/

16/

24/

28/

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

2.3

2.7

3.8

5

6.1

9.1

10.7

(2)
(3)

Rated Output Current (A)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Maximum Motor (HP)/(W)

(5)

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)

28

36

42

8.4/18

(6)

19.2

28.8

33.6

5

5

5

1.5/1.1

2/1.5

3/2.2

4/3.0

5/3.7

7.5/5.5

10/7.5

69

80

114

149

183

274

320

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

12/25

45/

54/

70/

86/

105/

130/

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

220-230

CT/VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

18

21

27

28

34

34

42

42

52

52

60

45

54

68

70

86

86

105

105

(4)

68

(7)

(8)

105

129

130 130
158

150
195

65

82

84

103

103

126

126

156 156

180

5

5

2.5

5

2.5

5

2.5

5

2.5

2.5

0.5

Frame Size

81

54

15/11

Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)

(6)

5

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)

9.1.3

24

24

15.6

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)

Watts Loss (kW)

16

19.5

5

(2)

Rated Input Current (A)

13

15

5

(8)

Rated Output Current (A)

10

10,5

5

Frame Size

Power (kVA)

7

9
7.2/15 (6)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Watts Loss (W)

6

3

5

20/

25/

25/

30/

30/

40/

40/

50/

50/

60/

15

18.5

18.5

22

22

30

30

37

37

45

0.8

0.8

1.0

1.0

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.5

0.6

1.7

4

5

5

6

6

3,6/

4/

5,5/

9/

13/

16/

24/

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

2.7

3.0

4.2

6.9

9.9

12.2

18.3

3.6

4

5.5

9

13

16

24

380-480V Power Supply

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)
Power (kVA)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A) (3)
Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)

5.4

6

8.3

13.5

19.5

24

36

4.3

4.8

6.6

10.8

15.6

19.2

28.8

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

1.5/1.1

2/1.5

3/2.2

5/3.7

7.5/5.5

10/7.5

15/11

Watts Loss (W) (8)

60

66

92

152

218

268

403

Frame Size

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)

Note: CT = Constant Torque
VT = Variable Torque
Factory Default

335

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)

30/

38/

45/

60/

70/

86/

105/

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

CT

Power (kVA)

(2)
(3)

Rated Output Current (A)

Maximum Output Current (A)

CT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

29

30

36

36

43

48

56

56

68

68

84

84

100

30

36

38

45

45

54

60

70

70

86

86

105

105 130

84

103

103

2.5

5

(4)

Watts Loss (kW)
Frame Size

(8)

43.2

Power (kVA)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)

54

2.5

5

2.5

20/ 25/
15 18.5
0.50 0.60
3

5

25/
18.5
0.70

84

5

2.5

5

2.5

5

30/
22
0.80

40/
30
0.90

40/
30
1.00

50/
37
1.20

50/
37
1.20

4

4

5

158

126

126 156

2.5

5

180/

211/

240/

312

361/

450/

515

600/

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480

380-480
CT/VT

VT

CT/ VT

CT/ VT

CT/ VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

CT/VT

138

143

161

191

238

287

358

392.5

478

142

174

180

211

240

312

361

450

515

600

213
209

270

317

360

468

542

675

773

900

191

223

254

331

383

477

546

636

5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

100/

125/

150/

175/

200/

250/

300/

350/

450/

500/

75

90

110

130.5

150

186.5

220

250

335.7

375

2.4

2.9

3

3.5

4

5.2

6

7.6

8.5

10

8

8

8

9

9

10

10

10

7

500-600V Power Supply

Load (1)
Power (kVA)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (W)
Frame Size

(8)

2.5

60/ 60/ 75/ 75/ 100/
45
45
55 55
75
1.50 1.50 1.80 1.80 2.20
5
6
6

CT

(8)

Model: Current / Voltage

2.9/

4.2/

7/

10/

12/

14/

500-600

500-600

500-600

500-600

500-600

500-600

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT/VT

2.9

4.2

4.2

7

7

10

10

12

12

13.9

13.9

2.9

4.2

4.2

7

7

10

10

12

12

14

14

4.4

4.6

6.3

7.7

10.5

11

15

15

18

18

21

3.6

5.2

5.2

8.8

8.8

12.5

12.5

15

15

17.5

17.5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

2/1.5 3/2.2 3/2.2 5/3.7
70

100
2

100

160
2

5/3.7 7.5/5.5 7.5/5.5 10/7.5 10/7.5 12.5/9.2
160

230

230

2

Note: CT = Constant Torque
VT = Variable Torque
Factory Default

336

129

380-480

Frame Size

9.1.4

105

72

113

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)

Watts Loss (kW)

30/
22
0.80

90

64.8

142/

170

Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)

54

380-480

(4)

(7)

Rated Input Current (A)

VT

68

45.6

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)

CT

57

36

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)

VT

45

(7)

Rated Input Current (A)

VT

24

280
2

280

330
2

5
12.5/9.2
330
2

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

22/

27/

32/

500-600

500-600

500-600

Model: Current / Voltage
Load (1)
Power (kVA)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW)
Watts Loss (W)

(5)

CT

VT

21.9

26.9

22

27

33

33

27.5

33.8

5

5

20/15

(8)

Load (1)
(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW)
Watts Loss (kW)

620

27

32

32

40.5

40.5

48

33.8

40

40

5

5

5

620

750

(5)

(8)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (kW)

53/

63/

79/

500-600

500-600

500-600

CT

VT

CT

VT

43.8

52.8

52.8

62.7

44

53

53

63

63

79

79

99

66

66

79.5

79.5

94.5

94.5

118.5

118.5

Load (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Watts Loss (kW)

(8)

VT
98.6

56

56

66

66

83

83

104

5

5

5

2.5

2.5

2.5

40/30

50/37

50/37

60/45

60/45

75/55

75/55

100/75

1

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.5

1.8

1.8

7

2.5

7

7

107/

147/

211/

247/

500-690

500-690

500-690

500-690

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT/VT

CT

VT

107

147

147

195

210

210

314

107

147

147

196

211

247

315

160

160

220.5

220.5

316.5

370.5

370.5

107

147

147

196

211

247

315

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

4.1

4.1

8E

5.1

8E

6
10E

315/

343/

418/

472/

500-690

500-690

500-690

500-690

Model: Current / Voltage

Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW)

CT
78.7

2.5

2.5

(5)

VT
78.7

46

8E

Rated Input Current (A)

CT
62.7

2.5

Frame Size

Maximum Output Current (A)

4

100/75 150/110 150/110 200/150 200/150 250/185 300/220

(8)

Rated Output Current (A)

750

4

7

Load (1)

30/22

44/

Model: Current / Voltage

Frame Size

31.9

500-600

Frame Size

Power (kVA)

CT/VT

4

Model: Current / Voltage

Power (kVA)

VT
31.9

25/18.5 25/18.5 30/22

500

Frame Size

Power (kVA)

CT
26.9

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

314

342

342

416

416

470

470

553

315

343

343

418

418

472

472

555

472.5

472.5

514.5

514.5

627

627

708

708

315

343

343

418

418

472

472

555

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

300/220 350/250 350/250 400/300 400/300 500/370 500/370 600/450
6

6.8
10E

6.8

8.2

8.2

10E

11
10E

11

12.3
10E

Note: CT = Constant Torque
VT = Variable Torque
Factory Default
337

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.1.5

660-690V Power Supply
100/

Model: Current / Voltage

127/

660-690
Load (1)
Power (kVA)

(2)

Rated Output Current (A)

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (kW)

660-690
VT

CT/VT

CT

VT

120

152

152

214

214

269

310

100

127

127

179

179

225

259

150

150

190.5

197

268.5

337.5

337.5

100

127

127

179

179

225

259

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

Model: Current / Voltage

3

(2)
(3)
(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (kW)

8E

259/

305/

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (kW)

CT/VT

310

365

365

406

406

512

512

259

305

305

340

340

428

428

388.5

388.5

457.5

457.5

510

510

642

259

305

305

340

340

428

428

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

6.8

(3)

Maximum Output Current (A)
Rated Input Current (A)

(4)

(7)

Rated Switching Frequency (kHz)
Maximum Motor (HP)/(kW) (5)
Watts Loss (kW)

(8)

8.2

8.2

11

10E

147/

211/

500-690

500-690

10E
247/
500-690

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT/VT

CT

VT

120

152

152

214

214

269

310

100

127

127

179

179

225

259

150

150

190.5

197

268.5

337.5

100

127

127

179

179

225

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

3

3

4.1
8E

200/150 250/185
4.1

337.5
259
2.5
300/220

5.1

8E

6
10E

315/

343/

418/

472/

500-690

500-690

500-690

500-690

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT

VT

CT/VT

310

365

365

406

406

512

512

259

305

305

340

340

428

428

388.5

388.5

457.5

457.5

510

510

642

259

305

305

340

340

428

428

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

300/220 350/250
6

6.8
10E

350/250 400/300 400/300 500/370
6.8

8.2

8.2

10E

Note: CT = Constant Torque
VT = Variable Torque
Factory Default
338

500/370

11

10E

8E

Rated Output Current (A)

Frame Size

6.8

107/

Model: Current / Voltage

Power (kVA)

2.5

350/250 400/300 400/300 500/370

500-690

Frame Size

(2)

660-690

VT

2.5

Load (1)

660-690
CT

100/75 150/110 150/110 200/150

(8)

428/

VT

Model: Current / Voltage

Rated Output Current (A)

6
10E

340/

660-690

10E

(2)

5.1

8E

CT

6

Load (1)

4.1

VT

Frame Size

Power (kVA)

2.5
300/220

CT

300/220 350/250

(8)

4.1

8E

660-690
Load (1)

Rated Input Current (A)

660-690

CT

2.5

Maximum Output Current (A)

660-690

VT

100/75 150/110 150/110 200/150 200/150 250/185

(8)

Rated Output Current (A)

225/

CT

Frame Size

Power (kVA)

179/

11
10E

2.5
500/370
11
10E

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NOTES:
(1)

CT - Constant Torque

VT - Variable Torque

Torque

Torque

Tn

Tn

Speed
Nominal

Speed
Nominal

Figure 9.1 - Load Characteristics

(2)
The power rating in kVA is determined by the following equation:
P(kVA) =

3. Input Voltage (V) x Current Rating (A)
1000

The values shown on the Tables 9.1.2 to 9.1.5 were calculated considering
the inverter rated current rating and an input voltage of 230V for 220-230V
models, 460V for 380-480V models, 575V for 500-600V models and 690V for
660-690V models.
(3)
Rated Output Current is valid for the following conditions:
Relative Air Humidity: 5% to 90%, non condensing;
Altitude : 1000m (3,300 ft) – nominal conditions.
From 1000m to 4000m (3,300ft to 13,200 ft) – with 1% current reduction
for each 100m (330 ft) above 1000m (3,300 ft).
Ambient Temperature: 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF) - nominal conditions.
From 0 ºC to 55 ºC (32 ºF to 131 ºF) - with 2% current derating for each
1ºC (1.8 ºF) degree above 40 ºC (104 ºF).
The rated current values are valid for the indicated switching frequencies.
The 10kHz switching frequency is not possible for the 2.9A to 79A/500600V, 107A to 472A/500-690V and 100A to 428A/660-690V models.
The operation at 10kHz is possible for V/F control mode and vector control
with encoder mode. In this case it´s necessary to derate the output current
according to table 9.1.

339

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Models
6A to 45A / 220-230V
54A to 130A/220-230V
3.6A to 24A / 380-480V
30A to 142A / 380-480V

Switching
Frequency

Output Current
Derating - %

10kHz

0.8

VT

5kHz
10kHz

Contact WEG

CT/VT
CT

10kHz

0.7

5kHz
10kHz
5kHz
10kHz

Contact WEG

Load
Type
CT/VT
CT

VT

180A to 600A / 380-480V

CT/VT

63A / 500-600V

VT
CT
VT
CT
VT
CT
VT

79A / 500-600V
107A to 472A / 500-690V
100A to 428A / 660-690V

0.8

5kHz
Contact WEG

Table 9.1 - Output current derating for switching frequency ≥ rated switching frequency

(4)
Maximum Current: 1.5 x I Nominal (for 60 seconds every 10 minutes).
I Nominal = Rated Current for CT applications considering the applicable
derating (depending on altitude or ambient temperature as specified in
note (3)).
The maximum output current is the same for CT and VT. This way the
inverter has a lower overload capacity when VT current is used.
(5)
The indicated maximum motor HP/kW ratings are based on WEG 230V/460V/
575V 4 pole motors and normal duty loads. A precise inverter sizing must
consider the actual motor nameplate and application data.
(6)
Rated input current for single-phase operation.
Note: The 6A , 7A and 10A / 220-230 V models can be operated with 2 input
phases only (single-phase operation) without output current derating.
(7)
Rated input current for three-phase operation:
This is a conservative value. In practice the value of this current depends on
the line impedance. Please see table 9.2:
X (%)
0.5
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0

I input (rms) (%)
131
121
106
99
96
96

Table 9.2 - X = Line impedance drop @ rated inverter output current;
I input (rms) = % of the rated output current

(8)
Loss considering rated work conditions (rated output current and rated
switching frequency).
340

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.2 ELECTRONICS/GENERAL DATA
Voltage Source V/F (Scalar), or
Vector Control with Encoder Feedback, or
Sensorless Vector Control (without Encoder)
PWM SVM (Space Vector Modulation)
Current, Flux and Speed Digital Regulators
METHOD

Scan Time:
Current Regulators: 0.2 ms (5 kHz)

CONTROL

Flux Regulator: 0.4 ms (2.5 kHz)
Speed Regulator / Speed Measurement: 1.2 ms
OUTPUT
FREQUENCY

0 to 3,4 x motor rated frequency (P403). This rated frequency can be set from
0Hz to 300Hz in scalar mode and from 30Hz to 120Hz in vector mode.
VVW:
Regulation: 1% of Base Speed
Speed Range: 1:30
Sensorless:
Regulation: 0.5% of Base Speed

SPEED
CONTROL

Speed Range: 1:100
With Encoder: (with EBA or EBB Board)
Regulation:
+/- 0.01% of Base Speed with 14 bit Analog Input (EBA Board);

PERFORMANCE
(Vector Mode)

+/- 0.01% of Base Speed with Digital Reference (Keypad,
Serial Port, Fieldbus, Electronic Potentiometer, Multispeed);
+/- 0.1% of Base Speed with 10 bit Analog Input (CC9 Board).
TORQUE
CONTROL

Range: 20 to 180%, Regulation: +/-10% of Rated Torque (sensorless above 3Hz)

ANALOG

(4 to 20) mA; Impedance: 400k Ω [(0 to 10) V], 500 Ω [(0 to 20) mA or

Range: 10 to 180%, Regulation: +/-10% of Rated Torque (with encoder)

2 Non Isolated Differential Inputs: (0 to 10) V, (0 to 20) mA or
INPUTS
(CC9 Board)

(4 to 20) mA]; Resolution: 10 bit, Programmable Functions;
DIGITAL

6 Isolated Inputs: 24 Vdc; Programmable Functions
2 Non Isolated Outputs: (0 to 10) V; RL ≥ 10 kΩ (1 mA Maximum);

ANALOG
OUTPUTS
(CC9 Board)
RELAY

Resolution: 11 bits; Programmable Functions.
2 Relays: NO/NC contacts available; 240 Vac, 1 A;
Programmable Functions.
1 Relay: NO contact available; 240 Vac, 1 A;
Programmable Functions.
Overcurrent/Output Short-circuit
(Trip Point: >2 x Rated Current for CT application)
DC Link Under/Overvoltage
Power Supply Undervoltage/Phase Fault

SAFETY

PROTECTION

(1)

Inverter Overtemperature
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload
Motor/Inverter Overload (Ixt)
External Fault
CPU/EPROM Error
Output Ground Fault
Programming Error

341

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

KEYPAD
(HMI)

STANDARD
(HMI-CFW09-LCD)

8 Keys: Start, Sop, Increase, Decrease, FWD/REV, JOG,
Local/Remote and Program
LCD display: 2 lines x 16 characters
LED display: 4 Digits with 7 segments
LED’s for FWD/REV and LOC/REM Indication
Display Accuracy:
- Current: 5% of Rated Current
- Speed Resolution: 1 rpm
Remote mounting possibility,
Cables available up to 10m (30ft)
NEMA 1/ IP20: 3.6A to 240A/380-480V models and all 220-230V and 500-600V

NEMA1/IP20
DEGREE OF
PROTECTION

models and 107A to 211A/500-690V and 100A to 179A/660-690V.
PROTECTED
CHASSIS / IP20

Protected chassis/IP20: 361A to 600A/380-480V models, 247A to 472A/500690V and 225A to 428A/660-690V.

(1) Available in models ≥ 30A / 220-230V or ≥ 30A / 380-480V or ≥ 22A / 500 -600V or for all 500-690V and 660-690V models.

9.2.1 Applicable Standards

GENERAL

UL508C - Power conversion equipment
UL840 - Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electrical
equipment
EN50178 - Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN60204-1 - Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1: General requirements.
Provisions for compliance: the final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
EN60146 (IEC 146) - Semiconductor convertors
EN61800-2 - Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 2: General requirements - Rating
specifications for low voltage adjustable frequency AC power drive systems.

EMC

MECHANICAL

342

EN 61800-3 - Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods
EN55011 - Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial,
scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment
CISPR11 - Industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment - Electromagnetic
disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement
EN61000-4-2 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test
EN61000-4-3 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
EN61000-4-4 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
EN61000-4-5 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test
EN61000-4-6 - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
EN60529 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
UL50 - Enclosures for electrical equipment

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.3 OPTIONAL
DEVICES
9.3.1 I/O Expansion
Board EBA
COMMUNICATION

SERIAL INTERFACE
ANALOG

INPUTS

INCREMENTAL
ENCODER

DIGITAL

ANALOG

OUTPUTS

ENCODER
DIGITAL

Isolated RS-485 Serial Interface (the RS-485 and RS-232 serial
interfaces cannot be used simultaneously)
1 Bipolar Analog Input (AI4): -10V to +10V; (0 to 20) mA or
(4 to 20) mA; Linearity: 14 bits (0.006% of 10V range)
Programmable Functions
Incremental Encoder Feedback Input:Internal 12 V dc, 200 mA max
isolated power supply Differential inputs A, A, B, B, Z and Z signals
(100 kHz max) 14 bits resolution. Used as speed feedback for the
speed regulator and digital speed measurement
1 Programmable Isolated 24Vdc Digital Input (DI7)
Programmable Digital Input (DI8). For motor PTC-thermistor
Actuation: 3.9 kΩ
Release: 1.6 kΩ
2 Bipolar Analog Outputs (AO3/AO4): -10V to +10V
Linearity: 14 bits (0.006% of +/- 10V range)
Programmable Functions
Buffered Encoder Output:Input signal repeater; Isolated
differential outputs
2 Isolated Transistor Outputs (DO1/DO2): Open collector, 24 Vdc, 50 mA
Programmable Functions

9.3.2 I/O Expansion
Board EBB
COMMUNICATION

SERIAL INTERFACE

ANALOG

INPUTS

INCREMENTAL
ENCODER

DIGITAL

ANALOG

OUTPUTS

ENCODER
DIGITAL

Isolated RS-485 Serial Interface (the RS-485 and RS-232 serial
interfaces cannot be used simultaneously)
1 Isolated Analog Input (AI3): 0V to 10V or (0 to 20)mA or (4 to 20)mA
Resolution: 10 bits; Programmable Functions
Incremental Encoder Feedback Input: Internal 12 Vdc, 200mA max
isolated power supply Differential inputs signals A, A, B, B, Z and Z
(100 kHz max) 14 bit resolution. Used as speed feedback for the
speed regulator and digital speed measurement
1 Programmable Isolated 24Vdc Digital Input (DI7)
1 Programmable Digital Input (DI8):For motor PTC-thermistor,
Actuation: 3.9 kΩ
Release: 1.6 kΩ
2 Isolated Analog Outputs (AO1'/AO2'): (0 to 20)mA or (4 to 20)mA; Linearity:
11 bits (0.05% of full scale); Programmable Functions (Same as AO1 and AO2 of
CC9 control board).
Buffered Encoder Output: Input signal repeater Isolated differential
outputs
2 Isolated Transistor Outputs (DO1/DO2): Open collector
24Vdc, 50mA; Programmable Functions

343

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.4 MECHANICAL DATA

4.5 (0.18)

SIZE 1

132 (5.19)
106 (4.17)
75 (2.95)

6
(0.24)

6
(0.24)

20
(0.78)

50 (1.97)

34
(1.33)

28
(1.10)

143 (5.68)

104 (4.09)

7
(0.28)

25
(0.98)

196 (7.71)

6
(0.24)

6
(0.24)

94 (3.7)
134 (5.27)

12
(0.47)

11
(0.43)

Air Flow outlet
143 (5.63)

180 (7.08)

210 (8.26)

121 (4.76)

61
(2.40)

Air Flow outlet

8 (0.31)

Air Flow inlet

139 (5.47)
127 (5.00)

6 (0.23)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.2 - Size 1 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

344

196 (7.71)

2.5 (0.098)

191 (7.52)

12 (0.47)

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 2
173 (6.31)

M5

M5

138 (5.43)

6
(0.24)

C

6
(0.24)

∅ 22,4

6
(0.24)

91 (3.58)
D

4.5 (0.18)

B

A

6
(0.24)

D

C

∅4

∅4

25
(0.98)

34
(1.33)

∅ 33,5

28
(1.10)

196
(7.71)

7
(0.28)

45 (1.77)
11
(0.43)

12
(0.47)

138 (5.43)
173 (6.81)

Air Flow
outlet
161
(6.34)

290
(11.41)

260
(10.23)

A

B

182
(7.16)

Air Flow
outlet

8 (0.31)

Air Flow
inlet

178 (7.0)
167 (6.57)

276 (10.86)

2.5 (0.098)

271 (10.67)

12 (0.47)

6 (0.23)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.3 - Size 2 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

345

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIZE 3
219 (8.62)
34
(1.34)

34
(1.34)

5 (0.20)

16
(0.63)

8.6 (0.34)

7.2 (0.28)

13 (0.51)

274 (10.78)

24.6 (0.97)

147 (5.79)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 35

197.5 (7.78)

7.2 (0.28)

62.5 (2.46)
111.5 (4.39)
160.5 (6.32)
150 (5.91)

36.5 (1.44)

370 (14.57)

390 (15.35)

10 (0.39)

Air Flow
outlet

375 (14.76)

223 (8.78)

84.5 (3.33)

223 (8.78)

Air Flow
inlet
Air Flow
outlet

225 (8.86)

14 (0.55)

372 (14.65)

400 (15.75)

150 (5.91)

Air Flow inlet

37.5 (1.48)

Figure 9.4 - Size 3 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

346

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

34
(1.34)

SIZE 4

34
(1.34)

7.2 (0.28)

13.6 (0.54)

16 (0.63)

10 (0.39)

13 (0.51)

24.6 (0.97)

274 (10.79)

158 (6.22)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 35

200 (7.87)

7.2 (0.28)

76 (2.99)

15 (0.59)

125 (4.92)
174 (6.85)
250 (9.84)

Air Flow
outlet

150 (5.91)

450 (17.72)

450 (17.72)

475 (18.70)

50 (1.97)

84.5 (3.33)

250 (9.84)

Air Flow
inlet

Air Flow
outlet

252 (9.92)

Air Flow inlet

14 (0.55)

480 (18.90)

452 (17.80)

150 (5.91)

51 (2.01)

Figure 9.5 - Size 4 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

347

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIZE 5

95.5 (3.76)
167.5 (6.59)
239.5 (9.43)

20
(0.79)

15 (0.59)

10 (0.39)

14.6 (0.57)

9.2 (0.36)

9.2 (0.36)

29.6 (1.17)

274 (11.18)

154.5 (6.08)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 50.0

203.5 (8.30)

34
(1.34)

34
(1.34)

67.5 (2.66)

525 (20.67)

525 (20.67)

550 (21.65)

335 (13.19)

200 (7.87)

15 (0.59)

Air Flow
outlet

84.5 (3.33)

Air Flow
inlet

Air Flow
outlet

337 (13.27)

14 (0.55)

555 (21.85)

527 (20.75)

200 (7.87)

68.5 (2.70)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.6 - Size 5 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

348

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 6
9.2 (0.36)
10 (0.39)

15 (0.59)

300 (11.81)

171.5 (6.75)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 63.0

229.5 (9.04)

29.6 (1.17)

9.2 (0.36)

20
(0.79)

14.6 (0.57)

34
(1.34)

34
(1.34)

84.5 (3.33)
167.5 (6.59)
250.5 (9.86)

67.5 (2.66)
15 (0.59)

200 (7.87)

650 (25.59)

650 (25.59)

675 (26.57)

Air Flow
outlet

335 (13.19)
84.5 (3.33)

Air Flow
inlet
Air Flow
outlet
337 (13.27)

14 (0.55)

680 (26.77)

652 (25.67)

200 (7.87)

68.5 (2.70)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.7 - Size 6 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

349

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 7

34
(1.34)

171.5 (6.75)
229.5 (9.04)
300 (11.81)

85 (3.35)
168 (6.61)

14.6 (0.57)

9.2 (0.36)
15 (0.59)

9.2 (0.36)

29.6 (1.17)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 63.0

10 (0.39)

34
(1.34)

20
(0.79)

251 (9.88)

Air Flow
outlet

67.5 (2.66)

810 (31.89)

835 (32.87)

810 (31.89)

15 (0.59)

200 (7.87)

335 (13.19)
84.5 (3.33)

Air Flow
inlet
Air Flow
outlet
337 (13.27)

14 (0.55)

812 (31.97)

840 (37.07)

200 (7.87)

68.5 (2.70)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.8 - Size 7 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

350

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIZE 8 AND 8E
DETAIL OF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
366 (14.41)

112 (4.41)
151 (5.94)

255 (10.04)

159 (6.26)

300.5 (11.83)

207 (8.15)

263 (10.35)

322 (12.68)

44 (1.73)

92 (3.62)

38 (1.50)
133 (5.24)

205 (8.07)

277 (10.91)

318 (12.52)

372 (14.65)

9.2 (0.36)

14.6 (0.57)

10 (0.39)

15 (0.59)

9.2 (0.36)

29.6 (1.17)

20
(0.79)

15 (0.59)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 76

40 (1.57)

370 (14.57)

40 (1.57)

Air Flow
outlet
67.5 (2.66)

410 (16.14)

275 (10.83)

84.5 (3.33)

Air Flow inlet
Figure 9.9 - Size 8 and 8E - Dimensions in mm (inch)

351

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Air Flow
inlet
412 (16.22)

14 (0.55)

275 (2.83)

68.5 (2.70)

Air Flow
inlet

Length
Dimensions
Size 8
Size 8E

L
mm
975

in
38.38
1145

L1
mm
in
950
37.4
1122.5 44.19

L2
L3
mm
in
mm
in
952
37.48
980
38.58
1124.5 44.27 1152.5 45.37

45.08
Figure 9.9 (cont.) - Size 8 and 8E - Dimensions in mm (inch)

352

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIZE 9

DETAIL OF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
40 (1.57)

40 (1.57)

592 (23.31)

48 (1.83)

310 (12.20)

166 (6.54) 144 (5.67)

156 (6.14)

320 (12.60)

146 (5.75)

238 (9.37)

492 (19.37)

238 (9.37)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 102

418 (16.46)

Det. E

41 (1.61)

344 (13.54)

68 (2.68)

542 (21.34)

344 (13.54)
620 (24.41)
647 (25.47)

15 (0.59)

16 (0.63)

33.6 (1.32)

20.6 (0.81)

11.2 (0.44)

11.2 (0.44)

950 (37.40)

1020 (40.16)

Air Flow
outlet

688 (27.09)

69 (2.72)
275 (10.83)

275 (10.83)

985 (38.78)

20 (0.79)

24
(0.94)

99 (3.90)

Air Flow
inlet
Figure 9.10 - Size 9 - Dimensions in mm (inch)

353

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE 10 AND 10E
DETAIL OF CUTOUT
WITHOUT FLANGE
40 (1.57)

40 (1.57)
54 (2.13)

592 (23.31)

152 (5.98)

310 (12.20)

166 (6.54) 144 (5.67)

156 (6.14)

320 (12.60)

238 (9.37)

Conduit for
power
cable
(3x) φ 102

238 (9.37)

Det. E

44 (1.73)

350 (13.78)
74 (2.91)

548 (21.57)

350 (13.78)
626 (24.65)
656 (25.83)

15 (0.59)

16 (0.63)

33.6 (1.32)

20.6 (0.81)

11.2 (0.44)

11.2 (0.44)

24
(0.94)

20 (0.79)

75 (2.95)

1150 (45.28)

1135 (44.69)

1185 (46.65)

Air Flow
outlet

99 (3.90)

700 (27.09)

Length
Dimensions
Size 10
Size 10E

Air Flow
inlet
D1
mm
in
418
16.45
508
20

D2
mm
492
582

in
19.37
22.91

Figure 9.11 - Size 10 and 10E - Dimensions in mm (inch)

354

275 (10.83)

275 (10.83)

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

180A-240A/380-480V Models (size 8)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1 and 2 are
not supplied with KME Kit. These should be
constructed according to panel dimensions and with
fixing holes as specified.

Figure 9.12 a) - KIT-KME for Size 8 - Panel Width = 600mm (23.62 in)

355

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

180A-240A/380-480V Models (size 8)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1 and 2
are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be
constructed according to panel dimensions and
with fixing holes as specified.

Figure 9.12 b) - KIT-KME for Size 8 - Panel Width = 800mm (31.50 in)

356

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

107A to 211A/500-600V Models (size 8E)
and 100A to 179A/660-690 V Models (size 8E)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel
dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1 and 2
are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be
constructed according to panel dimensions and
with fixing holes as specified.

Figure 9.12 c) - KIT-KME for Size 8E - Panel Width = 600mm (23.62 in)

357

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

107A to 211A/500-600V Models (size 8E)
and 100A to 179A/660-690 V Models (size 8E)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1 and 2
are not supplied with KME Kit. These should be
constructed according to panel dimensions and
with fixing holes as specified.

Figure 9.12 d) - KIT-KME for Size 8E - Panel Width = 800mm (31.50 in)

358

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

312A to 361A/380-480V (size 9) Models

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel
dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1
and 2 are not supplied with KME Kit. These
should be constructed according to panel
dimensions and with fixing holes as
specified.

Figure 9.13 a) - KIT-KME for Size 9 - Panel Width = 800mm (31.50 in) and 1000mm (39.37 in)

359

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

450A to 600A/380-480V Models (size 10)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel
dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1
and 2 are not supplied with KME Kit.
These should be constructed according
to panel dimensions and with fixing holes
as specified.

Figure 9.13 b) - KIT-KME for Size 10 - Panel Width = 800mm (31.50 in) and 1000mm (39.37 in)

360

CHAPTER 9 - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

247A to 472A/500-690V Models (size 10E) and
225A to 428A/660-690V Models (size 10E)

NOTES:
a) The X dimensions will depend on panel
dimensions.
b) The fixing panel supports identified by 1
and 2 are not supplied with KME Kit.
These should be constructed according
to panel dimensions and with fixing holes
as specified.

Figure 9.13 c) - KIT-KME for Size 10E - Panel Width = 800mm (31.50 in) and 1000mm (39.37 in)

361



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Create Date                     : 2006:08:21 08:08:37Z
Creator Tool                    : PDF reDirect Pro v2
Modify Date                     : 2006:08:21 10:26:17-03:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:08:21 10:26:17-03:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Alex Sandro S. Vilver
Title                           : CFW-09_V3_7X_E11_0899_5306
Description                     : Acesso Editoração
Producer                        : EXP Systems LLC (www.exp-systems.com)
Document ID                     : uuid:eb291138-ee8b-481f-be38-0eeb8487a0c7
Instance ID                     : uuid:a59c4c92-a027-4c32-b915-48f3014698c9
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 361
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Subject                         : Acesso Editoração
Author                          : Alex Sandro S. Vilver

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools